diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-06 00:43:59 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-06 00:43:59 -0800 |
| commit | aafaee34dcbdb1e9ef6f8a2eedc7c133e5cf39dc (patch) | |
| tree | acaa9537e9db70db2bebad0f6242be55f2901042 | |
| parent | 1d37df2d293ed3daba8ef7d2b658e10f55941280 (diff) | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52394-0.txt | 6604 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52394-0.zip | bin | 110264 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52394-h.zip | bin | 155763 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52394-h/52394-h.htm | 8860 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52394-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 32529 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52394-h/images/logo.jpg | bin | 12258 -> 0 bytes |
9 files changed, 17 insertions, 15464 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a077ff --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #52394 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/52394) diff --git a/old/52394-0.txt b/old/52394-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 88486e5..0000000 --- a/old/52394-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6604 +0,0 @@ -Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts in the Air, by George A. Warren - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Banner Boy Scouts in the Air - -Author: George A. Warren - -Release Date: June 23, 2016 [EBook #52394] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS IN THE AIR *** - - - - -Produced by Giovanni Fini, Roger Frank and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE: - -—Obvious print and punctuation errors were corrected. - - - - - BANNER BOY SCOUTS IN THE AIR - - - - - THE BANNER - BOY SCOUTS - IN THE AIR - - _By_ - GEORGE A. WARREN - - THE WORLD SYNDICATE - PUBLISHING COMPANY - CLEVELAND NEW YORK - - - - - Copyright, 1937 - by - The World Syndicate Publishing Co. - -[Illustration: LOGO] - - _Printed in the United States of America_ - - - - - CONTENTS - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I AT THE AIRPORT 9 - - II THE MEETING 17 - - III BOBOLINK IS A HERO 23 - - IV FLYING 28 - - V THE REWARD 39 - - VI WHAT TO DO WITH THE MONEY 46 - - VII MYSTERY 56 - - VIII THE MYSTERY BECOMES COMPLICATED 65 - - IX CLUES 75 - - X FLYING INSTRUCTIONS 86 - - XI BASEBALL GAME 102 - - XII WHAT HAPPENED TO WALLACE 123 - - XIII THE CAVE 134 - - XIV FLYING SOLO 146 - - XV A COMPLICATED SURPRISE 155 - - XVI SWIMMING CONTEST 163 - - XVII MAN CHAINED 177 - - XVIII THE TRAP 193 - - XIX AT THE CAVE AGAIN 204 - - XX BATTLE IN THE SKY 216 - - XXI NIGHT ENCOUNTER 226 - - XXII “THE CAVE” 242 - - - - - BANNER BOY SCOUTS IN THE AIR - - - - -CHAPTER I - -AT THE AIRPORT - - -Paul and Jack were dashing along on their bicycles through Main Street. -It was a clear, beautiful summer day. School was over and they grasped -the first opportunity to run over to the airport about a mile outside -of Stanhope and which had only recently been completed. - -The two boys wore their Scout uniforms and they pedalled along swiftly. -Several townspeople paused to watch them pass by and wondered what -might be the cause of their haste. Paul stuck his left hand out and -they turned right into Oliver Street, thus taking a short cut to -the highway and then to the aerodrome. When they arrived at their -objective, they dismounted and stood around, taking everything in with -their eyes. - -The flying field was about a mile long and half a mile wide and -entirely cleared of trees, bushes or anything that might be an -obstruction. To one side were a group of sheds and a building, -evidently the office. At about the middle of the field there was a -solitary monoplane. - -Jack gasped. Finally he remarked, “Gee, isn’t this grand?” - -Paul nodded. He was as much overcome with the wonder of it as his chum. -“Boy!” he exclaimed, “it sure is.” - -Jack said, “Let’s walk over to the buildings.” - -His chum nodded. “Sure, let’s go.” - -Pushing their bicycles along side of them, they walked across the -field. They could barely contain themselves with wonder, joy and -astonishment, which was the cause of their lack of speech. For the past -weeks they had been so excited by the news of the flying field being -completed that they found it difficult to control themselves enough to -go on with their school work. And it wasn’t only Jack and Paul, but -all their chums had suddenly become interested in aeronautics. They -began to boast of their ambition to become pilots, fly all over the -world and enjoy all sorts of adventurous experiences. At times, instead -of studying their biology lessons or French, they would be reading -thrilling air stories or books on flying. - -As the two boys approached the office building, a man emerged and -waved to them. They waved back. Paul whispered, “I’ll bet it’s Major -McCarthy, the manager.” - -Paul was right. The Major was a tall, stocky man of about forty and -almost bald. He smiled to them and said, “Hello fellows. I’m Major -McCarthy. Is there anything I can do for you?” - -Jack said, “We came over to look around, if you have no objections, -Major.” - -The Major smiled warmly. “Oh, none whatsoever. You’re welcome.” - -Paul said, “My name is Paul—Paul Morrison.” - -“And your dad is Dr. Morrison?” - -“That’s right. How did you know?” - -“Well, there’s only one Dr. Morrison in Stanhope. Glad to meet you, -Paul.” - -The two shook hands. Jack said, “I’m Jack Stormways.” - -“Glad to know you,” the major said and they shook hands. - -For a few seconds there ensued an embarrassed silence. Neither Jack nor -Paul could think of anything to say and Major McCarthy was waiting for -them to ask questions. Finally the major said, “Suppose you boys lean -your bicycles against the wall and I’ll show you around. There isn’t -much doing now and I have some time on my hands.” - -Paul cried, “I think that’s swell of you.” - -And Jack added, “Thanks a lot.” - -The boys quickly leaned their wheels against the wall and then joined -the major, one on either side of him. The major said, “I might as well -begin by telling you something about the field. You’ll notice that -the field is cleared of all obstructions. That’s absolutely necessary -to make sure there is nothing to cause an accident in taking off or -landing. The field is about a mile long. That’s to provide plenty of -room for taking off or landing.” - -Jack interrupted. “How much of a run does it take to land or take off?” - -Paul nodded, implying that he too was interested in the question. Major -McCarthy answered, “It all depends. A light ship can take off in about -a hundred yards or less. A big ship heavily loaded may take a quarter -or half a mile or even more to take off. In landing, the ground speed -depends a lot upon the velocity of the wind. The stronger the wind, the -less space required in which to land.” - -They were walking towards the sheds. Pointing, Paul asked, “What’s -that?” - -The major looked in the direction the boy was pointing. “That’s a wind -indicator,” he said. “That shows which way the wind is blowing.” - -“And what’s the purpose of that?” Paul asked. - -“To tell which way to land. You always land directly into the wind.” - -They were heading toward the monoplane. The boys were thrilled. They -had seen planes in the movies and in the daily newspapers, but they had -never seen a _real_ plane. As soon as they neared the ship, the first -reaction of the boys was to pat it, caress it as if it were a live -thing. The major smiled casually and understood how they felt. He said, -“Suppose the two of you get into the observer’s seat while I get into -the pilot’s place and I’ll explain a few things to you about a plane.” - -The boys gasped for breath, they were so shocked by the invitation. “Do -you think it’s all right?” Paul asked bewildered. - -“Of course,” the major answered, “otherwise I wouldn’t ask you.” - -Quickly, lest he reconsider his invitation, the boys scrambled into -the observer’s seat. Major McCarthy climbed into the pilot’s seat. -They leaned over the major’s shoulders and stared at a bewildering and -numerous collection of gadgets on the dashboard. The major said, “First -I had better explain to you the meaning of these gadgets.” Pointing -to a dial, he explained, “This is the revolution counter. The engine -in this plane is designed to give about two thousand revolutions per -minute. For all practical purposes, about 1700 or 1800 revolutions are -sufficient. Here, on the right, is the throttle lever. And here are -the gasoline and oil gauges. This is the ‘doper’ which pumps a spray -of gasoline into the engine to help in starting it up. These are the -gasoline taps connecting the two tanks and each of the tanks with -the feed pipes leading to the carburetors. And this is the ignition -control. You keep it advanced when running but retarded when starting -up. This is the water temperature indicator. You always keep the water -pretty hot.” He paused, then he asked, “Do you have any questions?” - -The boys shook their heads, bewildered by it all. “If there are no -questions,” Major McCarthy said, “then I’ll continue.” - -“This is the control lever, or the ‘joystick’ as it is commonly -called.” And he grasped the handle of a short straight stick that -protruded upwards between his legs from the floor of the cockpit. -“The stick is attached to a universal joint, and it controls both the -longitudinal movements as well as the lateral movements by means of -wires attached to the elevator and the ailerons. If you want to go up, -all you do is pull the stick back; if you want to go down, you push -the stick forward. Now notice where my feet are—on the rudder bar. If -I want to turn to the left, I push my left foot forward; if I want -to turn to the right, I push the right foot forward. Simple, isn’t -it?” And he looked up to see the astonishment on the boys’ faces. He -continued with his interesting lecture. “Now when I want to turn, I -must push the joystick over simultaneously and in the same direction as -the rudder. This is called ‘banking’ on one side. The object of banking -on a turn is to offer the under-surface of the wings as a plane of -resistance to the air. Not banking the plane over retards the forward -speed. If you don’t bank enough you may get into a ‘flat turn’. Now -a ‘flat turn’ is bad because you may thus stall the motor and take a -nose dive and unless you keep your head clear and straighten out again, -you’ll most likely crash. Do you understand what I’m talking about?” - -Both boys nodded; actually it was all a puzzle to them. Paul remarked, -“Gosh, Major, it must be wonderful to be a pilot.” - -“It isn’t such a bad job.” - -“Do you think we could learn to fly?” inquired Jack. - -“Of course. Anybody could.” - -“Could you teach us?” Jack was anxious. - -“Certainly. But I imagine you’d first have to get permission from your -parents. I don’t suppose either one of you is eighteen or over.” - -The boys shook their heads dejectedly. “I’m only seventeen and a half,” -Jack said. - -“I’m going to be eighteen the fifteenth of next month”—that from Paul. - -Major McCarthy looked up. Somebody over at the hangar was calling to -him and motioning for him to come over. “Well, I have to go now. Let’s -get out of the plane.” Walking back toward the hangers, the major said, -“Come around again one of these days and if I have time I’ll take you -up.” - -“Gee, wouldn’t that be swell,” Paul cried. “You really mean it?” - -“Of course.” - -Jack was eager. “How about tomorrow?” he asked. - -Major McCarthy nodded. “Okey” he said, “but I must ask you boys to -obtain permission of your parents. Otherwise I won’t do it.” - -“That’s a bargain,” said Paul. “If my dad or mother object I’ll tell -you the truth.” - -“Same here,” chimed in his chum. - -“All right then, I’ll see you boys tomorrow.” - -Waving their hands to the Major, they took their bicycles and walked -off the field. - - - - -CHAPTER II - -THE MEETING - - -Peddling back to town, their minds were in the clouds. Each one was -thinking how wonderful it would be to learn to fly, to be a pilot and -fly all over the country, perhaps all over the world. And when they -thought of the adventure that was in store for them, their hearts -swelled with joy and their pulses missed a couple of beats. Paul, who -was riding behind, pulled up alongside of his chum, and asked, “Do you -think we ought to tell the boys about it?” - -“You mean about our coming over here?” Jack queried. - -“Yes.” - -“Why not? They would certainly be very much interested and there’s no -reason why we can’t tell them.” - -Paul mused for a moment. Then he said, “But if we tell them that the -Major promised to take us up tomorrow, then the whole gang will come -out here and want to be taken up. Then perhaps he won’t take any one of -us up.” - -“I never thought of that,” Jack said. “But then I suppose—” He didn’t -finish his sentence because he didn’t know what to say. He didn’t want -to hold anything back from the boys, yet he thought it was rather -selfish on his part not to let them in on it. The same thoughts were -going through Paul’s head. They were both fine chaps and ready to share -with their friends not only their thoughts, adventures but even their -most personal things. But the idea of going up in the air, of actually -flying in a real airplane, stunned them. And they naturally hated to be -deprived of their forthcoming joyous adventure. Finally, Jack said, “I -don’t know, but I think we ought to tell them.” - -Paul’s face lit up. “That’s just what I was thinking,” he told his chum. - -That off their chests, they wheeled into town briskly. On Main Street, -they caught sight of Arline Blair. They jumped off their bikes as they -pulled up alongside of her. “Hello, Arline,” both boys cried out. - -She was about a year younger than the boys and one of the prettiest -girls in town. “Hello,” she said. “Where are you boys coming from? -You’re so flushed and look so happy, I wonder what you fellows were up -to.” - -“We were over to the airport,” Paul told her. - -“Really?” She opened her eyes wide with astonishment. - -Jack blurted out, “Sure. And we’re going to learn how to fly and be -pilots.” - -“Both of us,” added Paul. - -Arline pursed her lips. “Isn’t it glorious just to think of it!” she -remarked. - -The boys stuck their chests out. “It certainly is,” both agreed. - -Paul asked, “Which way are you going, Arline?” - -“Home.” - -“Take you there on my handle bars.” - -Jack interrupted, “Perhaps Miss Blair would prefer to ride on my handle -bars.” - -Arline shook her head. “No. It isn’t very nice for a young lady to ride -on handle bars,” she remarked coolly. - -“But you used to do it and like it too,” insisted Paul. - -“Yes, that’s right,” echoed Jack, “you used to ask me to give you -rides.” - -Miss Blair raised her chin several inches. “My childhood days are over, -gentlemen. Good day Mr. Morrison, and you, Mr. Stormways.” And with -that continued her walk down the street, every inch of her a queen. - -Jack and Paul looked at each other puzzled, speechless. Paul shrugged -his shoulders and put his hand out. Seriously and affectionately they -shook hands, jumped on their bikes and were off again. - -When the two boys arrived at the meeting place, they found their chums, -members of their Patrol, waiting for them. All were dressed in Scout -uniforms. The Carberry twins—Wallace and William—were there; so were -Bluff Shipley, Bobolink (Robert Oliver Link), Nuthin’ (Albert Cypher), -and Ken Armstrong. Just as soon as Paul and Jack came in sight, the -boys set up a howl. “Hey, where have you guys been?” - -“We’ve been waiting an hour for you fellows.” - -“What’s the idea of keeping us waiting like this?” - -“You fellows must be up to some mischief.” - -Paul and Jack looked at each other and smiled. Paul held up his hand -and the boys quieted down considerably. “Would you care to know where -we’ve been?” - -“Of course.” - -“Certainly.” - -“Come on, Paul, tell us.” - -“Hey, Jack, don’t hold back on us.” - -Jack, to tantalize his friends, turned to Paul and asked, “Do you think -we ought to tell them?” - -“Hey, how do you get that way?” - -Wallace began jumping up and down. “You better tell us,” he cried, “or -we’ll roast you.” - -“Roast them, that’s it,” echoed Bobolink. - -Paul held up his hand and the boys quieted down. “We’ve been over to -the airport,” he announced. - -Bedlam broke loose, the boys were so thrilled and excited. So many -questions were hurled at the two boys that they stuck their fingers -into their ears and turned away. When the boys finally quieted down -again, Paul said, “If you promise to keep order, we’ll tell you about -it.” - -Bluff stuttered, “Sure, we p-p-promise. Don’t we, b-boys?” - -They all nodded and agreed. Between Paul and Jack it was decided that -Paul should be the one to narrate the events of their adventurous -afternoon. As he told the story, the boys gasped with amazement. And -when he told them about the major’s promise to take them up into the -air on the morrow, the boys were dumbfounded. Finally, the first one to -regain his speech, William, exclaimed, “Gee, what luck!” - -Bluff muttered mournfully, “Luck! There is no word for it. These two -have all the luck in the world.” - -Wallace, the sober and serious one of the twins arose. “Scouts,” -he began in a dignified tone, “in view of the fact that we are all -interested in aeronautics, I propose—” he hesitated and looked around -to see all eyes on him. “I propose,” he continued, “that we consider -ways and means to learn everything there is about flying and about -airplanes.” - -Nuthin’ cried, “That’s a mighty fine suggestion, but how are we going -to do it?” - -Paul suggested, “We might talk it over with Major McCarthy, he’s the -manager of the airport and he ought to know.” - -Bobolink cried, “Sure he knows and he’ll tell us too. I want to be a -pilot.” - -“S-s-same here,” stuttered Bluff. - -“In that case,” spoke up Jack, “I guess we better postpone any further -discussion until Paul and I will see Major McCarthy tomorrow. We’ll -speak to him and then report back.” - -“That’s swell.” - -“Okey.” - -“That’s the right idea.” - -Paul asked, “Is everybody agreed?” All the boys nodded. “Then the -meeting is adjourned until tomorrow,” he concluded. - - - - -CHAPTER III - -BOBOLINK IS A HERO - - -Jack and Paul mounted their bicycles and peddled along very leisurely. -The other six, in formation, marched on the side walk. Suddenly a -shriek pierced the air. Bobolink was the first to notice. Dropping out -of line, he began to run at full speed. The others, although they were -not sure what it was all about, nevertheless also joined in the run. A -blue sedan was speeding down the street and bearing down on a little -boy of about three who, unconcerned of traffic or any danger, was -crossing the street. Half way across he paused and stared for several -seconds at the cobblestones, then he continued walking to the other -side, thus getting into the path of the oncoming, speeding automobile. -Several women screamed. The mother, about ten yards away, fainted. - -Bobolink ran until his breath was gone. It was the fastest hundred -yard run a human could do. The speeding car was barely a yard away -when Bobolink reached the spot. With his outstretched arms he gave -the child a shove that sent him sprawling. The next moment he saw a -galaxy of stars, a piercing pain made him cry out and then darkness, -unconsciousness. The automobile had side-swiped him and scraped his -right side. - -A great number of people immediately collected and surrounded the two -victims. The child, except for being shocked and very slightly bruised, -was unhurt. Bobolink, however, lay stretched out, appearing more dead -than alive. - -Paul and Jack, on their bicycles, saw the incident. Immediately -they wheeled around and peddled vigorously after the speeding car. -Ordinarily, the chase would have been a futile and useless gesture. But -the boys knew that about 500 yards away was a very sharp left turn, and -at the speed the driver was going, he was sure either to crash or turn -over. And sure enough, the driver, ignorant of the sharp turn ahead, -did not slow up until it was too late. Frantically he swung the wheel, -so he would not crash into the wall that loomed up in front of him. The -side of the car bounced against the concrete wall and turned over into -the ditch. Just as the boys came up and jumped off their wheels, the -driver had extricated himself. He was a tall, husky, evil looking young -man. Dazed, he stood wavering on his legs and shaking himself trying to -shake off his dizziness. Without hesitation, the boys jumped on him. He -offered no resistance. He lay stunned. Paul said, “Guess he’s out all -right.” - -They looked down at the unconscious form sprawling on the ground. The -man’s face was a mass of blood and his hand was twisted as though -broken at the wrist. Paul said, “I’ll stay here and watch him. You ride -back and get the police and have an ambulance come.” - -Jack nodded. “But suppose he comes to, do you think you could hold him?” - -Paul looked down at the victim. “Even if he comes to,” he said, “he’d -be too weak to run or put up any fight.” - -“All right, then,” Jack said, “I’m going.” - -But just as he was about to mount his bike, he saw an ambulance come -speeding toward them. Evidently someone in the house a short distance -away had seen the accident and immediately reported it by telephone. - -The ambulance stopped. An interne jumped out and with him a policeman. -The doctor examined the man, then had him put on a stretcher and into -the ambulance. The policeman examined the wrecked car, took the license -number, removed a valise, and then questioned Paul and Jack who told -him all they knew. They asked him about Bobolink but he knew nothing of -what happened to the boy. - -The ambulance turned around and went back to town. With heavy hearts -and wondering whether their friend was alive or dead, the two boys -mounted their bikes and wheeled back to town. Jack sidled up to his -chum. “What are we going to do now, Paul?” he asked. - -“I guess we better try to find out how Bobolink is,” he answered. - -“He was a swell guy,” muttered Jack. - -“He certainly was,” echoed Paul. - -“Do you think he was killed or just hurt?” - -Paul shrugged his shoulders. “Don’t know,” he answered. “We better wait -and see.” - -They peddled along slowly and mournfully. At last they came to -Bobolink’s home and found all the other boys idling dolefully on the -porch. - -Paul approached the twins and asked, “How is he?” - -Wallace shook his head and turned away. William whispered hoarsely, -“Don’t know yet.” - -About ten minutes later Dr. Morrison emerged from the house. Noticing -the boys congregated on the porch, with their faces drawn and appearing -quite sombre, he looked puzzled, then suddenly smiled. They rushed up -and surrounded him. Paul asked, “How is he, Dad?” - -“He’s fine,” Dr. Morrison replied. “Nothing to worry about. He’ll be -back with you and running around as though nothing had happened, in -three days.” - -Bluff for once didn’t stutter and cried, “Hooray! Hooray for Bobolink!” - -The other boys joined and they cheered the hero. When they quieted -down, Paul asked his father, “May we go in to see him?” - -The doctor nodded. “Yes, of course. That is, if it’s all right with -Mrs. Link.” - -So Jack was delegated to go in and ask Mrs. Link for permission to see -Bobolink, which was granted. So they entered in a body to cheer up the -invalid and hero. - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -FLYING - - -That evening Paul and Jack approached their parents for permission -to be taken up in an airplane. Paul encountered little difficulty, -much to his surprise. Of course, he was cautioned several times to be -careful and he reiterated all the arguments he could muster about how -safe flying had become and that there was no danger involved at all. -Jack, on the other hand, found his mother set against any such thing. -His father was reasonable and consented, but only on condition that -his mother did not object. But she did, very strenuously! Jack argued -his case as well as the best lawyers until his mother would no longer -answer him but merely shake her head. Finally he told her that if -Paul’s mother didn’t object he didn’t see why she should. So she called -up Mrs. Morrison and then reluctantly gave her consent. Jack jumped -high in the air and whooped for joy. - -That night both boys found it difficult to fall asleep thinking of the -adventure that was in store for them. And when they finally did fall -asleep they dreamed of all sorts of things. Jack dreamed that he was a -pilot flying across the country. Paul dreamed that he and his chum were -flying across the jungles of South America and that they crashed and -became lost in the jungles. And just as a wild animal which he couldn’t -recognize was about to jump at him, he woke up and tumbled out of bed. - -At about noon, Jack met Paul at the latter’s home and, mounting their -bicycles, they were off to the airport. They were so thrilled that they -couldn’t talk. So they peddled along briskly and when they arrived at -their destination they found the Carberry twins and Nuthin’ already -there and waiting for them. As Paul and Jack came in sight, the three -boys set up a yell. Major McCarthy came out of the office building and -waved to them. “Hello, there,” he said. “Are you ready to go up?” - -Paul cried, “Sure. And we can hardly wait.” - -Jack said, “And our parents gave us permission, too.” - -The major smiled cheerfully. “I don’t see any reason for them to -object,” he said, “but then some parents object thinking that it’s -dangerous when it isn’t at all.” - -The boys agreed with him. Nuthin’ cried, “You fellows don’t know how -lucky you are. I’d give a right arm to be in your place.” - -William offered higher stakes. He said, “I’d give a right arm and a -right leg to change places with either of you two.” - -Major McCarthy grinned. “Maybe I’ll take you boys up on that,” he said. -“I can always use a couple of right arms.” - -William jumped high in the air and whooped. “Say, do you mean that?” he -demanded. - -“I’m not saying a thing,” the major replied. “We’ll just wait and see.” - -He went into the office and returned a few minutes later. “Already to -go up?” he asked. They answered eagerly that they were and he said, -“Then let’s go.” - -The two boys fell in alongside of him with the three others trailing -behind. At the hangar, one of the mechanics helped the major wheel out -the plane. Then the mechanic hunted up a couple of jackets and goggles -for the boys. When everything was ready, the major said, “All right, -boys, climb into the observer’s seat. If you make yourselves small -enough, there will be plenty of room for both of you.” - -They climbed in. The other three boys were told to retreat about a -hundred yards away. Finally the major got into the cockpit. Turning to -the boys, he asked them, “Everything all right? Not frightened?” - -They shook their heads and assured him that they felt perfectly at -ease. The mechanic grasped hold of the propeller. “Ready! Switch off! -Suck in!” he shouted. - -“Switch off! Suck in!” answered the pilot. - -The boys leaned over to watch what the pilot was doing. As the mechanic -turned the propeller over about half a dozen times, the pilot, with -a few strokes of the doping pump, sprayed gasoline vapor into the -cylinders. “Contact!” cried the mechanic. - -“Contact!” replied the major. He pressed down the switches and quickly -turned the handle of the starting magneto. Brrr ... brrrr ... went the -engine. The mechanic sprang away. The mechanic made as though to bound -forward but was checked by the wooden chocks, placed in front of the -under-carriage wheels. - -Just as he was ready, he turned back and asked, “Are you ready boys?” - -“Yes, sir,” they replied. - -“Very well, then, we’re off.” - -The three boys at the sheds cheered lustily as the machine began to -move and Paul and Jack waved to them. And before they realized it the -machine was about six feet off the ground which seemed to be falling -away beneath them. The plane kept climbing steadily upwards. The boys -leaned forward. They saw that the air-speed indicator registered a -little over a hundred miles an hour, and they wondered because they -couldn’t feel the machine traveling at such a rate of speed. As they -continued to climb, the boys looked over the side at the scene below -them. The earth now appeared like a great colored map, with fields -showing up in different shades of green and brown. The airport which -they had only shortly left, was a little to the left of them. Sheds and -houses and barns appeared as very small rectangular blocks. As they -climbed still higher, things took on yet smaller proportions. Major -McCarthy spoke to them through the telephone. “Well, how do you like -it?” he asked. - -Paul answered for both of them. “Marvelous!” he cried. - -The pilot banked the machine and it steeped over on one side so sharply -that the boys instinctively clutched for support. McCarthy’s voice came -over the telephone “Don’t be alarmed,” he said, “there’s no danger and -you can’t fall out.” He straightened out the machine. Again they heard -his voice. “Feel a little giddy?” he asked. “If you do,” he cried, -“look down upon some fixed object on the ground and you’ll feel all -right.” - -Both boys complied with his instructions and they soon got over their -giddiness. The pilot kept the machine sailing at an even keel. Soon -they were flying over a small town and they saw what appeared to them -as ants scurrying along. They knew that the ants were really men and -women and they marveled how small they appeared. As a matter of fact, -everything looked like toys from that distance and flying above a -railroad, the track seemed to be two thin lines drawn with a pencil. -Major McCarthy’s voice came over the telephone. “How would you boys -like some stunts?” he asked. - -The boys grinned at each other. Paul answered for both of them. “Very -much,” he said. - -“All right,” he said, “we’ll have to be satisfied with only one today. -Just to see how you fellows take it. First we’ll bank and turn around. -Ready!” - -But before they could answer the pilot already had the machine keeled -over on one side. On an even keel again, the major asked them, “How -about your safety belts.” They adjusted their safety belts and told -him so. “Very well,” he said, “here goes.” And so saying, he opened -the throttle and the plane bounded forward. In a few seconds the nose -sprang upward. As it rose the forward speed decreased, yet the engine -continued to run at the maximum revolutions. The machine was not -pointing vertically upwards. For a moment the plane appeared to hang -on the revolving propeller and it felt as though the machine must -inevitably drop tail foremost. But right away the nose fell over to -one side and dropped and the tail shot up and the machine was shooting -sharply downward. For some distance they continued to dive, then the -pilot shut off the throttle and pulled back the elevator lever and -brought the plane again on an even keel. However, they were now flying -in the opposite direction. McCarthy asked, “How was it?” - -The boys were thrilled. “Fine!” cried Paul. - -“Were you afraid?” - -“No, not in the least.” - -“Well, that was an easy one, but the next time we’ll try a harder one.” - -Jack couldn’t contain himself, so he cried, “How about now?” - -Major McCarthy shook his head. “Enough for today,” he told them. - -They were now flying over the airport and a minute later they landed. -The three waiting boys sent up a couple of greeting cheers and ran over -to meet the grinning two who were tumbling out of the plane. “How was -it?” demanded Nuthin’. - -William was impatient. “Tell us about it, quick,” he cried. - -Paul nudged his chum in the ribs and asked, “Do you think we ought to -tell them?” - -Jack smiled and wiggled his head. “I don’t know,” he said. “I think we -ought to consider it.” - -William was impatient. “Hey, come on,” he cried. “No stalling now.” - -The major joined the group and the two boys thanked him. He said, “It’s -quite all right, boys, I’m only too glad to do it. And by the way, I -heard all about what happened yesterday. You tell that fellow, what’s -his name—” - -“Bobolink,” cried Nuthin’. - -“Bobolink,” repeated the major. “He’s a friend of yours, isn’t he?” - -Wallace interjected, “He certainly is. He is a grand fellow, too.” - -“I’m glad to hear it,” said the major. “So you tell him that just as -soon as he’s recovered, to come over here and I’ll take him up for a -ride.” - -“Yea!” cried Nuthin’, “hooray for Major McCarthy!” - -They gave the major three cheers. But William wanted to know something -else. “How about us?” - -“Well,” he said, “I’ll think it over.” They were now at the door of the -office building. Entering, he turned around and said, “Don’t go away, -now. I’ll be out right away.” - -The boys squatted on the ground, with Paul and Jack in the center and -the two boys were obliged to tell every detail of their experience. -It took about fifteen to twenty minutes to narrate the story and when -finally it was told, the boys sat back, speechless and lost in thought. -William said, “Gee, I hope the major gives me a ride. I’d do anything.” - -Wallace said, “Getting a ride is all very well, but what I really am -interested in is to learn how to fly. I wonder if it’s hard to learn.” - -“No, I don’t think so,” replied Paul. “Major McCarthy told us yesterday -that it was easy to learn.” - -Jack said, “I was watching him all the time and it looks very simple. -But we could ask him.” - -“Yes, we could do that,” remarked Wallace, “but what we want to know is -whether he would teach us.” - -William spoke up, saying, “All of us.” - -“Of course, all of us,” agreed Paul. - -Just then the major came out and they called him over. He seated -himself on the ground beside them. Paul asked, “Do you think you could -teach us how to fly?” - -“Of course,” he said. “I’ve taught a lot of people how to fly.” - -“Is it difficult to learn?” demanded Wallace. - -“Why, no. On the contrary, it’s very simple.” - -Again Wallace asked a question. “If you could teach us to fly, would -we—would we—” he hesitated. Finally he said, “Would it cost a lot of -money?” - -McCarthy thought for a moment. “Well,” he said, “I don’t think so. As -a matter of fact, I’d love to teach you young fellows and I’m sure we -could come to some arrangement.” - -“That’s mighty nice of you,” Paul said, voicing the sentiment of the -other boys. - -“I think what you ought to do,” said McCarthy, “is to consider yourself -a single group and I’ll teach you as a group. Of course I couldn’t take -you up all together, but whatever ground-work there is to be done, I -could instruct you as a group.” - -“That’s just what we were thinking, sir,” said Jack. - -“In that case, everything is settled, except that I must insist that -you bring written permission from your parents. Is that agreeable?” - -The boys were so surprised and shocked by the willingness of McCarthy -to instruct them that they were left almost speechless. William was the -first one to recover. “You mean to say that you’re actually willing to -teach us to fly?” he asked skeptically. - -The major smiled and nodded. “That’s just what I said, didn’t I?” - -“Yes, but you said it so casually and carelessly that we didn’t grasp -it at once,” said Nuthin’. “Say it again, please, sir,” he pleaded. - -Major McCarthy reiterated his offer and the boys let out wild yells of -joy. - - - - -CHAPTER V - -THE REWARD - - -The major got up and the boys also jumped to their feet. “Well, who -wants to go up now?” he asked. - -“I do!” cried William lustily. - -“Me too,” insisted Wallace. - -“What about me?”—that from Nuthin’. - -The three boys milled around the major. Paul and Jack, smiling, -retreated to the background. They had had their ride and it was -somebody else’s turn now. “I’ll tell you what,” the major said, “the -three of you choose and I’ll take the two winners up now. And when I -come down I’ll take up the loser.” - -It was a good suggestion and fair enough. And as luck would have it, -William who was the most persistent and eager, lost and his twin -brother Wallace and Nuthin’ went up. From the ground, they watched the -plane in the air. McCarthy kept them in the air for a much shorter -time than Paul and Jack and performed no stunts. When they landed, the -two boys, thrilled and excited, climbed out of the machine. The pilot -smiled cheerfully and cried, “Well, who’s next?” - -William shouted, “I am!” And quickly and eagerly tumbled into the -observer’s seat. This time the other boys thought that William was the -lucky chap, since he was going to fly all by himself. Jack immediately -spoke up. “Major McCarthy,” he said, “would it be all right with you -if the four of us chose to see which one of us could go up with you a -second time?” - -He nodded. “Sure,” he said. “That’s fair enough, I guess.” - -Paul was the lucky one and he went up in the air for a second time. -When McCarthy landed, the boys thanked him heartily. When they returned -to Stanhope they all went to Bobolink’s house because he was still -unable to leave his bed and they had decided to hold the meeting that -afternoon in his room. When they got there, they found Bluff and -Ken already present and they could hardly contain their excitement. -William, impatient as well as impulsive, broke into the room, shouting, -“Hey, fellows, we flew in a real airplane.” - -The boys in the room were also highly excited and Bluff, who was -eager to explain, stuttered so because of the exciting news, that he -couldn’t talk. He cried, “A-a-a-and y-y-you n-n-n-know what—” - -He was interrupted, however, by Ken, who called out, “Wait, Bluff, -don’t tell them until we hear what they have to say.” - -Paul demanded, “What is it you’ve got to tell us?” - -Bobolink, propped up in bed, declared, “Oh, nothing, nothing much.” - -But their eyes glittered so with excitement and their faces were so -flushed that the new-comers could tell at a glance that there was -something up. - -“Say, you fellows are holding something from us; come on, tell us,” -William demanded. - -Ken, who was always able to keep a straight face, no matter what -happened, remarked very coolly and casually, “Nothing, really. You tell -us first what happened at the airport. Did you all get a ride?” - -The boys grinned. “We most certainly did,” announced William. - -“Each and everyone of us,” added Jack. - -Paul said modestly, blushing to admit the truth, “I went up twice.” - -Bluff made believe he was fainting. “Is that b-boy l-l-lucky!” he -exclaimed, “H-h-how come y-y-you w-were thus h-h-honored?” he wanted to -know. - -Paul explained. Wallace interrupted to say, “And what’s more, Major -McCarthy told us to tell you, Bobolink, that just as soon as you’re -recuperated, he’s going to take you up, too.” - -The boys swarmed about Bobolink’s bed and the boy had to turn his head -from one side to the other to listen to what each fellow said. He -replied, “I’m glad and I appreciate the major’s offer but I wish you -boys would stop jumping around like frogs and get chairs and sit down.” -He was interrupted by William and Jack who began to speak at once but -he stopped them and added, “Don’t all talk at the same time.” - -Wallace got ahead of all the others this time and announced, “Major -McCarthy also told us that he is going to teach us all how to fly.” - -Bluff and Ken who heard the news for the first time, jumped high in the -air and shouted, “Wow!!” - -Paul called the boys to order and admonished them not to make so much -noise because that would be a very poor manner in which to reciprocate -Mrs. Link’s kindness in permitting them to meet in Bobolink’s room. All -the boys nodded and agreed to refrain from making any further noise. -They brought in chairs, placed them around the bed and sat down very -orderly to discuss the business at hand, which was, Major McCarthy’s -offer to teach them how to fly. For the moment they forgot everything -else and thought only of their ambition to learn how to fly and be -pilots. Bluff, however, soon remembered that there was some exciting -news to tell which had been temporarily forgotten. At the first -opportunity, therefore, he interrupted and said, “W-w-wait a minute, -f-f-fellows, we h-h-have f-f-forg-g-gotten s-s-something.” - -Given the cue, they all suddenly remembered. William jumped out of his -seat and cried, “That’s right, you were supposed to tell us something. -So come across, don’t hold back, tell us,” he demanded. - -Bluff waved his arms and wanted to tell but Ken restrained him and -said, “No, it’s Bobolink’s news; let him tell it.” - -All eyes turned on Bobolink. A modest and unassuming person, he -hesitated. Ken urged him on, saying, “Don’t be bashful, tell them.” - -Blushing, he said, “It’s really Paul and Jack who deserve all the -credit for catching that crook and they should really get all of the -reward.” - -“Reward! What reward?” - -“What crook?” - -They all spoke simultaneously, without listening to each other. Paul -held up his hand and motioned for everybody to be quiet. He said, -“Let’s first hear what it’s all about. All right, Bobolink, tell us -what you’re talking about.” - -Bobolink said, “Well, the story is all very simple. You remember -yesterday how that speeder nearly ran over the Smither’s kid?” - -They all nodded. Wallace said, “Of course we do, and if it weren’t for -you, the kid would be dead.” - -“It wasn’t much, really,” said Bobolink. “But what happened afterwards -is what’s really important. Jack and Paul went after the fellow and -caught him and then the police arrested him.” - -William was impatient. “So what about it?” he demanded. - -“Well,” continued Bobolink, “a short while ago Chief of Police Bates -called up and said that there was a two thousand dollar reward for the -arrest of that fellow and that very likely the money will be awarded -to be shared by Paul, Jack and me. But it’s Jack and Paul who should -really get all of it.” - -The last sentence was not heard because of the commotion that followed. -The boys jumped high in the air, shouted, screamed, cheered Paul, Jack -and Bobolink. They were beside themselves with joy. When at last they -quieted down, Jack asked, “But who’s the culprit, Bobolink? What crime -did he commit and who’s giving the reward?” - -Bobolink answered, “Chief Bates explained to mother that the culprit -is a well known counterfeiter and the government is giving the reward. -He said that in a day or two a government agent will come to town to -determine who really deserves the reward. But my mother told me that he -assured her that the three of us are going to get the reward.” - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -WHAT TO DO WITH THE MONEY? - - -The boys were in such a turmoil of excitement that they barely noticed -Jack and Paul draw aside and whisper together. It took them only a few -seconds to agree to a mutual proposal. Paul walked over to Bobolink and -whispered something in his ear. Paul then called the boys to order, -told them to sit down, then said, “Fellows, we have some serious -thinking to do. We must determine the best manner in which to dispose -of the $2,000 reward.” - -Ken objected. “What do you mean ‘we’?” he demanded. “The money belongs -to you, Jack and Bobolink and it’s up to you to do as you please with -it.” - -Jack and Bobolink shook their heads in disagreement with the statement. -William, however, remarked, “I think Ken is right.” - -Bluff nodded in agreement while Wallace was noncommital. Paul -said, “The money belongs to all of us, the members of this Patrol. -Furthermore, if there is any argument about it, Jack, Bobolink and I -are agreed that we want the money to be shared by the eight of us. Now -let’s discuss, orderly and intelligently, what we should do with the -money.” - -All the boys were silent, not knowing what to say or how to deal with -the situation. Wallace, however, the sober and serious fellow of the -group, remarked, “I’m sure all the boys agree with me when I say -that we appreciate very much the gesture of Paul, Jack and Bobolink. -Furthermore, it is my opinion that none of us should hesitate to accept -their offer. Ever since I can remember, since the time we were kids, we -have always lived together, played together, gone to school together -and shared each other’s property. If a fellow had a dime, he bought -candy and shared it with all of us. I cannot remember a single instance -when a fellow refused to share anything he possessed with the rest of -us. You’ll remember that when we first became Scouts, we pooled our -money to buy uniforms for _all_ of us. We’ve been doing that ever since -and therefore I—” - -That was quite a long speech and the boys would not permit him to -continue. They applauded him to show their whole-hearted agreement. -Even Ken now agreed and said, “I think we owe a vote of thanks to -Wallace for explaining it to us and making it so clear that we cannot -help but agree with him.” - -Some of the boys nodded. William jumped up to offer a suggestion. He -said, “All right, we all agree by now that the money is the property of -all of us. Now what are we going to do with it? I propose that we use -it to learn how to fly and—” - -“R-r-righto!” exclaimed Bluff. - -“I think that is a good idea and it suits me perfectly,” said Jack. - -“Same here.” cried Nuthin’. - -The others nodded their approval. - -William held up his hand and called for order. “I’m not finished yet,” -he cried. - -“What else?” someone asked. - -“Hear, hear!” somebody else shouted. - -William continued. “What I want to add is this,” he declared, “That we -have enough money not only for all of us to learn how to fly but maybe -to buy a plane, too.” - -“Wow! Wouldn’t that be swell!” - -“Perfect is the word!” - -“Gee, a plane of our own!” - -Paul made himself heard. He said, “We’ll have to wait and discuss it -with Major McCarthy.” - -“That’s right, we’ll do that.” - -“He’s just the man.” - -“I’m sure he’ll be glad to advise us.” - -Wallace rose to address the boys. He said, “We’ve been so excited -that we’ve completely forgotten how to think straight.” The boys were -seized by a feeling of discomfort. “I know that I too got lost in the -excitement,” he added, “and only a moment ago it occurred to me that -we weren’t quite fair to our parents. We should by all means consult -them and find out whether they object to what we propose to do with the -money.” - -The boys became sombre and thoughtful. Someone said, “But after all, -the money is ours and we ought to be able to do with it as we please.” - -William added, “And suppose they won’t let us use the money to learn -how to fly, what’ll we do?” - -Paul said, “I don’t think we should feel disheartened by the thought -that perhaps our parents will object to the manner in which we propose -to use the money. I’m sure that our fathers and mothers are considerate -of our welfare and will most likely permit us to dispose of the money -according to our desires. Whatever we do, however, we should by all -means take our parents into our confidence and ask for their advice.” - -Jack supported his chum. He announced, “I agree whole-heartedly with -Paul and I hope you all do likewise.” - -Bobolink raised his hand. “I do,” he declared. - -“S-s-same here,” Bluff cried. - -“And me too,” said Wallace. - -The others also agreed. It was then decided that Wallace, Paul and Jack -approach Dr. Morrison and speak to him about it. The meeting was then -adjourned. - -On the street, the boys were acclaimed everywhere. It seemed that -the news had spread all over town very quickly. Walking through the -streets, many townspeople stopped the boys to congratulate them, shake -hands and slap them on the back. By the time they arrived at Dr. -Morrison’s office, they were worn out. Dr. Morrison greeted them, then -asked, “Well boys, what can I do for you?” - -Jack distorted his facial features and muttered, “Something for a -backache, Doctor, I’m all sore.” - -The doctor laughed good naturedly. Paul held up his right hand. “Dad,” -he said, “my fingers are swollen, can you do something?” - -Wallace interjected, saying, “And I, the innocent party, have to suffer -also.” - -The doctor smiled, then remarked, “I guess it’s because you fellows -deserve it.” - -They settled down to a serious talk and told Dr. Morrison everything -that had transpired. He listened respectfully and carefully noted all -their remarks. When they were finished, he agreed with them and then -suggested that each boy explain the entire matter to his father and -mother and then invite them to a meeting at Dr. Morrison’s home the -following evening. He offered to speak over the telephone with all -the parents and personally urge them to come to the meeting. The boys -thought it was a very good plan and agreed to go and tell it to the -other boys. - -The following evening all the parents assembled at the home of Dr. and -Mrs. Morrison. The boys were somewhat nervous and fidgety. They met -again in Bobolink’s room and worried together. What if their parents -vetoed their plan or decided that the money should be disposed of in -some other manner? What if their fathers and mothers decided this, -that, or something else? They were truly worried. - -In the meanwhile the parents assembled. Paul had been told to stay -with Jack for the night. Dr. Morrison called the meeting to order -and suggested that they elect a chairman. He himself was nominated -and elected unanimously. It didn’t take long after that for the -meeting to warm up and for everyone present to enter the discussion -and passionately plead his or her arguments. Soon the parents became -separated into two factions, one led by Dr. Morrison and the other by -Mr. Armstrong. It was Dr. Morrison’s idea that although the parents -should by all means keep a guiding hand over the boys and advise them -accordingly, yet the plan of the boys to use the money for flying -instructions, should be respected. Mr. Armstrong argued that he was not -anxious to disappoint the boys and that learning to be a pilot was all -right as far as he was concerned, but he thought that the money should -be used for more worthy purposes. For instance, the money might be used -to send some poor but deserving boy through college, or it might be -used to build a club house for the boys. - -Mr. Carberry, who supported Dr. Morrison, argued that the suggestion -of a club house was a poor one, because the boys always had a place at -their disposal to meet; that such a state of affairs was preferable to -a club house where they would withdraw and do things the parents would -be ignorant of. And as for using the money to send some poor but able -boy to college, it was a most commendable suggestion but the money -after all belonged to the boys and they should be permitted to use it -for their own ends. - -Mr. Link, who supported Mr. Armstrong, argued that it was all right to -let the boys have their way but that when they were on the verge of -doing something wrong, such as mis-using a large sum of money, it was -up to the parents to advise them and see that they acted differently; - -And thus arguments flew back and forth. Finally Mr. Shipley suggested -that a vote be taken to see how matters stood. A show of hands revealed -that one faction won by a vote of ten to six. There was some applause -and then Dr. Morrison told them all to relax, that although they had -argued one against another, it was all on good faith and friendliness. -Several minutes later Mrs. Morrison served tea. - -Although the boys were in bed and supposedly asleep when their parents -returned home at about eleven, yet they were all very much awake. They -couldn’t question their parents that night, however, as to the results -of the meeting. They were obliged to spend a wakeful night and wait -until morning to learn the results. - -At precisely eight o’clock the next morning, Wallace and William came -downstairs for breakfast. Wallace affected a reserved, calm attitude -while William was openly impatient and eager to know the results. In -the dining room, Mr. Carberry was already at the table. He greeted -the boys with a cheerful good morning. Just then, Mrs. Carberry came -in from the kitchen. The twins kissed their mother. Wallace sat down -at the table. William glanced from one parent to another. “Well?” he -queried. - -The parents smiled and the boys knew that everything was all right. -William shouted, “Wow!” He threw his arms around his mother and hugged -her. Both boys then pressed their father’s hand affectionately and -insisted for the details of the conference. - -Similar scenes were enacted at the homes of all the boys. Jack and -Paul had decided, before they came down for breakfast, that they would -attempt a carefree, noncommittal attitude and would not inquire but -wait until they were told the news. Both boys sat down glumly at the -table and played with their food, insisting that they were not hungry. -But their appetites were quickly revived when Mr. Stormways told them -the story of the meeting. - -Bobolink, just as soon as his mother entered his room bringing him his -breakfast, inquired anxiously, “What was decided last night, mother?” - -She smiled carelessly and answered, “Well, I really don’t approve of -the decision and I argued against it, but—” - -Bobolink’s face fell and he expected the worst. But when she told him -the truth, that the majority of parents had voted to permit the boys -to use the money as they planned, he became so excited that he almost -overturned his breakfast tray. - -At the Shipley home, the moment he woke up, Bluff donned a bathrobe and -raced downstairs to ask his mother for the news. Nuthin’ was told the -news at the breakfast table and Ken’s father also told his son the good -news at breakfast. - -About nine o’clock all the boys left together for the airport to confer -with Major McCarthy. - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -MYSTERY - - -At the airport the boys had to wait a while until Major McCarthy showed -up. When they told him their plans, he approved heartily and assured -them that he would try his best to get them a good second hand airplane -for the money available. Then he also informed them that he was leaving -that same afternoon for New York and expected to be away about a week. -The boys would therefore have to wait, until he returned, for their -flying instructions. - -On their way back to town the boys decided that in the meanwhile they -could go camping for a week. Someone mentioned that Bobolink would be -unable to come along and that therefore they should postpone their -camping trip. Paul then called their attention to the fact that for the -next month or so they would be occupied at the airport; in three weeks -they had an agreement to play a baseball game against the Ted Slavin -team and then a swimming match against the same group. “Sure,” he said, -“we won’t have another opportunity to go camping until just before -school opens and we plan to do that anyhow.” - -Jack suggested, “Let’s put it up to Bobolink and then do whatever he -decides.” - -They all agreed to the proposal. Bobolink, when he heard of it, urged -them to go. And they decided to leave early the following morning. - -The air was fresh and clear. The dew was still on the ground. The sun -shone brightly. Stanhope was only now awakening out of its slumber -and an occasional car or truck that passed seemed to be committing -sacrilege against the peace and quiet that hung like a mantle over the -town. - -Main and Chestnut Streets was the meeting point upon which they had -agreed. Paul, Jack and Ken arrived almost simultaneously. They greeted -each other with a smile. They inhaled deeply the fresh, invigorating -air that set their blood dashing through their veins. William and -Wallace arrived next and a minute later followed Nuthin’. They -conversed in whispers lest they disturb the hushed, still air that -hung everywhere about them. They were aglow with the joy of life. They -huddled together, bubbling over with excitement and anticipation. - -Bluff, gasping for breath, came running up. All there, Paul, the -leader, gave the order to fall in line. Then he called out, “Forward, -march!” - -They were on their way. They walked in double file; each boy was -dressed in his Scout uniform, with a knapsack on his back. As far as -the end of the town they marched in formation. Turning into the road -leading to Black Mountain, Paul gave the order to break formation. They -divided into groups of twos and threes and walked along briskly. Soon -they broke into song and during the next hour they sang every song they -ever knew. - -At about eight-thirty they decided to stop for breakfast. They picked -a small clearing about a mile and a half up the slope of the mountain. -Under the direction of Paul, enough wood was soon collected to build -a fire and Ken, the official chef, set to work. It didn’t take long -to prepare the meal and soon they all sat around in a circle and ate -heartily, with gusto. After putting out the fire and cleaning up their -dishes, they decided to rest there for about half an hour. The boys -stretched out on the ground and stared up at the sky. Paul remarked -casually, “This is the life, eh fellows?” - -Bluff agreed, saying, “N-n-nothing l-l-like it.” - -William interrupted, calling out, “Is that so! Just wait until we learn -how to fly and have our own ship, then we’ll be able to camp anywhere -within a radius of a thousand miles.” - -Jack wanted to know, “What’s the matter with camping on Black -Mountain?” - -“Nothing at all,” answered William. “But just think of it: being able -to fly, being able to pilot your own airplane and going anywhere your -heart desires; and think of it, you pick out your camping ground as you -fly along and looking down from a height of 5000 feet, that tree over -there would look like a tiny household plant.” - -Paul said, “Yes, there is something staggering about it, a feeling of -tremendous power when you’re up in the air.” He sat up and yawned. -“However,” he added, “what we have to decide right now is where are we -going to camp?” - -Ken spoke up, “Let’s return to where we camped last year; it’s as good -a spot as you can find anywhere on the mountain.” - -Bluff agreed, saying, “That s-suits me.” - -Wallace suggested, “Why not go somewhere else this year? I know a swell -spot about three miles south east.” - -Jack asked, “How about it, Paul, you want to try this new camping site -Wallace suggests?” - -Paul nodded. “It’s all right with me,” he said. - -The boys resumed their hike. It took them about four hours of steady -walking with a few short rest periods to reach their goal The clearing -was off the beaten track. A hundred feet away was a precipice -overhanging the tops of many trees about a hundred feet below. There -was a stream of fresh, cool water just behind the clearing. - -Tired, footsore, ravenously hungry, they immediately set to and -prepared a sumptuous meal of chops and potatoes prepared over an -open fire. Later they pitched their tents and settled themselves -for a week’s stay. That night, at the camp fire, the boys huddled -close around the flaming logs of wood. Jack and Wallace were sitting -together, about a yard or so away from the rest of the group. Jack -asked his companion, “How did you happen to know of this place?” - -Wallace hesitated. Finally he said, “Well, there’s a story behind it, -some sort of mystery I never could make head or tail of.” - -Jack perked up his ears. “What do you mean?” he inquired in a low tone -of voice. “You never told us anything about it.” - -The other boys were singing, and the echoes resounded far out across -the mountain. The two whispered to each other. Wallace answered, “No, -I didn’t, but that’s only because the story doesn’t seem to have any -meaning and I didn’t want the fellows to think I was trying to put over -a tall one on them.” - -Jack became interested. Eagerly he asked, “Do you mind telling me the -story?” - -Wallace shook his head. “No, I don’t, but I warn you—there’s no sense -to it all.” - -“Well, let’s hear it anyhow,” said Jack urging his companion on. - -Wallace twisted and turned and finally found a comfortable sitting -position. He began his story by saying, “This camping ground is about -three miles south east of the camping ground we usually go to. If -you were particularly attentive, you would have noticed as we came -here that this place is off the usual course followed by campers, -is a little difficult to find and yet it appears to have been used -frequently.” - -Jack nodded, glanced at the fire and his companions, permitted his eyes -to wander about the general extremities of the camp, then turned to his -story teller and said, “Yes, but how did you come upon this camp site? -Tell me that.” - -Wallace betrayed a bit of uneasiness. He said, “I’m coming to that. -Last year, camping up there”—he motioned with his hand—“I decided -one morning to take a walk through the woods. There was no path, so -I had to fight my way through bushes, shrubbery and all sorts of -entanglements, until I came to a spot where the bushes were beaten -down, a couple of low branches were broken off—there was every -indication that on that spot a struggle had taken place between two or -more people. I examined the ground very carefully for torn pieces of -clothing and such things, and walking straight ahead I came upon the -stream. Following the stream, I came upon this camp site.” - -Jack mumbled, “Hm! Nothing mysterious about that.” - -Wallace demanded, “What do you mean?” - -Jack answered, “What I mean is, that there is no evidence of any -mystery or anything. The whole thing seems to fall flat.” - -“I told you that before,” said Wallace. “But you haven’t heard all of -it. I have told you only the beginning.” - -Jack felt foolish for having spoken out of turn instead of listening to -the rest of the story. He squirmed in his seat and said, “I’m terribly -sorry for interrupting. Go on.” - -Wallace had by now become enthusiastic and he leaned closer to his -companion. But just then, William called out, “Hey, you two, no -secrets. Come on over and join us.” - -A few of the other fellows cried, “Yes, come on, join us!” - -“If it’s a story you’re telling him, Wallace, tell it to all of us.” - -“Don’t be snobs. Join us.” - -Jack waved to them and replied, “He’s telling me a ghost story without -a ghost and no story to it.” - -The boys laughed. The two drew closer together and Wallace continued. -“Listen closely,” he said, “can you hear the gurgling sound of the -stream?” - -Jack listened closely and to his astonishment he couldn’t hear the -sound of running water. Yet he was sure that the stream was less than -ten feet away from where he sat. He looked in the direction of the -stream but he didn’t see it. He turned quickly to his companion and -whispered, “I don’t see it. Isn’t it supposed to be right there?” - -Wallace grinned. “Correct,” he remarked. “But that’s another thing, one -yard away from the stream and you don’t see it any more. Notice how -cleverly, yet how naturally it is hidden.” - -Jack nodded and looked around in amazement. He crept up on his knees, -then stood up and still he couldn’t see the stream. He wanted to walk -over there and assure himself that the stream was there but he was -afraid of arousing suspicion. He sat down again and Wallace continued. -“One more link in the chain,” he said. “About half a mile down this -side of the mountain, there is a cave—a natural cave. I came upon it -accidentally.” - -“Did you go inside?” queried Jack eagerly. - -“I only took a peek inside. Then I heard a noise or at least I thought -I heard a noise and I jumped away, thinking that I would hide behind -some shrubbery or something. But I never saw it again because I -couldn’t find it.” - -“What do you mean?” - -“Just what I said. I looked for it, I retraced my steps as carefully as -I knew how, but no cave.” - -Both boys remained silent for a while. Jack seemed to be lost in -thought. Finally he asked, “Is that the whole story?” - -Wallace nodded. “Yes.” - -Jack shook his head. “Doesn’t seem to make sense.” - -“That’s what I told you before,” insisted his companion. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -THE MYSTERY BECOMES COMPLICATED - - -Jack and Wallace joined the other boys in their singing. Later there -circulated around the camp fire a series of humorous anecdotes followed -by tall stories, each boy trying to improve upon the previous tale. -Nuthin’ was doing his best to hold the attention of his listeners -(and he was succeeding fairly well) with a ghost story which he had -read in a magazine, but was relating as a personal incident. Suddenly -Paul, possessing the sharpest ear among the group, wheeled around -and listened carefully. The noise that he thought he heard stopped. -Dropping on his stomach, he put his ear to the ground. A couple of -minutes later, they could all hear various small noises, that sounded -like the breaking of twigs or rolling stones set loose. Somebody was -coming. Silent, awaiting the arrival of whoever it was, they sat hushed -around the fire and stared expectantly at the probable spot where he -would emerge. Tense, eager, every moment was an hour and the five or -six minutes they waited seemed like an age. Finally a short, husky -man, with a brutal face, emerged out of the woods and stepped into the -light. He glanced from one boy to another. His facial features were -distorted by his smile. At last he spoke. “Hello, fellows,” he said, -his voice a bit raucous and loud. “Did I scare you?” - -Paul stood up. “Why, no,” he answered calmly, “not at all. Won’t you -join us?” - -The man laughed with a gurgle in his throat. “Sure,” he answered, “but -only for a couple of minutes. I have a shack a couple of miles yonder,” -and he pointed in the general westerly direction. He joined the circle -of boys around the fire. “What are you fellows doing here?” he asked. - -Paul answered for all of them. “We’re seven Boy Scouts,” he said, “and -we’re camping here for a week.” - -“A week!” he exclaimed. He mused and stroked his chin. “Where are you -boys from?” he inquired further. - -“Stanhope,” he was told. - -“Stanhope! I go down there about once every two weeks for supplies. -But why do you boys camp here? I can tell you of a far better place to -camp.” - -“Where?” one of the boys asked him. - -“About three miles northwest of here,” he answered. - -They all guessed at once that he was referring to their old camping -site. A couple of the boys were on the verge of telling him that they -knew all about the place. But Jack spoke up first and asked, “What sort -of a place is it?” - -“Oh, it’s a very good camp site,” he answered. “There is a large -clearing where you can play ball or any other game, and a large stream -where you can go fishing and swimming.” he paused, glanced from one boy -to another, then added, “Oh, it’s a far better camping site than this.” - -“Where did you say this place was, sir?” asked Paul, affecting -ignorance. - -“Almost directly northwest of here,” the man replied with what seemed -undue eagerness. “You can’t miss it.” - -All the boys nodded in unison, as though they understood perfectly the -directions he was giving them. In silence they wondered why the man -was so anxious to have them move from their present camping ground. He -tried hard not to betray his eagerness and anxiety, but he was a very -poor actor. Jack inquired, “Is there anything wrong with this camping -ground?” - -The man scratched his head. “Well,” he answered, “not very much but -it isn’t anywhere near as good as the one I’m telling you about. You -really ought to go over there and see it.” - -Wallace spoke up, saying, “I’m sure the gentleman has the best of -intentions and if he says that the camping ground he’s telling us -about is superior to this one, it must be so. In that case, it would -be a shame not to take advantage of the information. The first thing -tomorrow morning I’m going over there and take a look. If it is all the -gentleman says it is, we’re going to move.” - -The man grinned, the curl of his lips betraying, his deep -self-satisfaction. “That boy is a smart one,” he cried. “He’s got -the right idea.” He jumped to his feet. “Well, I’ll be going,” he -announced. “So long, fellows.” - -“So long.” - -He went in the direction he came from. The boys held their breath and -silently waited for fully five minutes, until the man’s footsteps could -no longer be heard. Ken exploded. “Can you imagine that?” he cried. “He -said he was going the other way and he walked back in the direction he -came from.” - -Paul held up his hand and motioned for order. “Hush, fellows,” he said. -“We can discuss this quietly. Trees and bushes have ears, you know.” - -They huddled closely together and whispered among themselves. Nuthin’ -voiced the thought that disturbed them all. “I wonder why he objects to -our camping here?” he asked. - -William answered, “That’s something we all would like to know.” - -Bluff stuttered, “S-s-something m-must be up.” - -With a wave of his hand, William dismissed Bluff’s remark. “Anybody can -guess that,” he said. “But what is it about, that’s what we want to -know.” He turned to the other boys. “I’m stumped, I admit it,” he told -them. “Can anybody guess?” - -By the blank look on their faces he could tell that all his companions -were just as much in the dark as he was. Jack whispered to Wallace, -“You think this has something to do with the story you told me?” - -Wallace shrugged his shoulders. “I’m at a loss. I can’t imagine.” - -Paul addressed them. “Fellows,” he said. “There is something up, that -we can all tell. There must be a reason why he wants us to move camp. -But what the reason is and what it’s all about, we can’t find out -tonight. There’s nothing we can do tonight anymore except go to sleep. -In the morning we will consider the whole thing and see what we can do.” - -The boys were nonplussed, neither agreeing nor disagreeing with Paul. -They were loathe, however, to turn in just then. The incident had -the effect of keeping them wide awake and of arousing in them the -curiosity to know what it was all about. But it was evident that -there was nothing they could do that evening. So in spite of their -inclinations they all decided to go to sleep. But just then Bluff spoke -up and inspired a new argument. “D-d-don’t you think that w-w-we ought -t-t-take turns k-k-keeping guard?” he asked. - -“Keep guard!” exclaimed Nuthin’, “What are you talking about?” - -William jumped to Bluff’s defense. “Sure,” he cried, “he’s got the -right idea. We ought to keep guard all night and watch out against any -one creeping up on us while we’re asleep.” - -At other times the boys would have laughed at the suggestion. But their -thoughts were such that the idea appealed to them and seemed reasonable. - -Paul objected. “Don’t be foolish,” he said. “Who’ll creep up on us? -Who’ll want to harm us?” - -William retorted hotly. “How should I know? But you were a witness to -what happened tonight. You’ll admit that the stranger was eager to have -us move camp. There must be a reason for it. And—” - -“Yes,” interjected Wallace, “but does that imply that he wants to harm -us or attack us? I think you’re permitting your imagination to run -away with you—like that time with the ghost.” - -That remark broke the ice and the boys laughed heartily, recalling the -ghost incident. The boys then dismissed all thoughts of danger and -decided to retire. It had been a big day for them and they were very -tired. They slept soundly all through the night without awakening or -being disturbed. - -In the morning before breakfast, Jack took Paul aside and the two -carried on a hurried, whispered conversation. They then called over -Wallace and the three withdrew for a serious conference. After Wallace -had told his story, Paul asked, “Well, what’s your opinion of the whole -thing?” - -Wallace said, “It’s my impression that there is some connection between -the incidents, but what it is I don’t know.” - -Jack nodded. “I’m somewhat of the same opinion,” he commented. - -“Let’s not try to solve the puzzle now,” remarked Paul. “Are you two -agreed that we ought to move camp?” - -A decisive yes was Jack’s answer and Wallace approved, saying, “Same -here.” - -“In that case we’ll have to convince the other fellows that we should -move,” said Paul. - -“Do you think we ought to tell them the rest of the story?” inquired -Wallace of his two friends. - -Jack shook his head. “I don’t think it will help any or serve any good -purpose,” he asserted. “It will only excite them.” - -“Yes,” added Paul. “It’s a shame we have to keep it a secret from them, -but I think we’re justified. My opinion is that we should convince them -somehow that we ought to move. In the meanwhile, just as soon as you -two can get away, you’ll slip out quietly and explore the woods for a -couple of miles around and return in time for lunch. We’ll break camp -and move after lunch.” - -As the boys were having breakfast and making wild guesses to solve the -mystery, a large airplane appeared in the sky, circled at a very low -altitude directly over their camp and then flew away again. The boys -stopped eating and kept their eyes glued to the machine. One of the -boys remarked, “Wonder who that is and what he wants?” - -Someone suggested, “Maybe it’s Major McCarthy looking for us.” - -“Don’t be silly,” was the snappy answer of someone else. - -Wallace noticed Jack writing something down in his notebook. “What is -it you’re writing?” he asked. - -Jack shrugged his shoulders. “The numbers on the plane. It might come -in handy sometime.” - -The plane disappeared into the horizon and the boys resumed their -breakfast. For a while they discussed whether the airplane appearing -overhead had any connection with the stranger of the previous night. -The arguments for and against were about evenly divided. Then Paul -opened the discussion by remarking casually, “Well, fellows, do you -think we ought to break camp and move?” - -William was the first to object. “What for?” he wanted to know. - -Wallace explained. “We all know,” he said, “that the stranger who was -here last night must have good reason for wanting us to move away from -here. Whatever it may be, it is most advisable for us to go away.” - -“But this is a good camp site,” argued William, “so why should we go -away. Nobody is going to harm us.” - -“Last night you thought differently,” Jack reminded him. - -“All right, what I want to do is stick around and see what happens,” he -confessed. - -“If you do that, you might regret it,” warned Paul. A few of the boys -gasped, and he hurried to explain his statement. “What I mean,” he -added, “is that you don’t wait until your car is stolen before you -lock the garage. I’m sure no harm would come to us if we stayed here, -but why stay here and wait for someone to come and kick us when we can -avoid it?” - -He spoke with a certain anxiety and he transmitted it to the other -boys, for they kept silent for a while. Ken, however, sided with -William and he remarked, “Paul is perfectly logical and reasonable, -but I still don’t see why we should run away. Nothing has happened to -us and I imagine that the stranger last night was some crank who has a -shack somewhere around here.” - -William supported his friend’s argument. “That’s right,” he said, -“There’s no reason for us to turn tail and run away.” - -His twin brother explained, “It isn’t a matter of turning tail or -running away. An ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure. If we -can prevent any trouble, why shouldn’t we do it?” - -Nuthin’ said, “Let’s stop arguing and take a vote on it. Then we’ll see -how the land lies.” - -A vote was taken and the majority favored the proposal that they break -camp and move. On Paul’s suggestion it was decided to break camp after -lunch. - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -CLUES - - -At a nod from Paul, Jack and Wallace soon slipped away into the woods. -When they were a safe distance away, Jack called a halt to consider -carefully their first move. They had taken the direction in which the -stranger had gone. Wallace proposed, “I think that the first thing we -can do is follow the stranger’s trail.” - -Jack mused for some seconds. Finally he replied, “I guess it wouldn’t -hurt to do that, but I don’t think it will be possible.” - -“Why?” - -“Because if the stranger had a good reason to want us to move, and -knowing that we’re Boy Scouts and capable of following a trail, he -wouldn’t be so stupid as to leave a trail for us to follow.” - -“Yes,” agreed Wallace, “that’s very logical. But what else can we do?” - -“Nothing yet. For the present let’s see if we can follow the trail.” - -For about a quarter of a mile they had no difficulty in following the -trail. Soon they came to a rocky ledge and the trail disappeared. The -boys therefore decided to separate and examine the ground within a -radius of a hundred yards. Jack was busily engaged looking for signs -of a trail when he heard a sharp whistle and he knew that Wallace was -calling him. Again the whistle broke the silence of the mountain and -he determined the approximate spot where it was coming from. He found -Wallace sitting on a rock and waiting for him. A short distance away -were some footprints that Wallace had come upon. They followed the -trail for about a hundred yards when Jack called a halt. He got on -his knees and examined the footprint very carefully. Nodding his head -satisfactorily, he said, “I’m pretty sure it’s the same footprint all -right. Notice, however, the direction the trail seems to follow.” - -Both boys took out their compasses. “The trail seems to be leading to -our old camp site,” averred Wallace. - -“Correct,” pronounced Jack. “Therefore we’re going to disregard it.” - -“What should be our next move then?” inquired Wallace. - -“The cave,” replied Jack. “We ought to try and locate the cave.” - -They returned to the ledge and sat down to determine their position. -For that purpose they drew a map. A small circle indicated their camp -site; a wavering line, running northwest, and another circle indicated -their old camp site. Then they put in the path they had followed and -approximately their position. “Now,” said Jack, “according to your best -knowledge, about where do you think the cave should be situated?” - -Wallace bent over the map and drew a double line. “This,” he said, -“is the stream, west of our camp site. The cave, therefore, should be -directly south. In that case we have to return to camp and—” - -Jack interrupted. “No,” he said, “we won’t do that. We’ll cut across.” - -Wallace approved the plan. Rising, the boys determined by compass the -exact direction they had to follow. The first thing they had to do was -to drop from the ledge about eight feet below. After that, they were -obliged to take a descending route and at the same time cut across in -the general direction of the camp. Pretty soon they reached a level -plateau heavily wooded. Indian file, one behind the other, they walked -along slowly and carefully. Suddenly they came upon a large clearance, -circular and with possibly a little less than half a mile radius. Jack -lay down on his stomach and Wallace did likewise. Jack said, “Quick, -seeing this field, what’s the first thing that comes to your mind?” -Wallace shook his head. Jack added, “Remember the airplane circling -overhead this morning? Now put two and two together.” - -Wallace whistled. “An airport!” he exclaimed. - -“Correct!” - -For a while they continued lying on their stomachs and carefully -examined the field and the outlying woods. Absolute silence reigned. -Not a sound, not a moving shadow, as far as they could see or hear. -Finally Wallace whispered, “What now?” - -The two boys rose and, single file, Jack leading, they walked through -the woods, keeping within sight of the clearing but trying hard to keep -themselves hidden. Jack stepped on a twig and it snapped, the sound -echoing loud through the dead silence of the woods. He stopped and the -two boys remained rooted to the spot for at least five minutes. They -continued. Every once in a while they strained their ears to listen. -Not a sound. Wallace suggested they again approach the edge of the -clearing. Getting down on their hands and knees they crept up to the -very edge of the woods. Lying on their stomachs, they let their eyes -roam all around the field. Suddenly Jack grasped Wallace by the wrist. -“Ouch!” he cried. - -Jack cautioned him to be silent. “Sh!” he hissed and put a finger over -his lips. Then he pointed. Wallace shook his head; he saw nothing. -Again Jack pointed, but his friend still saw nothing. “You remain here -and keep your eyes wide open. I’m going to creep out and get it.” He -crept forward on his stomach for about ten feet, then crept back, -dragging something along. Crouching alongside his friend, he showed him -the object and whispered, “Rifle!” - -Wallace nodded. “What’s your opinion?” he asked. - -His companion shook his head. “Don’t know,” he whispered. - -“Arms smugglers!” Wallace seriously suggested. - -They examined the weapon. It was an old style army rifle. Jack -whispered, “You may be right about ‘them’ being arms smugglers, but I -have my doubts. If you consider, you find that smuggled arms can have -only one destination—South America. And we’re too far away from the -Mexican border.” - -Wallace clutched his friend by the sleeve. “That’s just it,” he -answered eagerly. “Just because we’re so far away from the Mexican -border, they have less chance of being caught or suspected.” - -Jack mused. “Hm! you may be right. But what do you think we ought to do -now? Return to camp or what?” - -Simultaneously, both boys flattened out. Two men emerged from the -woods, no more than about seven or eight feet in front of them. The -boys nudged each other. One of the men was the stranger. The other man -was saying, loud enough so the boys could hear, “Okey, then, we’ll be -here tomorrow at the usual time. And make sure those Boy Scouts are -gone.” - -The stranger answered, “Okey, Chief. But suppose they don’t go, how am -I to get rid of them?” - -“Frighten them away, scare them, but don’t use any violence,” the Chief -answered. - -The stranger saluted. “Okey, Chief, I’ll do just as you say.” - -They parted and the Chief walked across the clearing while the stranger -turned on his heel and entered the woods again. The two boys lay -there flattened to the ground, not daring to breathe, lest they give -themselves away. They watched the Chief cross the clearing and enter -the woods at the other end. Ten minutes elapsed before they dared to -utter a whisper. Jack said, “The cave! Let’s try to locate it.” - -“What about the rifle?” - -“We’ll leave it here. We have no use for it.” - -They crept along noiselessly to the approximate spot where the stranger -entered the woods. Using that as their starting point, they searched -everywhere but didn’t find a sign of the cave. Not even the slightest -clue. Finally Wallace suggested that they return to camp and Jack -agreed. - -At camp, Jack and Wallace had not been missed for a while. Paul kept -a sharp eye on the boys to see that they didn’t walk off. Soon Ken -suggested that they do something. William cried, “Sure, let’s have a -knot-tying contest. Get the fellows together.” - -When the boys assembled, it was evident that two of the group were -missing. Someone said, “Hey, Jack and Wallace aren’t here.” - -They all looked at each other in astonishment. Paul remarked casually, -“I saw them only about a minute ago. They must have walked somewhere -and will surely come right back.” - -Bluff offered a solution. “L-l-let’s have the c-c-contest without -t-them,” he proposed. - -“That’s right,” seconded Paul. “If they’re not here, it’s their hard -luck.” - -They proceeded with the contest. As time wore on all the boys became -strangely conscious of the absence of the two boys. To dispel their -fears, Paul remarked, “They must have gone out reconnoitering. They’ll -surely be back soon.” - -As Jack and Wallace did not come back, the boys began to harbor all -sorts of fears. Each boy made believe that he wasn’t at all worried. -Time hung heavy on their hands and the morning seemed to stretch out -into an eternity. Soon the boys lost all interest in what they were -doing and just sat around doing nothing, keeping intensely silent. -When someone did dare to whisper, the sound seemed to shatter the air -and grate on their nerves. Finally, as lunch time approached, William -jumped to his feet and cried, “Why are we sitting here like dummies? A -couple of us ought to go out looking for them.” - -Paul spoke calmly and with reserve. He said, “It wouldn’t do to search -for them now. To begin with, we don’t know which way they went. -Secondly, they haven’t been missing such a terribly long time. In all -likelihood they’ll return to camp soon.” - -“Yes,” echoed Ken. “Let’s prepare lunch and that will give us something -to do and keep us busy for a while.” - -The only one who objected was William. Words or arguments he felt were -futile, so he just gritted his teeth and helped prepare lunch. When it -was done, they waited a while and then silently agreed to eat and leave -some over for the boys. Even Paul was becoming worried. He distinctly -told them not to be absent long. And it was almost six hours now that -they were gone. He didn’t himself know what to do, whether to send a -searching party out for them or merely sit tight and wait. Rising, he -walked over to the stream for a drink of water. And just then the three -met face to face. Paul was angry. “What kept you away so long?” he -demanded. - -He felt relieved that at last they were back. Jack quickly summarized -their experiences. Then he asked, “Did they miss us?” - -“And how! There is only one thing to do now and that’s to tell them -everything.” - -“We might as well,” agreed Wallace, and Jack had no objection either. - -The boys walked into the clearing. Nuthin’ was the first to notice them -and he screamed, “Hey, fellows, here they are!” - -Instantaneously, Jack and Wallace were surrounded and plied with -questions. “Where have you two been?” someone demanded. - -“What’s the idea of disappearing without telling us?” they were -reproached. - -William shook a threatening finger under his brother’s nose. “You ever -do that again,” he warned, “and I’ll—I’ll spank you.” - -The boys laughed. Paul said, “They’re hungry, fellows. Let them eat -first and then we’ll make them tell us all about it.” - -Jack and Wallace had their lunch. The other boys gathered around the -two and Wallace told the first part of the story. When he was through -talking, some of the boys shook their heads in amazement. William -exclaimed dolefully, “And you never even mentioned it to us.” - -Wallace was embarrassed. He replied modestly, “There was nothing to -tell. It might have sounded fishy.” - -Jack then appropriated the floor and narrated their adventures of that -morning. In conclusion, he said, “You fellows now know all the facts. -I must impress upon you, however, the necessity of absolute secrecy. -To begin with, the wrong ears may hear the story and then it will be -too bad. Secondly, there is not enough evidence to call in the police. -There is nothing we can prove. They would say that we invented it all -just to get a lot of publicity. And that isn’t true, is it fellows?” - -Ken contributed the remark, “If this thing is ever solved, we’ll have -to do it ourselves.” - -They all agreed that that was right. - -William inquired, “But isn’t there something we can do now?” - -Paul replied, “Yes, there is.” The boys were all attention. “What we -can do now,” he said, “is to break camp and move. We’ll postpone -further discussion until after we have pitched camp again at the old -site.” - -The boys enjoyed heartily the dramatic manner in which Paul had aroused -their curiosity only to tell them something which was routine. They -jumped to their feet and immediately got busy. By sunset they had -moved. - - - - -CHAPTER X - -FLYING INSTRUCTIONS - - -With the first ray of sunrise, Wallace was up. He dressed himself -hurriedly, donned a sweater to keep warm, and then sat down on a rock -to watch the sky. He had a suspicion that something would happen and -that the incident would occur in the air. He didn’t dare walk up and -down to keep himself warm because he feared that the noise of his -footsteps would awaken some of the boys. So he quietly built a fire to -keep himself warm. After he had watched the sky for an hour a plane -appeared on the horizon. It flew nearer and nearer, circled about where -he thought the mysterious airport was, then nosed down as if to land, -which it evidently did. Wallace became terribly excited. His suspicions -bore truth. And now he didn’t know what to do. He paced up and down -several times, musing, thinking hard. His first impulse was to go down -there himself, but he immediately discounted it. - -He awakened Paul, who listened eagerly to his story. Wallace reminded -him of his suspicion that a plane would land there in the early -morning, and that was what had happened. Paul dressed hurriedly. -Leaving behind a note, the two set off at a rapid pace. Just as they -were about to reach the wooded plateau, the drone of an airplane motor -was heard. They looked up, but the sky was hidden by the branches -of the trees. When they at last reached the clearing, it was empty -and still. They spent about half an hour searching the woods, but it -was in vain. They returned to camp and told their comrades. A lot of -discussion ensued and it was finally decided that every day a detail of -two boys should go down there, to see what they could discover. But it -was all in vain. When the time came for them to return to Stanhope, a -week later, they had discovered nothing new. - -As the boys reached the outskirts of the town, about six in the -evening, they lined up and marched down Main Street. On the very same -spot from which they departed, Paul sang out, “Patrol, halt!” For -several seconds they remained at attention, with the eyes of many -people upon them. Then Paul snapped the command, “Dismissed!” The boys -broke formation and went home. - -The boys did not propose to lose any time in beginning their flying -instructions. They set a definite time, therefore, for all of them to -meet, to go out to the airfield in a group. Paul was a few minutes -late, having been detained by his mother who took a long time -impressing upon him the importance of being careful. When he joined -the group, they were all very much excited and discussed their future -adventures in the air. Ken and Nuthin’ tried hard to appear just as -excited as the others, but it was an empty gesture. Paul, addressing -Ken, asked, “Anything wrong? You look kind of green around the gills.” - -Ken made a gesture of dismissal. He answered, “Nothing. It really -doesn’t matter.” - -“But what is it?” - -The boy confessed sadly, “My parents absolutely refused to allow me to -fly.” - -Nuthin’ heard the statement and he felt glad. Not that he was glad that -Ken was unable to learn to fly, but misery loves company. He said, -“You’re not alone, Ken. The same tragedy here.” And he made a comical -gesture of weeping. - -Paul was disappointed. “Gee, that’s a shame. I wonder if there is -anything we can do about it?” - -Both boys shook their heads listlessly. Ken remarked, “You know my dad. -When he puts his foot down it’s like the Rock of Gibraltar.” - -“With me,” informed Nuthin’, “it’s my mother. She actually wept, so my -father wouldn’t give me permission.” - -“It’s a shame,” repeated Paul. “At any rate, you two can come along and -watch us. You can at least get all the ground work.” - -The boys mounted their bicycles and were off. At the airport, they were -greeted by Major McCarthy. “Hello, fellows,” he called. - -“Hello, Major,” answered several. - -“Did you have a good time while I was away?” - -“Very good,” said Paul. - -“And interesting,” informed William. - -Jack spoke. “We went camping.” - -“That should have been enjoyable and interesting,” commented the major. -Then he asked the most pertinent question. “Are you ready for flying -instructions?” - -The boys shouted lustily and eagerly, “Yes, yes.” - -“All of you have the permission of your parents?” - -Paul answered for the group. “All except two—Ken Armstrong and Albert -Cypher.” - -“Hmm,” mused the major. “That’s too bad.” He looked at the two -unfortunate boys and they appeared very ill at ease. To cheer them the -major said, “Well, not everyone can be a pilot. Some of us have to do -other work, quite naturally. So we’ll make mechanics out of you. How -about it?” - -The boys smiled gratefully. “Thank you, sir,” answered Ken. “I’d love -nothing better.” - -“That’s settled, then,” said McCarthy. “Now, fellows, I have some good -news for you. I’ve made inquiries about obtaining a plane for you boys -and I have one definitely in mind. It’s a good machine, in perfect -order and perhaps in a week or so it may be yours.” - -“Yea!” shouted William and all the boys joined in. The major held -up his hand and motioned for silence. “Cheering is all to the good, -fellows, but if you want flying instructions, we have no time to lose.” - -“Those are just our sentiments,” commented Jack joyously. - -“Now,” began the major, “I’m to spend about an hour or so explaining in -detail the major parts of an airplane. I want to teach you to be not -only pilots but your own mechanics. If something should happen to a -plane you’re flying, I want you to know how to go about repairing the -motor or anything else that may be wrong. For that reason I want you to -spend a lot of your spare time fussing with an old plane, which is used -just for that purpose. It is situated in the corner hangar.” He paused -for several seconds, then continued. “Now about flying instructions. -I can’t instruct more than one of you at a time and no more than two -each day. So you’ll have to pair off and you’ll all get a lesson every -other three days—that is, two lessons a week. Is that understood?” - -“Yes!” shouted the boys in unison. - -“Very well, then, I’m going into the office for a couple of minutes. -In the meanwhile you can pair off and also decide which pair will get -their instructions today, which tomorrow and the day after.” - -To pair off, the boys drew lots. Three sets of small pieces of paper -were prepared, the two pieces of each set numbered one, two and three. -The two boys who drew number one were partners, numbers two and three -likewise. The number one pair was to receive its flying instructions -that day, number two on the following day, and number three the day -after. As it turned out, Paul and William were the number one pair, -Jack and Bobolink number two and Wallace and Bluff number three. -The drawing of lots was fair enough and there were no murmurs of -disapproval or dissatisfaction. - -When the major came out again, he showed that he approved of what was -done. In a group he marched them over to the hangar which housed the -old plane and for about an hour he lectured to them on the mechanics -of an engine. When he was through, he sent them home for lunch. Then -he told the first pair, Paul and William, to be back at the airport at -three o’clock for flying instructions. - -As the boys were mounting their bikes, Jack whispered to his chum, -“Fall behind with me, Paul, I have something to tell you.” - -Paul nodded. Wheeling along about ten feet behind the others, he asked, -“What is it, Jack?” - -“It’s this, Paul. This morning I happened to glance through the -_Dispatch_ and I came across a small article stating that last -Wednesday it was discovered that several hundred army rifles were -stolen from an armory in New York and that the crime had most likely -been committed within the past twenty-four hours.” - -“What about it?” - -Jack pursed his lips, mused for a moment, then said, “Remember, Paul, -last Wednesday morning was when Wallace saw that airplane land at that -mysterious airport.” - -Paul cried, “By golly, that’s correct. Do you really think that -they are arms smugglers and that this theft of army rifles has any -connection with that airplane landing at the mysterious airport?” - -“I don’t know,” answered Jack. “I’m wondering. But if you stop to -consider, the parts seem to fit the puzzle mighty well.” - -“You’re right Jack. What do you think we ought to do? Do you think we -ought to take Major McCarthy into our confidence?” - -Shaking his head, he replied, “No, I don’t think so. He might either -tell it to the police and we don’t have enough evidence for that; or he -might fly over there, land, and possibly complicate everything.” - -Again Paul agreed with his chum, adding, “Yes, we have to follow it up -slowly. Another thing, we must learn how to fly darn quick because if -we want to get anything on them we have to do it in their way—by air.” - -“Correct,” said Paul. “For the present, we’ll just let matters take -their own course.” - -All the boys saw fit that afternoon to be at the airport. Only Paul and -William were to go up for flying instructions but the others wanted to -be there to see what it was like. At a little past three, the major -came out of the office and approached the group of boys. The two boys -stepped forward and William informed him, “We’re ready, major, if you -are.” - -Smiling, he said, “That’s fine. But now that you’re all here, I’m going -to tell you something about flying.” All the boys gathered in front of -him, forming a semi-circle. Very quietly and seriously they listened -to every word he said. “The first thing I want to impress upon you, -fellows,” he began, “is that flying is not in the least dangerous, -providing, of course, you adhere strictly to the rules and regulations -of flying. Everything has its rules which you must observe, flying is -not an exception. The most important rule in flying is that you must -never risk stalling your machine near the ground. At no time must you -lose flying speed until you are at a safe altitude—approximately five -hundred feet above ground. - -“Now suppose your engine cuts out as you are taking off, then what you -must do is to push the nose down and go straight ahead, regardless of -what is in front of you. If you cannot avoid running into a shed, or a -tree, or any other obstacle, while landing, it just can’t be helped. -You will smash the machine but you yourself will not be hurt. Another -rule to remember is, never turn back in order to return to the airport -or some other good landing ground. When you do that you risk stalling -your machine. And when you stall near the ground, you usually lose -control of your machine, go into a spin and crash nose first into the -ground. And that may be the last time you will ever fly.” - -“Those are a few elementary rules of flying. You’ll learn more as you -go along. What you must understand is that you must always obey these -rules, or take the consequences. I don’t want to frighten you, but -there are rules in every game and you have to observe them.” - -He stopped and scanned the faces of the boys. From every indication, -they had taken his words seriously and were convinced by his -authoritative tone of voice. Nothing more to say, the major now called -upon his first two pupils and inquired, “Are you ready?” - -“Ready!” the two boys answered in unison and precision. - -“Which one is going up first?” - -“We’ll have to choose,” answered Paul. - -Major McCarthy took a coin out of his pocket and tossed it into the -air. “Heads,” cried William. - -“Tails,” cried Paul. - -Heads it was and William was the first to go up for instructions. “Very -well,” announced the major, “let’s go.” - -The whole group followed the major and William to one of the hangars. -Two mechanics pushed the training plane into the open. Again the major -turned to the group and said, “This is an Avro, one of the finest -training machines in the world. She is light on the controls, very easy -to handle and has an 80 h.p. Le Rhone engine. What kind of an engine -is it, anybody know?” - -William answered at once, with confidence, “A rotary engine.” - -“Fine,” said the major. “And what kind of engine is a rotary engine?” - -All the boys seemed to know that and the major was pleased by their -knowledge. However, he called upon William to answer the question. -“A rotary engine is one which has the cylinders rotate round the -crankshaft which remains stationary,” answered William correctly. - -“And what is another type of engine?” - -“A stationary engine.” - -“The crankshaft rotates round the cylinders.” - -“Correct,” announced the major with a gleam of satisfaction in his -eyes. “I can see,” he added, “that I’m going to enjoy teaching you -boys. All right William, put this hat on and get the ear pieces in the -right position; I’ll be talking to you all the time. And before we -start, remember this, if I hit you on the back take your hands and feet -off the controls immediately and put your hands above your head which -will show me that you have obeyed my signal. Okey?” - -Wallace remarked, humorously, “Don’t hit him too hard, major. I’d hate -to take home a corpse.” - -Major McCarthy withdrew to the shed telling William to get into the -front seat. When he had climbed into the rear seat, he said, “Now -William, don’t touch the controls until I tell you to. In the meanwhile -you can watch them working because both sets of controls are connected -and work simultaneously. Are you ready?” - -“Yes, sir.” - -The boys at the shed cheered lustily and William waved his hand as -Major McCarthy took off. The machine rose lightly into the air and -was mounting fast into a clear sky, smoothly and easily as a bird. -William, was at first nervous and tense, but soon he relaxed, his whole -body seeming to vibrate to the rhythm of the machine. Suddenly he felt -a light bump on the back and he quickly threw his hands up into the -air. The major was rather surprised. Usually pupils during their first -lesson are too excited to remember the instructions they have received. -The major felt a glow of satisfaction, and hoped that William would -respond to all instructions so quickly. - -They were about two thousand feet in the air. William felt a thrill -when he heard his instructor’s voice through the telephone. The -major was saying to him, “Okey, William, in a couple of minutes I’m -going to let you fly the machine and you must obey precisely all my -instructions. Put your hand on the joystick and your feet on the -rudder bar.” - -He complied. The next instant he felt a bump on his back and quickly he -put his hands above his he had. McCarthy was delighted with the boy’s -quick response. “This boy,” he said to himself, “is a natural born -flyer.” - -The major’s voice was coming over the telephone. “Okey, William,” it -said, “you’re going to fly the machine now. Only obey instructions -precisely.” - -McCarthy spoke gently and authoritatively. William obeyed. The machine -responded to his slightest touch. William felt a certain power in -handling the machine and it thrilled him. The major said, “Now when I -give the command, ‘Right turn,’ you kick on the right rudder and push -the joystick over to the right. Ready? Now, ‘Right turn.’ Keep the same -altitude.” - -The major kept talking most of the time, explaining every movement -and demonstrating his instructions. They practiced banking, climbing, -diving. This was no ordinary pupil, the major thought. He was aware -that the other boys would not respond as well as William, with whom he -progressed much more than with the average pupil. To satisfy himself -for the last time, he permitted William to fly alone for several -minutes, then tapped the boy on the back. Instantly the latter’s hands -flew above his head. The major, deeply satisfied, said, “That was -very good, William. I think you’ve had more than enough for the first -lesson, so we’ll go back now.” Thus saying, he took control of the -machine. - -The boys cheered as the plane taxied to a landing. As the instructor -and his pupil climbed out of the machine, the boys came running up. -“How did he do, major?” asked Wallace. - -McCarthy smiled, very much pleased with his first pupil. “He did very -well,” he announced. - -“Yea!” shouted Bobolink. - -“Hooray for William!” shouted Ken and Nuthin’. - -When the boys quieted down again, the major put his arm affectionately -on William’s shoulder, and said, “I don’t like to praise a pupil, -because he is apt to become cock-sure of himself. But this time I can’t -help praising him. William is a natural born flyer. I don’t want any -one of you to feel badly if you’re not as good as he is because there -are very few who take to flying spontaneously. I don’t want you to -blame yourselves or feel badly about it. It’s something that none of us -can help. We’re either born that way or not.” - -Jack asked, “Did he fly by himself already?” - -“He certainly did,” replied the major. “For about fifteen minutes he -flew the machine all by himself.” - -The boys cheered, proud of their friend. William was thrilled, but -tried not to show it. - -It was Paul’s turn now. Instructor and pupil took their respective -places in the machine. Paul was excited, tense. McCarthy was curious -to know how this boy would compare with William. He repeated the -directions for a second time. The machine was climbing and they -were gaining altitude. Paul was thrilled as he examined the various -gadgets on the dashboard. Suddenly he felt a bump on his back. He -was bewildered. What had happened. He turned around to see McCarthy -chuckling and enjoying the baffled look on his face. The instructor -said, “I told you to raise your hands above your head as soon as I -tap you on the back. Keep alive.” Paul settled back in his seat, -feeling ashamed of himself. Suddenly he again felt a tap on the back. -Immediately he raised his hands above his head. “Very good,” said -McCarthy encouragingly. Paul, too, would be a flyer, but not like -William. - -Soon Paul was at the controls and flying the machine in response to -the instructor’s guidance. After the necessary instructions, McCarthy -called out, “Ready? Left turn.” - -Paul pushed out his left foot. The machine whipped to the left at a -terrific speed. Suddenly he felt the stick being pushed over to the -left. Then the right rudder bar moved forward, the stick came back -to the right, now they were flying level once again. McCarthy had to -intervene to help him out. He explained the mistake and Paul nodded, -intimating that he understood. He was eager to do it over again, to -show that he could do it. But this time the command was, “Right turn.” -Paul got it all right. - -After about thirty-five minutes of instructions, they returned to the -airport. They climbed out of the machine and McCarthy inquired, “Well, -how did you like it?” - -“It was fine,” answered Paul grinning, “except that I think I was a -trifle dumb in responding.” - -“Oh, no, you weren’t,” McCarthy answered him. “You were all right. For -about ten minutes you were flying all by yourself and I’m very pleased -with you.” - -Walking toward the office building, the major commented, “I see now -that I’m going to enjoy teaching you boys. From the way it looks, I -should say that all of you are someday going to be mighty fine flyers.” - -“How long before we can go solo?” - -“It all depends. About eight or ten lessons is the average.” - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -BASEBALL GAME - - -During the following weeks, the boys spent the major part of their time -at the airport. Most of the boys were usually on hand when one of them -took off for a lesson. And if there was no lesson, they spent their -time dismantling the old plane and putting it together again. Ken and -Nuthin’ became assistants to Fred, the chief mechanic. These two boys -imparted their technical knowledge to their comrades. - -As for McCarthy, he was happy and really enjoyed instructing the boys, -because all of them responded so quickly to training. He taught them -everything he knew about flying and found that William learned more -easily than the others. McCarthy taught them to land, to take off, to -do a few simple stunts. After four lessons, William was ready to solo. -But his instructor wouldn’t permit him because McCarthy wanted them -all to go up solo the same day, making it in the form of a graduation -exercise. - -In spite of their preoccupation in aviation, they spent many half hours -discussing the mysterious airport and its consequences. Whatever -evidence they had, however, was circumstantial and insufficient. And -they couldn’t think of taking time out to do anything about it. The -boys had other obligations, temporarily forgotten, which also had to be -considered. - -One day Paul called the boys together. Most of them were in overalls, -their hands dirty with grease and their faces smeared. Looking at each -other, they could not repress their smiles. Each in his own way was -rather a funny sight. Ken laughed. “Hey, fellows, look at Bluff, will -you?” - -Bluff was wearing a pair of overalls that were much too large for -him and his face was smeared with grease. “You’re n-no Ap-p-pollo -yourself,” he countered. - -Wallace asked, “What is it you want to talk to us about, Paul?” - -“It’s this, fellows. We have been so busy the last few weeks, what -with getting flying instructions and spending most of our time at the -airport, that we have completely forgotten our baseball game with the -Slavin team. We haven’t practiced at all and the game is only three -days away.” - -“Perhaps we can call the game off,” remarked William. - -Several of the boys nodded in agreement, as their interest in aviation -was much stronger than any thought of baseball just then. They were so -engrossed in their work that any excuse was sufficient to try to break -an agreement. Paul, however, objected. He said, “I fully know that all -of us are more interested in our flying and all that, but we can’t go -back on our word. We promised Ted Slavin and his team that we would -play them and we’ve got to keep our word.” - -Ken reminded the boys, “We also promised them a swimming match. That’s -something we ought to practice up for, too.” - -Nuthin’ asked, “Well what do you think we ought to do, Paul?” - -“We have to keep our word and go through with it,” was the answer. -“Beginning tomorrow, we have to keep away from the airport and spend -the next two days practicing.” - -“What about those who have flying lessons?” Bobolink wanted to know. - -“Those who have lessons should not miss them,” answered Paul. “But the -rest of us will have to keep away from the airport.” - -The boys agreed. William said, “All right, then. Tomorrow morning we’ll -meet at the baseball field for practice.” - -Major McCarthy was glad to hear of their plans for reasons of his own. -He was a bit skeptical of their sudden and overwhelming interest in -aviation, because he feared that they might drop it just as suddenly -and completely. Spending only limited periods of time at the airport, -therefore, would test them. Besides, the major was also of the opinion -that they were too young to have only one dominating interest, it was -healthier for them to have a series of interests. - -During the following two days, they spent most of their time on the -baseball field. And when the day of the game arrived, they were in -pretty good shape. They had one worry, however. Wallace, star pitcher -for their team, had not come around all morning. They sent William to -find out what had become of him. - -As the time for the game approached, a fair crowd of townspeople had -filled the stands. The Ted Slavin team with Ted as pitcher, was warming -up, and some of his followers were encouraging him to demonstrate his -famous slow ball. The opposing team, however, was in great agitation. -William, out of breath, came running up. Paul guessed that William had -accomplished nothing. Nevertheless he asked, “Well, any news?” - -William gasped, “No. My mother said he left for the airport in the -morning and that he hasn’t returned yet.” - -“Did you call the airport?” - -“I did and Fred told me that he left hours ago.” - -Paul shook his head dejectedly. “Wonder what could have happened to -him?” he muttered. - -The boys formed a circle around Paul. Someone asked, “You think there -is any chance of calling the game off?” - -“No. What for? Suppose we lose the game, what difference would it make? -We’ll play just the same.” Most of the boys nodded in agreement. Paul -added, “All right, fellows, break it up. Let’s not show that we’re -handicapped and need anyone’s pity. We’ll hold our own. Ken, are you -warming up? You’re going into the box to start the game.” - -Ken nodded. “Okey. I’m ready.” - -Just then Major McCarthy came walking across the field. The boys waved -to him. Paul greeted him. “Hello, major.” - -“Hello, Paul. Came over to see the game.” Paul took the major by the -arm and led him to one side. - -“Wallace is missing,” he said. “He’s our star pitcher; without him, we -have no chance of winning. But that’s beside the point. I’m worried -about him. You have no idea what happened to him, do you?” - -The major shook his head. “Why, no,” he answered. “I gave him a lesson -and he left the airport at about ten. He even asked me to come and -watch him pitch the game.” - -“I can’t imagine what could have happened to him. He’s nowhere to be -found and nobody seems to have seen him or heard from him.” - -“I’m sorry to hear it. Is there anything I can do?” - -Paul shook his head. “Guess not. You can sit on our bench though, and -watch the game.” - -“That’s swell. Thanks a lot.” - -Just then the umpire came up, followed by Ted Slavin. “Ready?” asked -the umpire. - -Paul nodded. “Yes.” - -“For up,” announced the umpire as he tossed a coin. The Slavin team was -to go to bat first. “Who’s your pitcher?” the umpire asked. - -“Ken Armstrong.” - -Ted raised his eyebrows in astonishment. “Where’s Wallace?” he asked. - -“He’ll be here in a short while. We’re saving him.” - -Ted shrugged his shoulders. “Good luck,” he called as he walked away. - -“Same to you,” countered Paul. - -Paul signalled to the boys to take the field. The umpire took his place -in the pitcher’s box and called, “Batter up!” - -Paul was catching. He motioned to Ken to meet him halfway. He said, -“Don’t let them discourage you. Let them hit; the boys out in the field -will back you up.” - -They separated and returned to their respective positions. As Ken -poised, measuring up the first batter, a wave of applause and loud -cheering went up from the stands. His team-mates encouraged him. -“Alright, Ken, give it to him.” - -“Don’t be too hard on him, boy. Let him smell it.” - -“Sure. That guy’ll never see it.” - -Paul signalled and Ken wound up. He took his time pitching the first -ball. The batter patted the home plate with the bat as the umpire -called, “Strike one!” - -“That’s the boy, show him your dust.” - -“Pity the poor guy! He’ll die without moving a leg.” - -Ken wound up. He threw the ball. The batter gripped his bat, swung it -and ran toward first base. Ken stuck his gloved hand out and pulled it -in again. Everybody looked for the ball but nobody saw where it went. -The umpire called, “Out!” Then Ken took the ball between his fingers -and held it up for public inspection. A wave of laughter rolled slowly -across the field. The hit had been a fast level one and Ken had -snapped it out of the air so quickly that no one saw it. - -The second batter was at the plate. Ken poised; without winding up, he -pitched. The batter swung. It was a pop fly. Ken ran forward several -feet, caught the ball and threw it to Bluff at first base. The ball -then travelled to Bobolink at third, to William at second and back to -Ken. - -The third batter was up. Ken took his time measuring up the fellow. The -batter stood at ease as the ball bounced with a plop into the catcher’s -mitt. The umpire called, “Strike one.” Paul signalled and Ken threw the -ball. The batter gripped his stick, but at the last moment he shook his -head and let it pass. “Ball one!” called the umpire. The third ball -came sailing down the line, fast, an inside curve. The batter stepped -back and swung. The ball sailed away far out in left field. Nuthin’ saw -the ball coming; he walked back several steps, waited for the ball to -drop into his glove, then threw it to William at second. - -The boys threw their gloves into the air as they ran in from the field. -“That’s the boy, Ken!” they called, “that’s showing them.” - -Ted Slavin was pitching for his team. He was a good man. Several -semi-pro teams were out to sign him up but he held out. He was now in -good form and he struck out the first batter in three pitched balls. -The second batter made an attempt to hit the ball but he merely scraped -it and the ball went up into the air and was caught by the catcher. The -third man also struck out. - -In the second inning, the Slavin team sent a man to first and third -but they died on base. Paul started off for his team with a double but -he died on third. During the next inning, the boys were kept on their -toes backing up Ken. A grounder to the shortstop precipitated a double -play to second and first. Ted, on the other hand struck out his three -batters in quick succession. - -The fourth inning began with the Slavin team set to send in a couple of -runs. The first man up bunted and landed safely at first. The second -batter placed a swift grounder between the pitcher and first base. -Bluff went after it and threw the ball to second. William tried hard to -get it but it was far over his head. The spectators were on their feet, -yelling themselves hoarse. William dashed after the ball and threw it, -but the runner was already safe on third. Ken got the ball. He looked -at the men on second and third. Bobolink called, “Don’t worry, Ken, -they’ll die on base.” - -Someone else called encouragingly, “Come on, fellow, show them your -speed.” - -“Strike him out!” - -Ken poised then pitched the ball. The batter swung and missed. The next -ball was a strike. The batter gripped his bat and swung as the ball -came hurtling through the air. Bobolink took several steps forward and -very easily gathered in the ball. - -Two men out and men on second and third. Paul signalled to Ken and the -two met midway between home plate and the pitcher’s box. Ken inquired -anxiously, “Well?” - -Paul answered, “Nothing in particular. Just thought I’d give you a -minute to relax. Don’t worry if they hit you; it can’t be helped. -You’ve been doing swell so far.” - -The pitcher nodded. “Okey. Thanks.” - -Each walked back to his respective position. Ken poised, ready to -pitch. Paul signalled and the pitcher hurled the ball. The batter -looked unconcerned, but suddenly he tightened his grip on the bat and -swung. Crack! The sound was like a pistol shot. The ball sailed high -and far out into left field. Nuthin’ ran far back and as the ball began -to drop out of the air, he jumped. The crowd was on its feet, hushed, -its eyes glued to the ball. The men on base were running toward home -plate; the batter was already at second. Suddenly the crowd gasped -sounding like a wave breaking. Nuthin’ had missed the ball by inches. -He scampered after it and threw it wildly to second. William ran for -it but it was too wide. The spectators were shouting madly; the Slavin -team were dancing wildly as the man crossed home plate safely. - -The din and noise still sounded in his ears as Ken poised to pitch -again. He turned around to see if every player was in his place. But it -was totally unnecessary. He struck the batter out and that ended the -spectacle. Coming in from the field, the players managed to smile, joke -and even laugh. They slapped Ken on the back and told him not to worry. -It was their chance now and they would more than get even. - -The boys went to bat gripped with determination to send in some runs -but their enthusiasm was destroyed by Ted’s mastery in the box. He -teased the first batter with two balls and then struck him out. When -the second walked up to the plate, Ted repeated his performance. The -spectators cheered and his team-mates encouraged him. Bobolink held his -bat lightly and walked slowly to the plate. The boys encouraged him. -“Come on, Bobolink,” someone shouted, “sock the old pill.” - -“Hit it a mile, boy!” - -“Sock it, kid!” - -Bobolink gripped the bat compressed his lips and waited for the ball. -Ted thought he again would repeat his former performance of teasing -the batter. He put over a fast ball, cutting the inside edges of the -plate. Bobolink stepped back and swung. The spectators jumped to their -feet, watching the ball sail through the air, while they held their -breaths. Bobolink was notably a hard hitter. Suddenly a shout rumbled -across the field. People cheered; others muttered their disgust. The -player in left field knew the batter’s ability to hit and had moved -far back. As the ball came sailing out, he was obliged to run further -back, suddenly he realized that the ball would come down further on his -right; the next second he lunged forward with extended arm, caught the -ball barehanded and held on to it as he nearly tripped over himself. -The inning was over and the players came in from the field. - -Ken walked to the pitcher’s box and Paul took his place behind the home -plate. An agitation rolled slowly through the stands. Play for play, -Ken and his players far outshone the other team. True enough, Ted was -doing some mighty fine pitching, but except for the single catch, his -team wandered about idle at their posts. The other team, however, was -of unequalled showmanship. Dramatically they pulled the ball out of -the air, off the ground, staged a double-play that took people’s wind -away. If only Wallace was in the box! Some murmurs began to circulate. -“Wallace! Where’s Wallace!” But he was nowhere to be seen. The umpire -called, “Batter up!” - -Ken was piqued by all the muttering and mumbling around him. The -effect upon him was surprising; it steeled him. He relaxed. Absolutely -confident, he pitched superbly. Three men up, three men out. Not one -of them even so much as swung a bat. They were so bewildered by the -pitcher’s fury that they barely saw the ball whizz by them and before -they realized it, they heard the plop of the ball in the catcher’s mitt. - -Again the young aviators were at bat. The team determined to break -the spell and send in a couple of runs. The first batter bunted and -landed safely at first. Ted evidently sensed the determination of -his opponents, for he became ill at ease. To relax, he summoned the -catcher and they met midway; for several seconds they whispered to each -other, then returned to their respective positions. The batter waited -patiently for the pitcher to get going. Somebody in the stand shouted, -“Hit it, boy, sock it!” - -“Sock it a mile!” someone else screamed. - -Ted poised. He put all his strength into the ball as he hurled it. The -batter didn’t move a muscle. “Ball one!” called the umpire. - -“Put it over!” someone shouted. - -“Play ball!” shouted another. - -Again Ted put all his strength into the ball. The batter gritted his -teeth. Crack! The hit was a straight and low one, directly between the -shortstop and third basemen. Both players went for it, collided as they -tried to pick it off the ground. The batter went to first and the man -on first went safely to second. - -Ted was unnerved. “You have his mark!” someone in the stands shouted. - -“Hit it, hit it!” was the cry of someone else. - -Ted spit on the ball. Out of the corner of his eye he could see the man -on first draw away from the base. Like a flash he wheeled and threw the -ball. The first baseman lunged wildly for the ball but he missed by at -least a foot. Shouts, cheers, groans rolled through the stands. Jack, -coaching, at first, danced wildly and screamed, “Run, run!” Each man -advanced a base. - -Ken was up. He felt that now was the time to even the score. He had to -do something. With a man on second and third, no outs, now was their -chance. But Ted rallied sufficiently to strike the batter out. Once -more Ted became confident and self-assured. There was no danger, he -thought; he will strike the next two men out and show his mettle. But -his confidence deceived him. The batter picked the first ball and hit -a long fly which was caught, but which helped the man on third to -come home and the man on second to advance to third base. Ted was now -sufficiently unnerved to realize it himself. He signalled to a player -on the sidelines; he waited until the relief pitcher began to come -across the field, then started to walk off himself. - -“Yea!” shouted a spectator. - -“Knock this guy out of the box, too,” another spectator screamed. - -“Swell showman,” said Paul. - -“You said it,” agreed Jack. “He knows when to quit and that’s to his -credit.” - -The relief pitcher warmed up with a couple of throws. Finally the -umpire called, “Batter up!” - -Nuthin’ touched the home plate with his bat, held up the stick -vertically for a fraction of a second, as a signal to the man on base, -and then waited for the pitcher. The man in the box was perfectly -confident and took his time. It was a trick to vex the batter and force -him to strike, but Nuthin’ was a patient fellow and he waited. The -first ball came over, at least a foot outside the plate. “Ball one!” -called the umpire. The catcher threw back the ball and Nuthin’ let fall -the bat off his shoulder. The pitcher eyed the man on third base; then -turned to the batter. Nuthin’ gripped the bat. Shifting his position -slightly, he struck at the ball. It was a foul, a couple of yards off -third base. “That’s the boy!” someone shouted. - -“You got his number!” was another encouraging phrase hurled by someone -in the stands. - -His team-mates encouraged him. “Hit it, Nuthin’. Just sock it once,” -Bobolink urged. - -The pitcher was not to be dissuaded from his easy going manner. And -similarly Nuthin’ was not to be vexed; he was willing to wait, though -he realized how much depended upon him. If he managed at least to send -home the man on base, his team would be sufficiently encouraged to -possibly even the score; if he was struck out, on the other hand, they -might not get a similar chance again for the rest of the game. But all -that didn’t confuse him. The next ball was wide and he didn’t move a -muscle. The umpire called “Ball two!” The next ball he lunged at, and -again fouled. “Strike two!” called the umpire. - -The spectators in the stands sat hushed, waiting and watching. His -team-mates hoped for the best, but they, too, remained silent. The -pitcher hurled the ball. Nuthin’ watched it coming and thought it would -be too wide; the next instant he realized his mistake; the ball curved -and cut the edge of the plate. “Strike three and out!” called the -umpire. - -The score was 3-1, in favor of the Slavin team. And so it remained -for awhile. The game now became quieter and more steady; no dramatics. -Ted returned to the box and resumed his old form; he didn’t give out -a single hit. Similarly with Ken who was the sort of person who, the -more he was pushed to the wall and the greater the odds against him, -the surer he was of himself. He held his opponents down to two bits and -both men died on base. - -The beginning of the seventh inning revealed that both teams still had -plenty of fight in them and were out to make this a most exciting and -dramatic game. The first batter of the Slavin team poised at the plate, -swung at the first ball that came along and hit a fast, low-flying -ball that shot past like a bullet about three feet above Ken’s head. -William, at second, lifted himself off the ground and pulled the ball -out of the air. It all happened so quickly and suddenly that the -spectators were left with their mouths open, so bewildered were they. -They revived soon enough, however, to cheer William for his perfect, -most beautiful catch. - -Ken struck out the second batter in short order but the next man sent -the ball whistling across the ground toward third, base. Bobolink -scooped it off the ground and hurled it across the diamond to Bluff. -The latter, however, had to step back a couple of feet to catch the -ball and the runner safely crossed first base. - -With a man on base, the Slavin team thought they had Ken where they -wanted him. Although his team had a safe lead of two points, Ted wanted -to increase his score still more. The next man at bat succeeded in -getting hit by the ball and the umpire sent him to first, thus pushing -the other man over to second. Paul signalled his friend to forget the -men on base and to pitch ball. Ken nodded. He sent over a fast one that -burned the plate in half. The umpire called, “Strike one!” And his -team-mates cheered him. The next one was a ball, followed by a slow one -which the batter lifted far out into right field. The spectators were -lifted out of their seats, their eyes glued to the ball. The fielder -ran back a few yards and dug his shoes into the ground directly under -the ball which flopped right into his glove. A shout went up from the -stands and his team-mates threw their gloves into the air as they ran -off the field. - -Bluff was at bat. He was anxious to hit and he waited for his favorite -ball—one that was low and cut the edge of the plate. But Ted knew -his weakness and Bluff waited in vain; he was struck out. William, -raging mad, came up to the plate. He vowed to hit a homer or die in -the attempt. His mates cheered him and several voices in the stands -urged him on. Ted put all he had into the ball and sent it whistling -through the air; William set himself as though he were going to take, -then shook his head sadly and let the ball cut the plate. Ted imagined -he had the batter fooled and he again sent a fast one over. But it was -just what William wanted and he smashed a swift grounder between the -pitcher and the shortstop. Ted saw it was useless for him to go for it, -so he watched the shortstop lunge for it, but in vain. The ball skimmed -past several inches beyond his fingers. The man at second ran out to -stop the ball, picked it off the ground and poised to throw it but no -one covered second. He ran for the plate. William dived and grasped the -base with his fingers. The umpire called loud and clear, “Safe!” - -Bobolink was the next man up. Paul patted him on the back and said, -“It’s up to you now, fellow. Don’t disappoint the crowd.” - -Bobolink gritted his teeth and said nothing. Some spectators screamed -madly, “Come on, Bob, kill it, sock it.” - -Ted looked around and waited until all his men were in position. Ready -to pitch, he seemed unconcerned with the man on second. He shot over -a fast one, the catcher grabbed it and got into position to throw; he -hesitated, waiting for William to make a move for third base; but he -was disappointed and reluctantly returned the ball to Ted. Again the -pitcher made a mistake, throwing a ball he thought the batter would -let pass. Bobolink, however, gripped his bat and hit far out into left -field. William had his foot on the bag and waited. The fielder ran in -for the ball; confident that the catch was his, he waited for the fly -to drop into his glove. It did. Suddenly a deep, cry went up from the -stands. The man had muffed and the ball fell to the ground. He lunged -for it and threw it to second. William was already on his way to try -home plate. The man at second wheeled swiftly around and shot the ball -home. William measured his size on the ground; he touched the base a -fraction of a second before the catcher tagged him. And Bobolink was -safe on second. - -The score now stood 3-2, in favor of the Slavin team. Paul shouted -joyfully, “Now is our chance; we’ll even the score yet.” - -His enthusiasm, however, got the better of him, for his prophecy did -not come true. Ted made short work of the next batter and the seventh -inning was ended with the score still in favor of the Slavin team. - -Nothing happened during the eighth inning. Beginning the ninth, Ted -and his players determined to widen the margin. But all their efforts -were futile because Ken held them to one hit, a single, and the man -went no further than second. Their last chance to even the score or -win the game, the young aviators were cheered and encouraged by many -spectators. Ted and his players were dead set against a single run. The -game was theirs, they felt, and they wouldn’t let it slip away from -them. - -The first batter up struck at the ball twice and fouled both times. -Ted pitched again and the batter was struck out. Jack was up next and -he hit a beautiful grounder to the shortstop. The umpire declared him -out. Two out. The game now depended on the last man at bat. Some people -in the stands rose and left. Paul stepped up to the plate. Ted poised, -then sent the ball whistling through the air. Paul let it pass and the -umpire called out, “Strike one!” Again Ted sent a scorching one across -the plate and again the umpire called it a strike. Hit or miss, Paul -had to do something. He held the bat lightly but gripped it as the ball -came sailing through the air. He struck at it—and missed. The game was -over. The score was 3-2 in favor of the Slavin team. - -The losers gathered in a circle and cheered the victors. The winning -team gathered around Ted and cheered the losers. The spectators -cheered both teams. It was a dramatic and exciting game, well worth -winning—and losing. - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -WHAT HAPPENED TO WALLACE - - -Ted Slavin came over and shook hands with Paul. Smiling, he said, “Too -bad we had to beat you, but someone had to win, Paul.” - -“You deserve it; you played a fine game.” - -“I can say the same for you. Ken pitched a marvelously good game. But -what puzzles me is what happened to Wallace?” - -Paul cast his eyes down. “That’s something that is puzzling us too, -Ted.” - -“What do you mean?” Ted looked concerned. “Did anything happen to him?” - -“I hope not but we don’t know.” - -“Gee, that’s too bad. Is there anything I can do to help?” - -Paul shook his head. “I don’t think so. But if there is, I’ll call on -you.” - -“Be sure you do. If there is anything the boys and I can do, Paul, and -you don’t let us know, I’ll be terribly angry.” - -“Thanks. It’s mighty nice of you.” - -“That’s perfectly okey. And don’t forget we have a swimming match -scheduled for a week from today.” - -“Sure, I know.” - -The boys shook hands and parted. Paul walked over to the bench where -his team-mates were. The boys surrounded him, looking for guidance. -William posed the question that bothered them all. “What are we going -to do about Wallace, Paul?” - -“I really don’t know. There’s nothing we can do right now, I guess.” - -Jack spoke up. “I suggest that we all go home, wash up and have supper. -In the meanwhile we’ll relax and be able to think clearly. Let’s all -try and imagine what _may_ have happened to him. At seven o’clock we’ll -all meet again and try to formulate some plan of action.” - -“Yes, but what am I going to tell my mother if she asks me about -Wallace?” - -Everyone was silent, not knowing what to say. They were all pretty -well downcast. Jack again spoke up, saying, “Tell her he’s staying for -supper at my home.” A pause. Silence. Every mind with the same thought. -He added. “It’s not the truth but you’re justified. I’m sure he’ll turn -up very soon.” - -The boys stirred in their tracks. There was nothing more to say and -they all walked off the field. - -But what had happened to Wallace? Let us go over the day’s events and -find out. - -Wallace completed his flying lesson at about nine-thirty. He mounted -his bicycle and quickly left the airport, eager to return to town to be -with the boys who depended upon him to pitch in the game. He peddled -along steadily. Just as he was about to enter the outskirts of the -town, he heard a hissing sound. Jumping off his wheel, he discovered -that his rear tire was fast going flat. There was nothing to do but -walk and push his bike along. Less than a quarter of a mile further -on, he came to Jim’s filling station and he decided that he might as -well patch his tire right then and there. He found Jim busy greasing a -car. “Hello, there,” he called out, “how’re the young aviators getting -along?” - -“Fine, Jim. Do you mind if I use your shop to patch a hole in my tire?” - -“Not at all. Help yourself.” - -“Thanks, Jim.” - -Wallace walked into the shop. He knew where to find the materials and -tools he needed. Losing no time, he set himself to his job. It didn’t -take him long. Then in about ten minutes, as he was coming out of the -shop, he stopped dead in his tracks. He was just inside the doorway and -he saw Jim gassing a Ford roadster. But it was the man at the wheel -that caused him to freeze in his tracks. It was the stranger—the man -who had tried to convince them to move camp up in the mountains. -Wallace for the moment forgot all about the baseball game and thought -only of how he could follow the man. He quickly stored the bicycle away -in a corner where it wouldn’t be noticed, then he entered the office -through the shop and emerged by the opposite door which placed him in -a strategic position behind the wall. Wallace heard the grind of the -gears as the driver started off. As the car passed him, he sprang forth -and jumped onto the bumper in back of the car, holding tightly to the -spare tire. - -Wallace wondered where the driver was heading, when suddenly the car -made a right turn and Wallace realized that this was the road to the -mountain. For some seconds he was worried as well as mystified. If the -driver was going up to the mountain, there was no telling when he would -return and Wallace became afraid that he might miss the game. On the -other hand, his curiosity was aroused, for he knew that the road ran -for about five miles to the foot of the mountain and then it became a -foot path. How then could he go all the way up in the car? The only -alternative was to wait and see. - -Wallace hung on for dear life. At approximately a quarter of a mile -before the end of the road, there was a farm house. As far as he -knew, no one lived there. Yet a driveway, which appeared to be in -constant use, led off the road and was kept closed by a double-door -gate. The car turned off the road into this driveway without stopping -and the automobile pushed the doors apart. The doors of the gate were -on swinging hinges, and swung back again into place as soon as the -automobile passed. In the meanwhile the car proceeded to the back of -the house. Wallace feared that he might be discovered, yet there was -nothing he could think of doing, should he be noticed. To his relief, -however, the car kept moving beyond the house, passed between two -large elm trees and then came out on a one lane dirt road. Looking -back, Wallace saw that the dirt road was entirely hidden by trees and -could not be seen from the main road. He marveled at the deception and -cleverness of the gang of arms smugglers—for by now he was convinced -that they were arms smugglers—and wondered whether it was worth it -for them to go such lengths of deception. But the fact that they did, -showed that they must have considered it worth the trouble and expense. - -In the meanwhile, the car rode along, the wheels sinking into holes and -bouncing over rocks. More than one time Wallace was nearly thrown, but -he managed to hold on. On either side of the dirt road were the woods. -The road turned and twisted in many directions but always headed toward -where he was sure the cave was situated. Judging by the speed and the -time, the car had gone about ten miles beyond the main road. The driver -stopped suddenly, leaving the car in the middle of the road. In the -next instant the stranger was out of the car and at once entered the -woods. His heart palpitating, Wallace hid behind the car and waited. He -was anxious not to lose his man but he was still more anxious not to -be caught. Who knows what they might do to him if they ever laid hands -on him! Arms smugglers were obliged by necessity to be tough, hard men -and would have no mercy on anyone who might give them away. Wallace -shuddered as these thoughts flew through his mind. Yet he was undaunted -and would not turn back. - -When several minutes had elapsed, and he thought it was time, Wallace -crept out from behind the car and darted into the woods, following the -trail of the stranger. He had no difficulty following him. Several -times he even caught a glimpse of the man’s form. Finally the trail led -him to the edge of the woods—to the mysterious airport. Hesitating for -several seconds and trying to think fast what to do next, he watched -the man walk diagonally across the clearing, heading directly for -the spot where he and Jack had overheard the stranger and the chief. -Wallace decided that he had only one alternative: to make his way along -the edge of the woods and get there in time enough not to lose his -prey. Wallace sprinted, running lightly and noiselessly. At the same -time he tried to keep the stranger in sight. It wasn’t easy because his -vision was usually obstructed by the trees and low hanging branches. -Also, he had to watch carefully where he was running. Suddenly the -sound as of a pistol shot echoed through the stillness of the woods. -Wallace dived and hid behind a clump of bushes. Finally he realized -that it was only the sound of a twig which broke as he stepped on it. - -Breathless, Wallace waited for the echo to subside and for the -stillness of the woods again. At last when he thought it was safe to -creep out of his hiding, he crawled over to the edge of the clearing. -He looked, but the stranger had already disappeared. Terribly -disappointed, Wallace lay there watching, waiting. Finally he decided -to approach the spot where the stranger had most likely entered the -woods. Trying to move along noiselessly, Wallace came to the very spot -where he and Jack had lain hiding. He found the rifle just where they -dropped it. Moving on a little further, he came upon a footprint that -pointed directly at a clump of foliage. He examined it very carefully. -Putting his arm out, he tried to move a small bush but found that it -was attached to what seemed a board. His heart beat wildly and he -became numb with excitement. Looking further he found several boards -attached together into a sort of door, to which were attached many -pieces of foliage that entirely hid it. Moving his fingers to its very -edge, he could tell that the door swung away from the entrance of the -cave against which it rested. He felt like jumping into the air and -screaming, “Eureka, I’ve found it!” - -Controlling himself, he hastily moved away and picked a position about -five feet away from the entrance of the cave. From where he lay on his -stomach, hidden by a clump of bushes, he could see anyone who might -enter or leave the cave; he could also overhear anything that might be -said, even if the speakers conversed in whispers. Taking further stock -of himself, he concluded that there was no way of his getting back -to town in time for the game. He had a fifteen mile walk which would -take him about five hours. Besides, since he was already here and had -come upon the cave, he wanted to wait around a while to see what might -happen. Surely the stranger was inside, as he most certainly did not -make the trip for nothing. Something was bound to happen. Wallace -therefore made himself as comfortable as he could and waited. - -After what seemed to be hours of dead quiet, he suddenly became -conscious of an airplane overhead. He dropped to the ground again and -hid behind the bushes. Looking up, he saw a small monoplane circling -overhead. Some moments later it glided to a landing at the mysterious -airport. A man climbed out of the cockpit and walked across the -clearing toward the cave. Wallace now turned to watch the entrance of -the cave. As he looked the foliage swung back and revealed an entrance -about four feet high and three feet wide. The stranger, bent over, -emerged from the cave, waiting for the pilot to appear. Coming into -view, the stranger greeted, “Hello, Chief!” - -“Hello, Bud!” The other returned. - -The pilot was the same “Chief” that Wallace and Jack had seen before. -He made a motion to enter the cave but Bud stopped him, saying. “Let’s -stay out here, Chief. It’s awful hot there.” - -The chief nodded, “Okey,” he answered. “I ain’t gonna stay but a couple -of minutes.” And they squatted at the entrance. - -“What’s the dope?” - -“Not much. Just wanted to tell you to clear everything out of here and -lay low for a while.” - -“What’s the matter? The law catching up with us?” - -“Naw, they’ll never get us. It’s at the other end. They still didn’t -dispose of the last shipment. So there ain’t nothing for us to do for a -while.” - -“Hm. Well, it’ll be like a vacation.” - -“Yeah. Make the most of it.” - -For a short while there was silence. Finally Bud asked, “When do you -figure we’ll make another shipment?” - -“In about ten days or two weeks.” - -“Guess I’ll run over to the city for about a week and kill some time -enjoying myself.” - -“Suit yourself,” answered the chief languidly. - -Wallace trembled with excitement. He could barely control himself. The -chief rose and muttered, “Guess I’ll be going now.” - -Bud also rose and said, “Guess I’ll go too.” - -“Got everything cleaned out of there?” - -“Clean as a whistle.” - -“Okey.” - -Bud pushed the door, with its attached foliage against the mouth of the -cave and walked off. Wallace became frantic. He had to get to the car -before he left or else he would have to walk. He had to run by way of -the woods while Bud crossed the clearing. Just as soon as he thought it -was safe, he sprinted away. He hoped that Bud would stop to talk with -the chief for a while, which would give him the necessary time to make -it. He ran swiftly and noiselessly because if he made any sound and was -detected, it would be too bad. Wallace came upon the car just about -half a minute before Bud. He hid behind the tree and hitched onto the -car. They returned via the same route. Just as they hit the main road, -Wallace jumped off. He figured it was much safer if he hiked the five -miles into town. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -THE CAVE - - -William, wearing a long face, hesitated as he mounted the steps to the -porch of his home. A thousand questions filled his mind which he was -afraid his mother might ask, and he searched for possible answers. -Slumping into a chair, he tried to think how to meet any situation that -might arise. At the same time he was worried about his brother and -wondered what might have happened to him. He didn’t hear his mother -come out on the porch. Her voice startled him as she asked, “What are -you sitting out here for, William?” - -He shrugged his shoulders. “Just like that, mother. Resting up.” - -“Did you win the game?” - -“No. No, mother, we lost.” - -“I’m sorry to hear that.” She looked at him and saw how miserable he -felt imagining that it was because of the lost game. She tried to cheer -him up by saying, “Don’t feel so badly, son. It’s not so terrible to -lose a game.” - -“Yes, mother.” - -“Where is Wallace?” - -The question came suddenly and hit him like a bombshell. He expected -it, yet he was caught off guard. Hesitating, trying to think of the -exact words he was going to utter he finally said, “He went with Jack; -said he’d stay there for supper.” - -“Very well.” She smiled down at him. “You’d better go and wash up.” - -He rose and entered the house. He took a shower and changed his clothes -and fussed, trying very hard to delay his coming down to the dining -room. When he heard his mother call him for the second time, he left -his room and descended the stairs. Entering the dining room his eyes -almost popped out of his head to see his twin brother and Jack at the -table. His father noticed the look of consternation on his face and -asked, “Anything wrong, son? You look pale.” - -“No, Dad. I feel fine and dandy.” Trying to keep his voice level as -possible, he asked, “I thought you were staying at Jack’s for supper?” - -Wallace had a mouthful. “Changed our minds,” he mumbled. - -William was overjoyed. Passing behind his brother’s chair, Wallace got -poked in the head. It was a signal of affection rather than of anger. -Sitting down at the table, William was all smiles and suddenly he -remembered that he was terribly hungry. - -When the boys met, Wallace was attacked with a million questions, but -at first he wouldn’t answer a single one. When the time came, he told -his story. A lot of discussion ensued. One thing was agreed upon by -all, however. They had to go and investigate the cave while they had -the chance. Tomorrow was Sunday. So they would leave in the afternoon, -camp out for the night and return the following day. After deciding -upon the plan, Nuthin’ raised another question. “Don’t you think it’s -about time we informed the police or government agents?” he asked. - -Paul answered quickly and precisely. “No. Absolutely no.” - -“W-w-why not?” queried Bluff. - -“For a thousand reasons,” replied Paul. “But one is sufficient. If we -tell the police, they’ll most likely put some guards there and the -secret will leak out, then that gang will get wise and beat it.” - -That seemed to satisfy most of them but Nuthin’ was insistent. “But -what can we do by ourselves?” he demanded. - -“We’ll just have to wait and see.” - -They met at the outskirts of the town, coming there in twos and -threes; they didn’t want anyone to see them and ask them embarrassing -questions. They carried with them only enough provisions to last them -until the following day. Hiking briskly, with a minimum of rest stops, -the group arrived at their destination at about five o’clock. Holding a -conference, it was decided that only Wallace and Jack would enter the -cave, while the other boys hid themselves at various distances, and -kept a sharp lookout. Before the group parted, Paul warned the two, -“Now don’t stay there too long. We’ll give you forty minutes. If you’re -not out by then, we will come after you.” - -The two nodded in agreement. Waiting for the others to take their -places of hiding, they finally heard Paul’s whistle, the signal for -them to proceed. Wallace and Jack crept forward. At the entrance, -Wallace paused to point out to his friend the remarkable work of -deception. Then, shaking with excitement, he pulled the door ajar and -peeked in. It was dark inside and he saw nothing. Pulling the door a -bit wider, the two boys crept in, and used their flashlights. - -Paul and the other boys watched Jack and Wallace enter the cave and saw -the door close behind them. Time dragged on their hands. They lay in -hiding places and watched the sun move steadily in its westward course. -In a couple of hours it would be dark and they had yet to set up camp. -But the boys didn’t think of it. Their minds were in the cave and they -wondered what Jack and Wallace were seeing and finding. Every minute -seemed to them an age. They trembled with excitement. Paul saw William -signal that he wanted to come over, which he did. “Wish they would come -out all ready so we can go in and see what’s inside,” William whispered. - -“Give them their allotted time,” Paul answered. - -Side by side, they lay there and itched with impatience. Tired -of watching the entrance to the cave, they let their eyes wander -elsewhere. William took out his watch and counted off each minute. As -the forty minutes were drawing to a close, they again glued their eyes -to the entrance of the cave. William whispered, “They’re not out yet. -You think they’re all right?” - -“Of course they’re all right. Give them time to come out. They still -have five minutes.” - -But when the five minutes were up, the two boys still had not emerged -yet. Paul waited. Five minutes later he called the boys together to -discuss the situation. It was decided that they would wait fifteen -minutes more and if Jack and Wallace were not out by then, Paul and -Bluff were to go in after them, the others were to remain outside. - -In the meanwhile, let us see what happened to Jack and Wallace. -Having crept into the cave on their hands and knees, Jack used his -flashlight, throwing the beam of light straight ahead. The cave was -about forty feet deep and beginning at the entrance it gradually -widened until it attained a maximum width of about ten feet. The two -boys crept forward until they came to about the middle of the cave. -Playing their flashlight all around them, they found the place truly -empty—absolutely bare of anything. The two boys looked at each other -dumbfounded. Jack laughed good naturedly. “Can you imagine anything -like it? If we knew nothing about that gang, we couldn’t suspect a -thing by coming into the cave.” - -“You’re right,” answered Wallace. “But I have a suspicion that this is -not the whole of the cave.” - -Jack snapped his finger enthusiastically. “Those are just my -sentiments,” he cried. “It’s evident that they use this place for a -store room and a hideout. Now if this was all there was to the cave -and they stored their stuff right here, then they would be discovered -by the first person who happened to come upon them. On the other hand, -the fact that they have operated successfully and were not caught shows -that there must be another place leading out from here where they can -quickly hide.” - -“I agree with you. And I have been thinking how we can start trying to -find it.” - -“And what’s your plan?” - -Wallace rested on his haunches. “Notice how simple and smooth the walls -seem to be?” - -“That’s right.” - -“Well, another part of this cave would have to lead off somewhere -through that wall. And my hunch is that it’s near where we are now, on -both sides and to the end of the cave.” - -“Very good. Then you start on that wall, I’ll start on this one, and -we’ll examine carefully every spot. We’ll work so that we meet at the -far end of the cave.” - -Wallace agreed and they set to work. With their hands, they went over -every inch of the wall. They had been working like that for perhaps ten -minutes when Jack suddenly screamed, “Wallace! I’ve got it! Here it is!” - -Wallace jumped across to his friend’s side. A thick door, about two -feet wide and four feet high, had swung out and remained open. Both -were so excited with their discovery that neither one thought of -determining exactly how it worked. Jack didn’t know what it was that -swung the door open. It just happened. Wallace walked through the door -first, followed by Jack. So enthused were they that neither one paused -long enough to make sure of their exit. As they stepped into this newly -discovered additional cave, Wallace used his flashlight. The beam flew -back and forth, all around the place. The ceiling here was about three -feet higher than in the outside cave. And all around the walls were -stored large cases, boxes, utensils of many sorts and such things. -Wallace gasped, “Look at all that stuff!” - -Jack grasped his friend by the elbow. “Yeh,” he muttered. “Let’s take a -look.” - -They approached the large cases first. Jack carried his small hatchet -with him. Wallace whispered, “Open up one of these cases first, and do -it so we can nail it up again and make it look as if no one touched it.” - -“Right.” - -Jack set to work. In the meanwhile, Wallace roamed about, describing -things to Jack as he came across them—cooking utensils, bedding, -several iron cots, some clothing, two leather jackets, two holsters and -automatics. Jack had pried open one board. He called, “Wallace, come -here!” - -They looked into the box. It was full of rifles. Their eyes met in -astonishment; even though this was what they had been expecting. Jack -gasped, “Well, that’s that.” - -Wallace said, “Now close it again. Do it so there won’t be any -suspicion that it was opened.” - -When the job was completed, Wallace looked at his watch. “Hey!” he -cried. “We have been away forty-five minutes already. Let’s get out.” - -They looked around for the door but they couldn’t see it. It had swung -to without their being aware of it. Both boys rushed over to where -they thought the door would be; they pounded and pushed against the -wall, but in vain. Wallace exclaimed, “Can you imagine a thing like -that! We were so excited we forgot we had to come out again and took no -precaution.” - -Jack agreed. “Yes, it’s our fault. But let’s not get excited. We’ll get -out.” - -“I suppose so. But the boys out there will become worried if we don’t -show up.” - -“Then they’ll come after us.” - -“But suppose they don’t find the door?” - -“We found it, so why shouldn’t they?” - -“It was an accident the way we found it. And it is possible that they -may not.” - -“Well, let’s not cross our bridges before we get there. Let’s do the -best we can and look carefully.” - -The boys spent fully a half hour pounding their fists against the wall, -clawing with their fingers. But all in vain. They sat down on the hard -ground to rest a bit and take counsel together. But just then Jack -felt a slight puff of cool air and he turned his face to see the door -swinging out. He jumped up and grasped it. Simultaneously Paul and Jack -cried out. Wallace exclaimed, “Hold it! Let’s see how it works.” - -Only a few minutes was necessary to discover that the door worked on an -axis and the slightest push anywhere along the rim of the door, set it -swinging. But to make sure, two of the boys remained on the other end, -the door was swung to, then Jack swung it open again from the inside. - -Jack remained at the door and held it open. Wallace showed Paul and -Bluff around. They guessed that all the large cases—there were six of -them—contained rifles, while the smaller boxes contained cartridges. -In about five minutes, they were all prepared to leave again. Jack -said, “Wait a minute, fellows. Take a deep breath, then I’ll ask you -something.” - -The boys breathed in. “All right. Now what?” asked Paul. - -“How does the air appear to be, fresh or stale?” - -Wallace sniffed the air again and answered, “Fresh,” to which the -others agreed. - -“Now,” said Jack, “when we first entered here, do you recall whether -the air was stale?” - -Wallace scratched his head. “I really don’t remember,” he answered. - -“That proves that the air was not stale but fresh.” - -“How do you figure it out.” - -“Because if the air had been stale, it would have hit you right away -and you would remember it.” - -“What are you trying to prove?” demanded Paul. - -Jack exclaimed. “Standing here I felt a very slight draft. That’s clue -number one. Secondly, if the air was fresh when we first entered here, -then it proves that air is coming in from somewhere.” - -“Gee,” exclaimed Paul, “that’s very good reasoning.” - -“Yes. But there’s more to it. I’m convinced that there is an exit -leading to the outside from this inner room. The reason for it is -obvious. The gang had to have an avenue of escape if they were ever -cornered.” - -“That’s very logical,” added Wallace. “Let’s look for it.” - -“Before we do that,” interposed Paul, “I suggest that one of us go out -and tell the boys not to worry and be patient. Two of us should conduct -the search while one stands guard at this door.” - -They agreed and it was decided that Bluff was to return to their -companions, Wallace was to stand guard at the door and Jack and Paul -were to conduct the search. Bluff left for the outside. “Now,” said -Paul, “let’s find the exit.” - -Using their flashlights, they scanned the walls and found no clues. -So the two boys got busy looking behind the piled cases and boxes. -In a few minutes, Paul shouted that he had discovered it. Hidden by -a sort of net, the mouth of the tunnel was just large enough for one -individual to creep along on his belly. Paul crept in, followed by -Jack. Five minutes later, Jack re-appeared and called to Wallace to -follow. The tunnel was about thirty feet long, the other end hidden by -a lot of shrubbery. Looking around, the three boys discovered that, the -camping site which Bud (the stranger) urged them to leave, was right -there in front of them, on the other side of the stream. - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -FLYING SOLO - - -Major McCarthy was quite sure of his pupils. He was certain of their -ability to land, to take off, to fly, to know what to do in case of an -emergency. He had taught them to be not merely flyers, but all around -pilots. For that reason he had insisted that they spend many hours -learning the intricate parts and mechanics of a motor. His plans went -further. He wanted them to learn more of the technical affair that an -airplane is. When the time came, he would teach them as much as he knew -about navigation, how to fly blind, and many other things that had to -do with flying. But all that was a sort of post-graduate course. For -the present, they had earned their wings—and how! - -He had absolute confidence in his young aviators. And William was -his star pupil. Technically, not one of his pupils had as yet gone -up solo. However, each one of them had gone up at least once, taken -off, flew, performed a couple of simple stunts, and landed again with -McCarthy in the rear seat, who didn’t say a word or move a muscle; on -that one flight he was merely a passenger. Therefore his confidence -in the boys was based not merely upon his affection for them or his -opinion of their ability, but upon the fact that they had proven their -ability. For that reason he made elaborate arrangements for their solo -flight. It was to be on Wednesday, at about five in the evening, when -the weather is usually not very bumpy and quite mild. Secretly he had -invited the parents of the boys, the Mayor, a few other notables, and -let it be known that the public was welcome. As for the boys, they were -not merely going to fly solo, but to do other things. He had arranged -everything. This was to be their graduation exercises. - -When the time came, more people turned out than were expected. A -special section of ground was roped off for the several hundred -spectators. All the boys’ parents were there; even Dr. Morrison had -managed to get away from his office. Some few of the spectators were -jittery and anxious. McCarthy was as calm and serene as ever, smiling -and joking. A few of the boys were at first a bit nervous but they soon -got over it. They realized that they were merely going up in the same -way as when their instructor went with them. This time, however, they -were going alone—solo. And since they were confident of their flying -ability and of McCarthy’s teaching, they felt that they had nothing to -worry about. - -Major McCarthy summoned the boys together and they lined up in front -of him. They were wearing their Scout uniforms and flying helmets and -goggles. They were all very happy. The Major addressed them. “Boys,” -he began, “this is your graduation day. Today you are going to make -your first solo flight—that is, you’re going to take up a plane and -land her again all by yourselves. Having completed your solo flight -successfully, you’ll be presented with your wings; the Mayor will make -the presentation. You’re also going to get a letter from me stating -your successful completion of the course.” Pause. He looked from one to -the other of the boys. “Are you ready?” he asked. - -“Yes,” they answered in unison. - -“Very well then. Each one of you will go up in the Avro, perform any -one simple stunt you choose, bank her several times, then land again. -After each one of you has done that, I’ll have you go up in the air -again, but about that, later. William, you make the solo flight first.” - -Major McCarthy had a definite purpose for designating William to go up -first. William was the best of all his pupils, and the others, seeing -him perform well, would be heartened and do as well. - -The spectators cheered heartily when they saw William walking toward -the Avro which had been wheeled out of its hangar and was being warmed -up by a mechanic. William climbed in and the chocks were jerked away. -He opened the throttle and the mechanic leaped forward along the -ground. Shutting off the power by means of the thumb switch, the plane -slowed down. He turned the nose into the wind. The next moment he was -off, skimming over the field, then the plane rose lightly into the air -like a bird. Easily and smoothly, the machine climbed fast. Down below, -the spectators craned their necks to see. William climbed until he -was about two thousand feet above ground. He banked and flew directly -over the airport. After circling it twice, he straightened out, then -opened wide the throttle. The machine bounded forward and the nose -sprang upwards. As it rose, the forward speed decreased in spite of -the fact that the engine continued to run at the maximum revolutions. -The machine pointed vertically upwards and for about a moment it -appeared to hang onto the rapidly revolving blades of the propeller. -The spectators below watched the airplane with their mouths open. Some -of them, who had never witnessed such a stunt, were positive that the -machine would come crashing down tail first. But suddenly the nose fell -over to one side, the tail shot up and the next moment the plane was -shooting sharply downward. Two minutes later William was on the ground, -and climbing out of the cockpit. The spectators cheered him. His -friends shook him by the hand, slapped him on the back and told him it -was a fine job. Major McCarthy smiled and called out, “All right, Paul, -you’re next.” - -Paul went through the same performance, and then the rest of the boys. -Not one of them faltered. The spectators were delighted, and the -parents were proud. As for Major McCarthy, he said nothing and revealed -no emotion. To him, it seemed as though the whole affair was merely the -successful completion of his teaching job. Inside, however, he felt -very much pleased and proud. It was a pleasure to have such an able -group of boys as pupils. - -The Major had some other things in store for the boys. He was going to -have them do some more flying. He had them lined up in front of him and -addressed them. “That was well done, fellows,” he said, “but I expect -even more from you. I’m going to have you do more flying. You’re all -going up into the air again—and all together.” The boys opened their -eyes wide and looked surprised. They wondered what the Major was -up to. He smiled and continued, “You’re going up in pairs—Paul and -William, Jack and Bobolink, Wallace and Bluff. While I’m talking to -you, the mechanics are wheeling out two more machines, another Avro and -a Bristol. William and Paul will fly the Bristol because William has -already flown the machine. The others will fly the Avros. One of you -is going to take the machine up and his partner will land it. You’ll -change controls after every stunt. As to what you’re going to do in the -air, follow William. Are you ready?” - -“Yes!” They answered in unison. - -“Alright, then. William and Paul will take off first, Jack and Bobolink -next, and Wallace and Bluff last. Go to it.” - -The Major had discussed his plans with William and had instructed the -boy as to every move. The entire flight had been planned in advance and -William knew it by heart. - -The Bristol was somewhat larger and heavier than the Avro. William got -into the front cockpit, Paul in the rear one. William was to take off, -and he warmed up the engine. A minute later the chocks were jerked -away. Turning into the wind, he skimmed the ground for a distance, -then the machine rose gracefully and continued to climb. A minute -later, Jack and Bobolink took off, and finally Wallace and Bluff. -They were about two thousand feet in the air. William gave the signal -and the three machines lined up in formation—the two Avros on either -side and a little to the rear of the Bristol. They circled the airport -twice. Again William signalled and the three planes lined in a row; -they made believe it was a race. The earth seemed to shake with the -drone of the motors. After that, they fell into line one behind the -other. William signalled and each pilot was ready. The first machine -did an Immelmann turn, followed by the second and third planes. Soon -they were in the same formation as they had started but flying in the -opposite direction. The Bristol now went into a “half-roll.” By pulling -the stick back and kicking down the rudder, the machine turned over -completely on her back with her nose pointing down. The pilot shoved -the nose further down, flying at a steeper angle towards the ground; -the pressure of the air against the wings forced the nose up again, and -as the pilot kept pulling the nose of the machine up, it leveled out -and continued to fly in the opposite direction. Both Avros followed the -Bristol. - -William next signalled for a “barrel roll.” To those on the ground, -it seemed as though the machine, with a kind of cork-screw movement, -had wriggled on her back and then wriggled back again. What actually -happened was that the machine went through the same tactics as before -in the “half-roll,” with the exception that instead of ending up in a -dive, the plane continued to turn after being upside down and ended up -on a level keel, flying in the same direction as before. - -The next stunt the boys did was a “loop the loop.” The nose of the -Bristol went up and the next moment was flying upside down, followed by -a swift dive earthwards. - -When all three planes completed the stunt they fell into formation. -William signalled for number three—Wallace and Bluff—to land. Jack -and Bobolink landed next. The Bristol with William and Paul became the -only machine in the air. They were directly over the airport. William -communicated with his friend to take over the controls. A minute later -William slipped over the side of the plane and went hurling toward -the ground. The spectators let out a scream of dismay. Ten seconds -later, William pulled the rip cord of his parachute and went sailing -majestically downward to the ground. - -Again the boys were lined up, with all the spectators at their backs. -The Mayor made a little speech and then presented each boy with his -wings. He turned to the major and asked him to say a few words. “Very -few,” replied McCarthy. “All I will say, boys, is—I’m proud of you.” - -The young aviators were cheered. Then the boys cheered McCarthy. The -Mayor held up his hand for quiet and then said, “And I want to add, -major, that we, the people of Stanhope, are also proud of these boys -and we are also proud of you.” - - - - -CHAPTER XV - -A COMPLICATED SURPRISE - - -After all the ceremonies were completed at the airport, the boys and -their parents returned to town and were entertained at dinner by Dr. -and Mrs. Morrison. All the trimmings were included, ending up with ice -cream and cookies. Nuthin’ leaned back in his chair and patted his -belly. “If I’d go up in a plane now,” he remarked jocularly, “The ship -would sink like a rock, I feel so heavy.” - -The boys laughed heartily. Bobolink said, “That’s nothing. If I got -into a plane now, it wouldn’t lift off the ground.” - -Some more laughter and a few more clever remarks. Then Ken asked, -“Well, what’s on our program now?” - -William replied, “Now that we are real pilots, we are going to do some -real flying.” - -“Not for a few days,” interposed Paul. “We have a swimming match for -this coming Saturday and we have to practice up a bit.” - -“Yes,” spoke up Jack, “and this time we are going to give that Slavin -bunch a good beating.” - -“You say that as though you intended to do them physical battle,” -remarked Wallace, with a twinkle in his eye. - -“Oh, no,” Jack hurried to make himself perfectly understood. “We are -going to do it fairly and squarely. The Slavin group is a nice bunch -and I don’t hold anything against them.” - -“Except that they won the ball game,” said Wallace. - -“They deserved it,” added William. “They played a mighty fine game, and -Ted has never pitched as well as last Saturday.” - -“W-w-what a-about Ken?” demanded Bluff. “He p-p-pitched -m-m-marv-v-velously.” - -“You said it,” agreed Paul. “I’ve never seen Ken pitch better ball than -last Saturday.” - -Ken said, “If it wasn’t for the boys backing me up as well as they did, -it would have been just too bad.” - -“Well, why do you think we were out in the field?” asked Bobolink. -“Just for ornamentation?” - -“Let’s cut the discussion,” announced Paul. “I for one feel tired, and -I imagine that all of us are just a bit winded. So let’s break it up, -go home and meet tomorrow morning for swimming practice.” - -“Agreed!” cried William. - -Everybody else seemed to feel that way. As a matter of fact, for the -past half hour or so, the boys had begun to squirm in their seats and -showed signs of nervousness and anxiety. So it was quite a relief for -all of them to rise from the table and go their way. Ostensibly, each -one was going home. - -About half an hour later, Paul was walking down Main Street. He was all -spruced up—wearing his new suit, a bright tie, his shoes shined to a -gloss and his hair combed neatly. At Rogers Street he turned to the -right. He walked along snappily and whistled a cheerful tune. - -At the middle of the block, he met Paul face to face. Surprise showed -on both their faces and their eyes almost popped at seeing each other. -Quickly, each boy put his right hand behind his back. Finally, after a -very embarrassing silence, one of the boys asked, “What are you doing -here, Jack? I thought you had gone home.” - -“What about you, Paul? I thought you were tired and were going to bed -early?” - -Silence. The boys squirmed and wriggled. One of them turned and looked -at the house they were in front of. The other boy did likewise. Finally -Jack asked, “What are you hiding there behind your back?” - -Paul fidgeted. “Nothing. What about you?” - -“Nothing.” - -Again silence and the boys looked around with embarrassment. “You still -didn’t tell me what you’re doing here,” remarked Jack. - -“Just taking a walk,” replied Paul. “And you?” - -“Also taking a walk.” He looked up at the sky and at the horizon. -“Beautiful evening, isn’t it?” - -“Yes,” replied Paul. “Where did you say you were walking to?” - -“Right here. And you?” - -“The same.” - -The two boys looked at each other, their eyes met and slowly a grin -spread over their faces. Finally they laughed and slapped each other on -the back. Then Jack said, “Well, let’s go in.” - -Paul shook his head. “No, wait a minute.” He noticed someone -approaching. “Let’s hide behind the corner of the house.” - -Jack and Paul retreated. Half a minute later, a boy came along and -without any hesitation, started to cross the lawn to the house. The -two boys jumped out of their hiding place. “Where do you think you’re -going?” demanded Paul. - -William jumped and went pale. Seeing, however, who his assailants were, -he gritted his teeth and barked, “Say, what do you think you’re doing, -scaring people?” - -The two boys smiled. Jack said, “Now don’t get too fresh or we’ll -pummel you. Where are you going?” - -William made believe he was still angry. “Follow me and you’ll find -out.” - -“And what’s that little package you have there?” asked Paul. - -“Wouldn’t you like to know, though?” was the retort. - -“A nickel to a penny it’s a box of candy,” said Jack. - -But William was not to be bluffed. “Seems to me,” he remarked dryly, -“that you fellows are not carrying flowers in _your_ packages.” - -He had guessed right, and the three of them joined in laughing -heartily. But just then another boy came up to them. He had approached -quietly and had been a witness to the previous scene. “Well, well,” -exclaimed Wallace, “are you fellows holding a meeting here tonight or -are you just congregating here to be a nuisance? Answer yes or no and -don’t be flippant about it either.” - -The three boys stared at the new arrival. Jack cried in irritation, -“This has gone about far enough. Arline told me that she was inviting -only me tonight. What are you guys doing here?” - -Wallace held up his package majestically. “Now, Jack, don’t get -excited.” He poked a finger at his friend. “She told me the same -thing,” he assured the doubter. - -“Same here,” echoed Paul. - -“And me, too,” added William. - -“And who else?” demanded Jack. - -The boys shrugged their shoulders and shook their heads. But they were -not to be mystified much longer. Just then, Bobolink marched up. He saw -the boys but it didn’t ruffle him in the least. He nodded to them and -said, “Hello, fellows. Sorry I can’t stop to chew the rag awhile, but I -have an important engagement.” - -“Is that so?” exclaimed William. Grabbing Bobolink by the arm, he held -on to him and informed the last arrival, “So have we all. Just stick -around.” - -Bobolink shrugged his shoulders. “Well,” he said, “if I must, I must.” - -In due time, Bluff and Nuthin’ arrived and joined the crowd. Only Ken -was missing. They decided to wait for him because they had no doubt -he would also turn up. However, a few of the boys became a little -impatient and they decided to ring the bell. Several seconds elapsed -and then the door opened and beautiful Arline Blair came marching out -to the boys on Ken’s arm. The boys were startled, then they began to -hurl all sorts of flippant and good-natured epithets at him. Two of -the boys even started to pummel him in fun. Suddenly a command rang out -“Fall in!” - -The boys fell into formation. Paul approached Arline, saluted her and -said, “Miss Blair, Fox Patrol bids you good evening.” - -The young lady made a bow. “Good evening, boys,” she replied sweetly. - -“And the boys furthermore ask leave to present you with tokens of their -affection.” - -Paul gave her his box of chocolates. Then each, on down the line, -presented her with his gift. When all that was done, Paul sang out his -commands. “Attention! Forward, march!” - -As the boys marched forward to go into the house, Paul took Arline -by the arm and led her away in the opposite direction. When the boys -realized it, they broke formation and ran after him. “Hey, you, come -here,” cried William. - -Arline tilted back her head and laughed merrily. “I’ve never had so -much fun in all my life,” she said. - -“Yes,” complained Jack, “but where’s our fun?” - -“We are coming to that,” she told him. “I wanted to surprise you all.” - -“You certainly did,” William ventured to say. - -“And,” continued the young lady, “if you’ll come in, you’ll find -everything prepared for a most enjoyable party.” - -“Then what are we waiting for?” asked Nuthin’. - -“For no reason that I know of,” replied Arline. “Let’s go in. The -girls—” - -“The girls!” exclaimed each boy separately. - -“You didn’t think that I was going to entertain all you boys by myself, -did you?” - -“No, but—” - -“So I invited my friends to help me. Let’s go in, now.” - -They all entered and in spite of the complications of the half hour -before, they had a most enjoyable evening. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI - -SWIMMING CONTEST - - -For the following two days, the boys practiced swimming assiduously. -They spent most of their hours at the lake and perfected their strokes, -their form, diving, turning, etc. They were in tip top shape and were -confident of the results. Saturday morning all the boys turned out to -help fix up a float, repair the diving board, lay out lanes and make -everything ready for the contest at one-thirty. - -Three people consented to act as judges. Swimming coach Thompson and -Assistant swimming coach Grey of Stanhope High School and a man named -White, who was at one time a national swimming champion. - -The events that had been agreed upon were the hundred yard dash in -which Paul and Nuthin’ were to participate; the two-twenty yard dash in -which Ken and Bluff had been entered; the hundred and sixty yard relay, -with William, Wallace, Bobolink and Jack as the team; and finally a -fancy diving match, with Bobolink as his group’s representative. - -A large crowd turned out to watch the spectacle. The members of the -competing teams mixed together and poked fun at each other, quibbled -over many nothings and thus forgot all their anxiety about the -forthcoming contest. The judges were ready and everything was set when -suddenly an airplane dropped out of the sky. People pointed, waved and -shouted. Attached to the rear end of the plane was a floating banner. -Jack nudged Wallace and asked, “Who do you think is in the plane? Can -you guess?” - -“A turkey to a doughnut it’s Major McCarthy.” - -Several of the boys standing nearby overheard and agreed. Jack said, -“That’s most likely who it is. Can you read what’s on the banner?” - -“Not yet. Wait till he comes down a little lower.” - -The plane descended to an altitude of about five hundred feet. -Everybody began to shout the words on the banner—“GOOD LUCK.” Ted, -standing with Paul, asked, “Wonder whom he is wishing good luck?” - -“Both teams, of course,” answered Paul. - -“He’s a very fine chap—the major is.” - -“You said it,” agreed Paul. “There are not many like him.” - -After circling around overhead for a short while, the pilot waved and -zoomed up into the sky. Several moments later the plane was performing -a “barrel roll,” followed by a “loop the loop.” The spectators waved, -cheered and screamed for more stunts. So the plane stunted some more; -it dived down heading straight for the water, skimmed the surface of -the lake and zoomed away up into the sky again and disappeared. - -At last everything was ready for the contest to begin. The judges -called for the first event, the hundred yard dash. Paul and Nuthin’ -stepped forward. Ted Slavin’s group was to be represented by Ted and -two other boys, Joe and Mac. Nuthin’ was placed in lane one, Mac in -lane two, Ted in lane three, Paul, lane four and Joe, lane five. Coach -Thompson looked the boys over, then called out, “You’re all ready?” - -The boys nodded and said they were. Thompson raised his gun. “Ready!” -he called. - -The boys crouched, each in his lane. “Get set!” - -There was silence everywhere. The boys brought back their arms ready to -dive. But half a second before the pistol went off, Mac, anticipating -the signal, dived. The boys relaxed and waited for Mac to come out of -the water and take the start over. - -“Ready!” called Thompson. Pause. “Get set!” Half a second later the -gun went off and five young men, their arms stretched out in front of -them, flung themselves through space, cut into the water and—they were -off. Ted, tall and lanky, was out front, an inch or two in the lead. -Their legs kicked rhythmically, their arms moved gracefully and with -precision. They skimmed the water like fish. - -The length of the pool was twenty yards and each man had to swim the -pool five times. At the first turn, Ted and Nuthin’ were neck and neck. -Both boys were encouraged and urged on by their comrades and friends. -Paul was only an inch or two behind, followed very closely by Mac and -Joe. That position was maintained throughout the second lap. In the -third lap Paul and Mac started creeping up steadily on the leaders -while Nuthin,’ shot out into the lead, with Ted only an inch behind. -At the turn, a deep sigh went up from the spectators—Nuthin’ missed -his hold and lost enough time in the turn to place him behind with Joe. -It seemed that the race was now to be decided between Ted and Paul. -Ted, however, seemed to manage quite well in keeping his lead and Paul -didn’t seem as though he were gaining any. Nuthin’, though, was in the -meanwhile, gaining with every stroke. At the turn he was neck and neck -with Paul. - -On shore, some people had set up a chant—“Nuthin’! Nuthin’! come on -Nuthin’!” They kept up the chant until the very end of the race. And -Nuthin’ seemed to be responding very well to their call. He was edging -up closer and closer. He was straining every muscle in his body. His -arms and feet were like a well oiled, well regulated machine. Within -five yards to the goal Nuthin’ was neck and neck with Ted. The latter -strained very hard to reach out further. Two yards from the edge of -the pool and Nuthin’ had already crept into the lead. The judges were -bending over, watching very closely for the first touch. The spectators -held their breaths and watched. In an instant the race was over and -the judges were rising to their feet. Somebody shouted, “Ted! Ted, the -winner!” - -Both judges shook their heads and pointed to Nuthin’. William, at the -other end of the pool, screamed, “Nuthin’! Hooray for Nuthin’!” - -Somebody nudged him and remarked, “Stop shouting for nothing; shout for -something.” - -William laughed and roared. “Nuthin’ is something and how!” - -Nuthin’ lay stretched out, with Ted at his side. Breathing hard, Ted -said, “That was a swell race. Never thought you were as good as that, -boy.” - -Paul, squatting nearby, remarked, “Creeping up on us the way he did and -winning the dash—he’s certainly good.” - -“You said it,” agreed Ted. - -The two hundred and twenty yard dash was an all-around disappointment. -Not that it didn’t have its thrills. On the contrary, it had too many -thrills, surprises and shocks, so that the contestants participated -in something that was more than a swimming contest and the spectators -lost interest in the event itself. When the judges called for the -participants to step forth, Ken and Bluff came out as representatives -for their group. For the Ted Slavin team, two boys stepped forth, one -by the name of Walt and the other Cy. The edge of the wooden dock was -wet and therefore slippery. As the boys lined in their respective -lanes, Walt somehow lost his balance and slipped; when he had picked -himself up, he began to hop around painfully. He had twisted his ankle, -and that forced him out of the race. His team had no other man to take -his place and that left only three contestants in the race. - -Coach Thompson finally called, “Get ready!” Pause, “Get set!” The shot -went off and the boys dived. For three laps everything went along -well. The boys glided through the water gracefully. Cy was setting the -pace, with Ken following several inches behind and Bluff bringing up -the rear. On their fourth lap, at about the center of the lane, Bluff -suddenly went down like a rock. People began to scream and shout. Ken, -becoming aware of the commotion on shore, stopped to hear what people -were screaming to him. In the meanwhile, Nuthin’ and Ted who were -sitting at the edge of the float and watching the race, both jumped -into the lake. Nuthin’ dived first and half a minute later came up with -Bluff. Assisted by Ted, the two boys pulled Bluff in. He had suddenly -gotten cramps. - -The race continued with only two contestants now; Cy was in the -lead with Ken fully five yards behind. Ken tried to creep up on his -competitor, but as he increased his pace, so did Cy. The boys kept up -the grind back and forth, back and forth across the pool. At the end -of the seventh lap, Ken had managed to regain about half the distance -he had lost. And he continued to creep up by inches. As the boys were -ending their tenth lap and were approaching for a turn, a little boy -of about six or seven, who had somehow managed to get to the edge -of the pool, leaned over a little too far and tumbled in. The child -fell directly in front of Ken and before many people had realized -what happened the swimmer had fished the boy out, handed him over to -outstretched arms and continued with the race. But by now, Ken had -fallen so far behind that even by his last sprint, he could do no -better than end up a full seven yards behind Cy. The race was ended and -few people were aware of it. - -The next event was the diving, with Bobolink and Ted as the -contestants. Both were fine divers and their form was almost perfect. -Each one was obliged to perform the swan dive, the jackknife and a -third dive of the contestant’s own choosing. After both boys had -performed and had delighted the spectators, the judges conferred but -were unable to come to a decision. The two boys were told to perform -any one fancy dive they chose. Again both contestants performed so -equally that the judges called the contest a draw. - -It was the relay, however, that again raised the spectators’ enthusiasm -to high pitch and set them jumping and howling madly; it had everyone -on his toes following the contest closely. - -William was the lead off man for his team. Coach Thompson called, “On -your mark!” The two boys crouched. “Get set!” They brought their arms -back. The gun went off and William and his competitor flung themselves -through space, their arms stretched out. They cut into the water and -set off in a fast sprint. Each contestant had two laps to go. They -glided through the water, their arms and feet moving rhythmically. -Both boys turned simultaneously and were neck and neck. People shouted -and screamed themselves hoarse; their comrades shouted advice and -encouragement. Gradually, William moved into the lead. As he touched, -he gave Wallace, who followed him, a lead of about three inches. - -The next pair were off. Wallace kept his small margin of a lead with -his competitor sturdily refusing to concede another inch. Wallace, -however, made a poor turn, and placed both boys nose to nose. It even -looked as though the other fellow would gain the lead any second but -Wallace fought it out and both boys touched simultaneously. The third -pair dived and each contestant fought hard for the lead but neither -Bobolink nor his competitor would yield. Stroke for stroke, they glided -through the water gracefully and neither one would yield an inch. At -the turn, it appeared for a second that Bobolink gained an inch or two -on his competitor, but the next moment they were seen gliding along -side by side, nose to nose. The spectators were frantic with excitement -and they encouraged, urged and cajoued, each his favorite, to hurry -up and get into the lead. The two contestants, however, touched -simultaneously. - -Jack was the last man. By the way he dived, flinging his body through -space with a certain impatient fury, it seemed that he was going to -fly across the pool. His competitor, however, was right there at his -side and obstinate in his refusal to be shaken. Jack plowed through the -water at breakneck speed. People wondered how the other hung on and -didn’t yield an inch. The spectators were going wild with enthusiasm; -some of them became hysterical. A babble of voices urged both boys to -get ahead, take the lead. But neither one seemed able to shake the -other fellow. At the turn, however, Jack who was very flexible and -fast, manoeuvered the touch and push off so quickly that he got away -with a lead of several inches. The other fellow saw himself losing out -and sprinted after Jack fast and furious. But the latter would not -yield and steadily he kept his lead, making the final touch a full five -seconds ahead of his competitor. - -People jumped into the air, fell on each other’s necks and screamed -with delight. Ready arms stretched out to help the two boys out of -the water. Smiling, happy, Jack turned to his rival and the two shook -hands. The Slavin group formed a circle and cheered Jack and then -everybody else they could think of. Paul, Jack and the other boys also -formed a circle and returned cheer for cheer. - -The contest was over and a number of people went away. The spectacle, -however, was by no means over. It had been arranged to include several -items on the schedule as pure fun-provoking spectacles. The first such -event was performed on the diving board. Bobolink dressed up in a pair -of balloon pants, and a bonnet on his head; Ted, on the other hand, put -on a bathing suit that was twice his size, his fingers hiding in his -sleeves and the bottoms flopping around his legs, with a life preserver -around his midsection. - -Bobolink appeared first on the board. Shaky and nervous, he walked out -to the edge of the board. Suddenly slipping, he bounced on his back, -went up into the air and came down on his stomach; he tried to grasp -the board, but in vain; up he went again and came down on his head -and then catapulted into the water, swimming through the air. As he -went under water, his bonnet went floating on the surface of the lake. -Coming up again, he retrieved his bonnet and waited for Ted to perform. - -Ted took a running slide across the board and as he came to the edge, -he heeled over, trying not to slide off; clawing the air, he balanced -back and forth, back and forth, appearing as though this moment he was -going into the water head first and the next moment—no. Finally he did -slip off and as he fell through space he managed to grasp a hold on the -board. Like a see-saw, the board went up and down, with Ted trying to -clamber onto the board again. He managed to put his legs around the -board and his fingers slipped and there he was hanging head down. After -performing all sorts of gymnastics with his hands, he fell into the -water head first. And to the great enjoyment of the spectators, Ted -didn’t go fully underwater but got stuck in the water, head, shoulders -and as far as his midsection immersed, while his feet stuck up, kicking -vigorously. Everybody laughed at the sight until tears ran down their -faces. Bobolink swam over and after spinning Ted around several times, -helped him to turn over. Righted again, only half of him was under -water. Bobolink pushed him below the surface several times and the -fellow bobbed up like a spring. It was all the result of the life -preserver around his midsection. - -Two canoes were placed in the water and each contained a tilting pole. -The two contestants, Paul and Cy, were told to swim out and each occupy -a canoe, which the boys did easily enough. However, they were not -supplied with paddles and in order to approach within striking distance -of each other, they were obliged to paddle with their hands. Separated -by a distance of about three or four feet, the boys stood up in their -canoes and poised their poles. But in the meanwhile, Paul’s canoe had -drifted away and Cy called out, “I say, don’t run away. Come back and -defend your honor.” - -“Just you wait a minute,” replied Paul. And he immediately squatted and -with his hands paddled up nearer to his foe. - -The spectators cheered and laughed with glee. They were having as much -fun as the contestants themselves who now crossed poles as a sign that -the battle was on. They thrust at each other but only jabbed the air. -Their canoes drifting apart, both had to sit down and do some paddling -again. Someone on shore shouted, “Get together there, will you? Do -something!” - -Others echoed the cry and urged the contestants on to do something. -Just as soon as they were close enough, both boys jumped up and grabbed -their poles. Cy thrust out and Paul dodged it and poked back; but Cy -caught it on his pole and pushed it away. Again the poles crossed. -Cy’s canoe was drifting away, and he leaned forward a trifle, reaching -out to strike his opponent; instead, Paul pushed his pole into Cy’s -shoulder and the latter plunged into the water. Paul stood up his pole -and thrust out his chest as a sign of victory. The spectators ashore -applauded and cheered him. But just then Cy bobbed out of the water and -tipped Paul’s canoe, throwing him into the water, which caused the -spectators a great deal of amusement. - -The boys were getting dressed in the boat-house. They were jabbering -away a mile a minute. Ted stood up on a bench and called out, -“Everybody attention, please!” - -“Pull him off!” someone shouted. - -“Don’t let him talk!” another added. - -“Hear! Hear!” someone else shouted. - -When all had finally quieted down, Ted began, “A friend of mine—” - -He was interrupted by several voices. One cried, “Who’s she?” - -“What’s her name?” - -“How do you know she’s a friend of yours?” - -“Quiet! Quiet!” - -Ted continued. “As I was saying, a friend of mine has arranged a dance -as a successful completion of today’s events.” - -“Yea!” one of the boys cried. - -“Hooray for your friend!” another shouted. - -“And for Ted!” was added by another boy. - -“Hooray for all of us!” cried Cy. - -Quiet was restored and Ted finished his statement, declaring, “The -dance will be held at eight o’clock, the place—the High School gym, -and you are all not only invited but urged to come.” - -He was applauded, cheered, and thanked for the information. All the -boys promised to come. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII - -MAN CHAINED - - -The boys were in conference. Nuthin’ said, “I still maintain, fellows, -that we ought to call in the police. After all, what can we do? Suppose -that gang uses guns against us, then we’re lost.” - -Paul answered, “As far as their using guns against us, we will have to -risk that. But then, whatever plan we adopt to capture that gang, we’ll -use our brains and make it so they won’t have a chance to use their -guns. As for calling the police, if we do that, it is very likely that -the whole gang will get away. Imagine what the police method would be. -They would remove all the stuff from the cave and then wait around for -the thieves to come and be caught. But they won’t come because it’s -bound to leak out and be given a lot of publicity.” - -“And another thing,” chimed in William, “look at all the fun we’ll be -missing.” - -“But very dangerous fun,” retorted Nuthin’. - -“Your imagination is carrying you away,” interposed Ken. - -Nuthin’ shrugged his shoulders and withdrew his objections. - -Wallace spoke up. “Let’s get down to business,” he said, “and develop -some plan.” - -“Suppose someone suggests something and then we will all chip in,” -remarked Ken. - -The boys nodded and Wallace was the first to offer his opinion. -“According to our information, which is scanty, they are supposed to -return within ten days or two weeks from a week ago Saturday. Now as -far as we are concerned, we have to be there on the spot. That means -that we must prepare to camp there for about a week, and we have to -leave tomorrow.” - -“Is that agreeable to everyone or does anyone have any objections or -want to add something?” asked Paul. - -“Only this,” spoke up Bobolink, “and that’s to keep a constant watch at -the cave.” - -“We’ll come to that when we work out the details,” interrupted Jack. -“For the present, I’m sure that we’re all agreed to the proposal -advanced by Wallace.” - -For the next three hours the boys sat in a group and designed a plan. -Every detail was taken care of and everyone was sure that it would work -out well. - -Very early the following morning, all the eight boys, with full packs -on their backs and wearing their Boy Scout uniforms, marched out of -Stanhope and took the road to the mountain. Wallace pointed out to them -the abandoned farm house, behind which was the road leading to the -mysterious airport. Jack’s immediate suggestion was that they enter and -search it. All the boys eagerly assented and lots were drawn for the -two who would enter the house, two who would search the yard and barn -while the others were to deploy and be on the watch. Paul and Wallace -won the chance to enter the house, while Ken and Jack were to explore -the yard and barn. - -The boys withdrew from the road and put all their packs together, -with Bluff to watch over them. William was stationed at one point to -carefully watch the main road; he himself was to keep in hiding and not -to be seen. Bobolink was directed to watch the back of the house and -Nuthin’ was told to walk back on the road about a quarter of a mile and -to watch for any suspicious characters and keep a general lookout. - -Paul and Wallace approached the house silently, carefully, examining -the exterior of the house with each step. Circling the house, they -found that several of the windows were broken and nailed with boards. -As a whole, the house was not in bad condition and was habitable. -Several signs led them to believe that the house had been used on -and off recently. Paul pointed to a number of footprints that did not -appear to be very old; Wallace spied a banana peel which could not have -been more than about ten days or two weeks old. At the back of the -house the boys came across pieces that appeared to have been chopped in -the recent past. Turning to his friend, Wallace remarked, “Looks like -they used this place all right.” - -“Yes,” agreed Paul. “And I think that we’ll most likely find a lot of -interesting things inside.” - -The boys approached the front door and Paul tried the knob. It wouldn’t -open. The boys tugged and pushed but the door held fast. “What are we -going to do,” asked Paul, “break in the door?” - -“No. Let’s pry away the boards from one of the windows and gain -entrance that way.” - -Paul agreed. At one of the side windows Wallace used his hatchet and -pried away three boards giving them enough room to climb through. -Wallace was the first to tumble in and Paul quickly followed. With -the help of their searchlights, they examined the room. It was very -dusty, with cobwebs and several broken chairs strewn about the floor; -otherwise the room was completely empty. Paul whispered, “Well, there’s -nothing much here, so let’s move on.” - -The floor squeaked as they tiptoed to the door. There was no knob and -the door stuck tightly. Wallace used his hatchet and pried it open. The -boys stepped into a large foyer. To one side were the stairs leading to -the flight above, and across the hall were two doors. They approached -the nearest door and endeavored to push it open; it stuck fast. Pulling -and tugging, the knob broke loose. Rather than break in, Paul suggested -that they try the second door first. The boys entered into a kitchen. -On one side was a coal stove and an oil burner; against the window was -a table with several dirty dishes; a couple of chairs stood by. While -Paul examined the closets, Wallace struck a match and tried the oil -burner. It burned and that revealed that it had been in recent use. -In the closet, Paul found odds and ends of crockery, rags and several -pieces of old clothing. - -From the kitchen, a swinging door led into the next room—the room -the boys could not enter from without. There they saw two open cots -with blankets and pillows. A third cot, folded, stood near by. In the -middle of the room were a large, round table and four chairs. On the -table lay several used candles, a couple of small liquor glasses stood -nearby and an empty whiskey bottle. There were some rags and pieces of -clothing strewn about. The boys wheeled around on their heels slowly, -examining the room closely. Paul spied an overcoat lying in a heap in a -corner. He tiptoed slowly across the room and picked it up; very dusty, -still it looked like a good coat. He put his hand into the pocket and -his fingers touched a cold and hard object. It was an automatic. He -whispered across the room to his friend. Paul snapped open the magazine -and found it loaded. Pushing back the safety cap, he put the gun into -his pocket. Again he picked up the coat and in the second pocket found -a box of cartridges. Whispering across the room, the boys decided to -appropriate the automatic and cartridges. Walking silently over to join -his friend in front of the fireplace, Paul passed a hand over his brow -and whispered anxiously, “We’re in the gang’s hangout all right. And I -hate to think what would happen to us if we were caught.” - -“It would be just too bad,” answered Wallace. “But it’s too late to -withdraw now.” - -“Yes. But I’m beginning to think that Nuthin’ was right. We should have -called in the police.” - -“Too late,” repeated Wallace. “We’ll have to make the best of it.” - -Coming out into the hall, the boys mounted the stairs, Paul leading -and Wallace following. At the head of the stairs they stopped to look -around. There were two doors to their left. No attic. Paul tried the -first door. It held fast. Pushing and tugging didn’t seem to help. -Wallace whispered, “Let’s try the next door.” - -The next door swung open at the mere touch of Paul’s hand. Entering, -they found the room very dusty but entirely empty. There was a single -closet; opening it, that too was found to be empty. They returned -to the hall. Wallace whispered, “You think we ought to break in -there?”—meaning the first door they tried but found locked or nailed. - -Paul shrugged his shoulders. “I don’t know. What do you think? Is it -worth the trouble?” - -“You really can’t tell. From the looks of things, it seems as though -they don’t use this floor.” - -“Then why should the door be locked?” - -“I can’t say. Let’s break in, so we won’t have any regrets.” - -Wallace set to with his hatchet. Paul cautioned him to make less noise. -But it was necessary to do a lot of chopping before the door would -open. Wallace swung the door open and remained at the threshhold. -Wallace gasped and Paul quickly reached into his pocket for the gun. -They stepped into the room. Sprawled over on the floor was a man -chained to a chair. Quickly glancing about to see if anyone else was -in the room, they then hurried to pick up man and chair. Upright, the -man’s head hung down and had every appearance of being dead. Paul put -his ear to the man’s heart, listened closely for several seconds and -then whispered, “Still alive.” - -“Wonder who he is?” asked Wallace. - -“Let’s first set him free.” - -The man was chained hands and feet and then the chain ran several times -around his body and the chair and both ends of the chain were held fast -by a lock. Trying to break the lock was found to be futile. So Paul -attacked one of the links with the hatchet. After removing the chains, -they stretched the man out on the floor. Paul made a quick search -through his coat pockets. From the right one the boy brought out a -badge. Wallace craned his neck to see. It was a government agent badge. - -“Do you think he is a real government agent?” whispered Wallace. - -“Must be.” - -“What’ll we do?” - -“Take him out of here. Quickly. He needs air and medical treatment.” - -Wallace grabbed the man’s legs and Paul took him under the arms. Thus -they carried him downstairs. At the window, Paul said, “We’ll lay him -down here for a while. You go and call a couple of the boys.” - -He jumped through the window. Hesitating for a moment undecided which -way to turn and whom to call, he put his fingers between his lips and -sent out a low, shrill whistle. Dropping behind a clump of bushes, he -lay there waiting, watching. In about a minute he noticed Ken and Jack -appear from somewhere in the rear of the farm yard. They stayed close -together and sneaked along from tree to tree. From the expression on -their faces Wallace could tell that they were in a quandary as to where -the whistle came from. He exposed himself and waved to them. They came -on the run. “What’s the matter?” demanded Jack. - -“Anything wrong?”—that from Ken. - -Wallace waved away their questions and instructed them to wait under -the window. He clambered in. The man now had his eyes open and made an -effort to move his lips. Paul and Wallace picked him up and handed him -out through the window. Jack and Ken gasped. Paul cautioned them. “Be -careful. Hold on.” - -Outside, Paul instructed Wallace to nail up the window again, while -the three of them would take the man to the other side of the road, to -where Bluff and their knapsacks were. That accomplished, Bluff was sent -out to call in the other boys. - -They stretched out a blanket on the grass and with another blanket for -a pillow, they made the man comfortable. Paul moistened his lips with -water and let him swallow a couple of mouthsful. After which the man -fell into a doze. - -Nuthin’ added, “He certainly needs medical attention.” - -Jack shook his head. “I don’t think there is anything wrong with him -organically,” he said. “He must have gone without food for a long time -and that weakened him. Also the fact that he was tied to that chair.” - -“Perhaps he wouldn’t want us to get a doctor because a doctor would -have to notify the police. And he may not want that.” - -Paul spoke up. He said, “One of us should run back to the nearest -grocery to buy a bottle of fresh milk, several cans of fruit juice and -some fresh fruit and vegetables.” - -“I w-will g-go,” offered Bluff. - -Paul cautioned him. “Make believe that you’re hiking by yourself and -don’t answer any questions.” - -Bluff nodded and was off. The boys sat down in a circle and Paul said, -“Now we’ll hear what the result of your exploration has been, Jack and -Ken. Which one of you is going to do the talking?” - -“There’s really nothing to tell,” spoke up Jack. “We found nothing -suspicious nor unusual.” - -“Was the barn just plain empty?” questioned William. - -“Yes,” replied Ken, “except for a few sticks and stones.” - -“How about the yard?” asked Bobolink. - -“We searched thoroughly but we didn’t come across a thing.” - -Pause. Silence. Finally Jack said, “Suppose you now tell us all the -other things you found in the house.” - -Between them, Paul and Wallace related their entire experiences, not -omitting any detail. He took out and showed the automatic and the box -of cartridges. By the time the narrative was completed, Bluff had -returned. Warming up a glass of milk, Paul fed it to the stricken man, -a little at a time. Revived, he smiled and opened his lips to speak but -Paul cautioned him not to exert any effort and just to rest. He lay -down again and fell asleep. About two hours later he awoke and Paul -fed him a cup of pineapple juice and a soft boiled egg. The man seemed -to regain his strength rapidly. He was now fully able to speak but he -uttered only a few words. “Thank you,” he said. “I will now rest a -little longer.” - -Toward afternoon, the agent recovered sufficiently to sit up and -declaim his hunger. But on the recommendation of Paul, to which he -agreed, he was given only warm milk and again a soft boiled egg on -toast. As he ate, the boys gathered around and watched him. When he -had finished his meal, he sat quietly for a short while, passing his -hand over his several days growth of beard and laughing in his throat. -Finally he spoke, his voice throaty and rusty. He asked, “Do you -fellows mind telling me how you came to be in that house?” - -The boys shut their mouths and kept quiet. The embarrassing silence -lasted for about a minute. At last Paul replied, “Don’t you think, sir, -that it is really your task to explain to us how you came to be in the -condition in which we found you? We are Boy Scouts and by our treatment -of you, it is evident that we are friends and mean you no harm.” - -The man stroked his chin and hesitated. He let his sharp eyes roam from -one silent boy to another, judging them, evaluating their characters. -Wallace held out the badge they had found on him and asked, “Is this -yours, sir?” - -He glanced at it, nodded, took it and dropped it in his pocket. “Thank -you,” he muttered. He still seemed to hesitate. Finally he spoke, low -and throaty. “My name is Tom Woods and I want to thank you boys for -saving my life. Another day and I would have passed out.” - -“How long have you been a prisoner there?” questioned Jack. - -“What day is this?” - -“Monday.” - -He thought for a moment. “Since Saturday morning,” he replied. - -“Do you know if the gang is coming back for you?” Ken asked. - -The agent shrugged his shoulders. “I really don’t know. But I imagine -that they were going to let me rot there until doomsday.” He again let -his eyes roam from one face to another. “I was in luck to have you boys -find me. Once more, I thank you. You saved my life and I hope that -someday I shall be able to repay the debt.” - -Wallace leaned over and whispered something to Paul who nodded. For -several seconds the boys waited for the man to speak, but he kept his -mouth tightly shut. Wallace whispered, “Mr. Woods, did you know that -they are scheduled to make a shipment one of these days?” - -Though the question had been in a low whisper, the agent had caught -every syllable; at the word “shipment” he winced, but so imperceptibly -that only three of the boys had noticed it. He smiled wanly. He -confessed. “I am a government agent. It appears that you boys have -information—valuable information—which I desire.” He paused and -stroked his chin. “It’s only fair then, I guess, that I tell you how I -came to be chained to that chair in the farm house—a most inconvenient -situation.” And he laughed in his throat. “I have been on this case for -several months. I suppose you know that we are dealing with a gang of -arms smugglers?” He put the statement in the form of a question and he -noticed that several of the boys nodded, which was the clue he wanted. - -“Well,” he continued, speaking low, almost in a whisper, “There really -isn’t much to tell. I happened to come upon their hangout—an apartment -in the city. Keeping a steady watch for several days, I learned their -movements. One night, I watched them leave their apartment one by one -and I decided to go up and investigate. I got in all right, but two -of their comrades whom I had never seen leave or enter the building, -were there to greet me. After that, things happened so fast I still -find it difficult to recall all the details. At any rate, the next -thing I knew, I was lying on the floor of a car traveling at a good -rate of speed. I made believe that I was still unconscious and listened -to their talk, but they said nothing to give away their secrets. -Eventually they brought me to this farm house and chained me to the -chair. The rest you know already.” - -The boys stared at him in astonishment and silence prevailed for a -short while. Finally he said, “Now it’s your turn to tell me all you -know. I’m under the impression that you boys have a great deal of -valuable information.” - -The fellows looked at one another and kept quiet. They left it to Paul -to do all the talking and tell as little or as much as he felt would -be advisable. Paul, however, saw no reason for withholding any details -of the information and he told all. As he progressed in his narrative, -Tom Woods gasped with surprise several times. He listened attentively, -wrinkling his brow and his jaw set as he did so. When the story was at -last completely told, he confessed his amazement. For a short while he -kept perfectly silent and concentrating on some plan he had in mind. He -asked, “What time is it now?” - -“Almost three o’clock,” answered William. - -“How far away is this camping ground you were heading for?” - -“Close to ten miles,” he was told. - -The government agent shook his head. He suggested, “The first thing -we ought to do right now is to find a camping spot. I don’t think I’m -strong enough yet to walk ten miles. Tomorrow, maybe, but not today. -However, would you boys object if we found some spot about a mile or -two from here and pitched camp?” - -“I don’t think so,” replied Paul and turned to the boys for affirmation. - -“Then we’ll do that,” Woods said, “and then we will devise a complete -plan of action. You boys know so much and are so familiar with the -surroundings that I shall have to include you in all my plans to -capture the gang.” - -The boys immediately set off. Tom Woods accompanied by Wallace followed -at a slower pace. They found a good spot and pitched camp. After -supper, the boys gathered around the camp fire and together with the -agent devised a plan of action for the next few days. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII - -THE TRAP - - -The following morning the boys rose early. They had had a refreshing -and restful sleep and they were now ready and eager to carry out their -plan. William supervised the preparation of breakfast and each one of -them had a hearty and satisfactory meal. Tom Woods, too, had by now -sufficiently recovered to have a full meal. He even declaimed that -he now felt as well as ever. But the shadows under his eyes and the -paleness of his skin told a silent story of horrible torture. - -The agent rose to his feet and stretched himself. He called Paul over -and asked, “Do you mind lending that automatic of yours? And also the -cartridges. I may have to use them.” - -Paul surrendered the pistol and ammunition. Several minutes later, -Wallace called out, “I’m ready, Mr. Woods, if you are.” - -“I’m also ready, so let’s go.” - -Wallace shouldered his knapsack and waving goodbye to the other boys -who were busy breaking camp, he and the agent set off. As for the rest -of the group, just as soon as everything was ready, they set off -for their destination—their old camp ground, which they reached at -about noon. After a fifteen minute rest, lunch was prepared. Paul then -declared a thirty minute rest period, adding, “We have a lot of hard -work ahead of us which must be accomplished before nightfall. So relax, -then we will get to work.” - -Ken was left behind to keep guard at camp and put it into order. The -other boys set off, with the cave their destination. When they got -there, Bobolink and Nuthin’ were stationed at strategic points to keep -a careful watch. Paul, Jack and William hid in the shrubbery. Paul -picked up several light stones and threw them at the door of the cave. -Some moments passed. The boys, anxious and determined, breathed hard. -Jack crept forward on his hands and knees and moving so that the door -would act as a shield, he slowly and quietly opened the door wide. -There was no one in the front compartment of the cave and the door -was closed. Jack crept back into hiding and now Paul and William rose -to their feet and stole quietly away. The two boys crossed the stream -and came upon the shrubbery-hidden opening that led to the back of the -cave. Paul crept in; William kept guard. In a short while Paul came -out. “How does it look inside?” William asked. - -“The place is just full of wooden cases and boxes. They must have been -here very recently and we missed them.” - -“That’s nothing. Since they have their baggage here yet, they will come -back. If not today, then tomorrow or the next day. In the meanwhile, -I’m going back to give Jack the word. Is that all right?” - -“Yes. If you two get through with your job first, come and give me a -hand.” - -“Very well.” - -William disappeared and Paul set to work. Jack was waiting for William -to return and just as soon as he did, the two boys got busy in front -of and around the cave. They worked arduously and quickly. Finally the -boys were done and without hesitating or wasting a minute, they set out -to help Paul whom they met on the way. “You have everything finished?” -the latter asked. - -The boys nodded. “And you?” queried William. - -“All done.” - -“Good.” - -The boys returned to their camp. It was already dark when William -appeared. “Well, did anything happen?” - -“Nothing,” he replied. “And here?” - -“Nothing.” - -Early the following morning, Jack left camp. He walked at a steady -rapid pace and in about three hours he arrived at the farm house. -Wallace had told him that Tom Woods would meet him there. He searched -for some sign of the agent and finding none, he entered the yard and -crept stealthily along, aiming for a position which would keep him -in hiding while he had a good view of the road and most of the yard. -He gained his goal and stretched himself out on the ground, prepared -to wait until the agent showed up. Suddenly he felt the presence of -someone close to him. He bounded up from the earth, but Tom Woods -grabbed him and pulled him down again. The man laughed. “It’s all -right, boy,” he whispered. - -“Whew! You certainly scared me, Mr. Woods!” Jack exclaimed, heaving a -sigh of relief. - -“Just a little foolish playfulness on my part,” the agent stated. -“What’s the news from camp?” - -“Nothing happened. The boys did everything they were supposed to and -everything is ready to greet the gang.” - -“That’s good. I have a faint suspicion that we won’t have to wait for -them long either.” - -“You think they’ll come today?” - -“Most likely. Though I wouldn’t swear to it. Nothing is certain, you -know.” - -They lay there side by side and conversed in very low whispers. Woods -questioned the boy about his home, his activities, his friends and -all sorts of little details about his life. In return he told many -anecdotes of his experiences. He possessed a very fine sense of humor -and he twisted every story he told into a humorous narrative. He had -Jack giggling most of the time. - -It turned out that Tom Woods was wrong and nothing happened that day. -Towards nightfall, he instructed Jack to return to camp, tell the -boys to be ever on the watch and have Wallace come down the following -morning. It was quite dark when he reached camp and he was so tired -that after a sandwich he turned in for the night. - -Wallace rose with the dawn and wasted no time getting set for his hike -down the mountain. When he arrived at the farm house, Tom Woods played -the same trick on him as he did on Jack. Side by side, the two lay in -hiding and waited. “What did the boys do yesterday?” asked the agent. - -“They kept watch all day long but nothing happened.” - -“It will today,” asserted Woods. - -All day long they lay in hiding and waited. It appeared as though Tom -Woods was wrong again. But that did not despair him. He continued -telling his humorous anecdotes and kept himself and his companion -cheerful. The sun swung across the horizon. Noon came and passed. -The hours dragged along. Towards five o’clock, the government agent -suddenly broke off in the middle of a sentence; he became very -alert. Wallace felt a cold chill run down his spine. Woods hurriedly -whispered, “Don’t get excited. Stay under cover until I tell you -otherwise.” - -A car swung slowly in from the road into the yard. Behind the farm -house, it stopped. Wallace whispered to his companion, “The one at the -wheel—Bud, the stranger.” - -Woods nodded. He held the automatic ready. As the car stopped, Bud -jumped out and called back over his shoulder, “Just want to take a look -around. It’ll take me only a minute.” - -The agent crept away. Silently he tiptoed from behind the car. Coming -close, he hissed. “One move or sound and you’re dead. Put up your -hands.” - -The gangster raised his hands above his head and moved to step out of -the car. As he did so, he made a quick, wild move for his pocket. Woods -swung, hitting the gangster an awful wallop on the chin with the butt -end of his gun. The gangster let out a yell as he went down in a heap. -The agent quickly crawled behind the car. Bud came running from around -the corner of the house and hid himself behind a tree. He waited. -Woods also crouched and waited, but became impatient and fired across -the top of the car. No answer. - -Wallace was still lying in the same position and eagerly watched the -proceedings. He was anxious and excited. He wondered what he could do -to help but he realized that for the present the best he could do was -to keep out of the way and let the two fight it out. One of them, he -thought, would surely never leave that yard alive. He only hoped that -everything would come out for the best. - -Bud stretched himself out on the ground and began to shoot wildly, -combing the ground. A pause came as the gangster took time out to -reload his gun. Tom Woods took the opportunity to make a dash of -several yards and throw himself behind a pile of logs which he had set -up for the occasion. He shifted his position for two reasons: one was -that the car did not offer a good enough barricade and secondly to draw -the firing away from the direction where Wallace was hiding. - -A fraction of a second after he threw himself behind the barricade, -a bullet buried itself in one of the logs. The agent answered it by -sending a bullet that just skimmed the bark of the tree. Tom Woods -waited. He was in a better position than his enemy. Safe behind his -barricade, he also had an open view of the yard and gate and he could -not be taken unawares by anyone coming from that direction. Of course, -he might be surprised by someone coming from the mountain, but that -was unlikely because he could, without endangering himself, frequently -turn his head, and scan the outlying woods and farmland. On the other -hand, Bud was in a precarious position. He had only one alternative and -that was to flee. But to leave his safe position behind the tree was to -invite a bullet from Tom Woods’ gun, which might be fatal. So he also -settled down to watchful waiting. Now while the agent was in no hurry -and had plenty of time, the gangster was anxious and in a hurry to get -to the cave. Without doubt, the government agent had the advantage. - -In the meanwhile, Wallace wondered what he could do to help end the -situation quickly in favor of his friend. After Tom Woods took up his -new position, he felt that Bud’s attention would be entirely taken up -by the agent and that he was free to move away from his spot. Crawling -on his belly, he moved slowly and gradually. Finally he came to a -position that placed him to the rear and to left of the gangster. He -picked out a good-sized stone and, rising on his knees, took careful -aim and hurled the missile. Then he fell quickly under cover. - -The stone missed its objective and bounced off the tree. However, it -attracted Bud’s attention. The gangster turned quickly and fired twice -in the direction from which he thought the stone came. In doing that, -however, he exposed his arm up to his elbow. The next instant he let -out a most horrible scream. The agent had sent a bullet through the -gangster’s wrist. The pain was real but the intensity of the yell was -a foil. The gangster bounded forward to recover his weapon which had -fallen out of his hand. The next moment he uttered a deep cry and -toppled over. A bullet from Woods’ gun had pierced his throat. - -Suddenly everything was silent again. There was a long pause. Tom Woods -lay behind his barricade and waited, while Wallace, in his hiding -place, also did not move. When he thought it was all right, the agent -came out from behind his shelter and called for Wallace to come forward -but to be careful. First they attended the gangster who was knocked out -by Tom Woods. The stricken man, at the first touch, moaned. The agent -put his hand to the man’s jaw and the gangster bounded up as if he had -been struck by an electric shock. Wallace whispered, “You must have -cracked his jaw when you hit him.” - -“Guess so. Give me a hand and we’ll carry him to the barn.” - -Bud, lifeless now, was also carried to the barn. Removing the clothes -of the two gangsters, the agent and Wallace donned them. Wallace looked -a little ridiculous in his outfit but his companion fixed him up so -that he looked all right. Finally, they tied up the wounded man so that -he couldn’t escape, and tied a handkerchief over his mouth so that he -could not cry out. The two came out of the barn. The agent held one of -the automatics used by the gangsters and said, “Here, you had better -take it boy. It may come in handy later.” - -Wallace hesitated but finally he took it and put it into his pocket. -They walked over to the car. All the windows were shattered and one -tire was flat. Wallace said, “A couple of holes in the gas tank.” - -Woods looked and then remarked, “We can plug the holes up; they are not -at the bottom of the tank which is something to be thankful for. And we -will have enough gas in there to make the ten miles.” - -The two of them set to work. Under the front seat they found tools with -which to remove the flat tire and put on the spare. Getting into the -car, the agent started it up and they were off. Wallace showed him the -road and Woods hurried to get to the cave. After a while, he laughed -and asked, “Well, how did you enjoy the little shooting match?” - -“I can’t say that I particularly enjoyed it. It’s too bad that Bud was -killed.” - -“I guess you’re right, boy. I don’t enjoy killing anyone either. But -sometimes it just can’t be helped.” - -“I guess that’s true, Mr. Woods. But it is too bad that it ever has to -be done.” - -“Well, when we get a better social system in which men and women will -have no reason to be dishonest then there won’t be any shooting of -anyone, I guess.” - -Wallace had nothing to say, so he kept quiet. After a while, the -government agent said, “When you come to think of it, you had more to -do with the death of that gangster than I did.” - -“How do you mean?” questioned Wallace anxiously. - -“You threw the stone and forced him to expose himself.” - -“Yes, but you did the shooting.” - -“Of course, but—well, never mind. Let’s talk of something else.” - -They rode along, the agent telling a cheerful anecdote while Wallace -listened. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX - -AT THE CAVE AGAIN - - -By the time all the boys had washed and dressed, William had breakfast -ready. Most of them were tense and impatient, but on the whole, they -felt good. Leaving Jack behind to keep guard at the camp and clean up -the dishes in the meanwhile, the boys set out for the cave. At their -destination, the boys separated, each going to his station where he lay -in hiding and watched. As the hours passed slowly and wearily, most of -the boys became a little cranky and impatient. Paul decided to go from -boy to boy, talk to him for a while and try to calm him. - -At noon, Bluff was sent back to camp and Jack returned with sandwiches -he had prepared and canteens of ice cold water from the stream. Paul -went to each boy in turn and passed out the sandwiches and a drink of -water. And again it became a matter of watchful and patient waiting. -Jack, lying close to Paul, asked, “You think they’ll come today?” - -“It’s hard to tell. But they are about due.” - -“Mr. Woods thinks that they will surely appear today.” Pause. Deadly -silence except for the breeze fluttering through the branches and -leaves. “You know,” Jack added, “this is getting on my nerves already. -I’d like to see it come off and be through with it.” - -“Patience, Jack,” his friend continued, “you can’t hurry a situation -like this.” - -Paul moved away and went to keep someone else company for a while. - -At about six o’clock, Jack, who was watching the road, was suddenly -brought out of his lethargic position. Sprawling on the ground, he -thought he heard the sound of a motor. Putting his ear to the earth, he -listened for some moments to the rumbling sounds that came to his ear. -The car was several hundred yards away yet when he spied it. Quickly -and noiselessly, he picked himself up and sprinted away. He came upon -Paul and told him the news. Not hesitating in the least, Paul told him -where to take up his position and what to do. Then Paul ran on and -passed the word for all of them to be on the alert. - -Paul returned and took his place beside Jack. As they waited, every -second seemed to stretch out into an hour. Those who were in the -car—whoever they were—were apparently in no hurry. Finally, after -what seemed an endless wait, Paul nudged Jack and pointed out two -moving figures. Holding their breaths, they watched and waited. The -boys were quite positive that the moving figures would head for -the clearing and cross it. Then they were greeted by a surprise—a -shocking surprise—that awaited them. But they were disappointed. Jack -whispered, “They’re heading this way.” - -“Yes. You think they have any suspicion of what’s awaiting them?” - -“I don’t think it matters. Our plan takes care of anything that might -be different than we expect.” - -The boys kept quiet. Two figures passed within five feet of them. Jack -began to fidget as the figures were passing. Paul had a hard time -controlling him, keeping him from talking. As the two men passed, Jack -whispered, “There’s something familiar about the fellow in the lead; -something about his walk.” - -“I was just going to say the same.” - -The boys held their breaths. As the two men approached one of the -traps, they stopped. Some whispering went on between them, as though -one was explaining something to the other. A minute later, the one who -had been doing all the explaining, put his fingers between his lips and -gave a low, shrill whistle. Jack wanted to jump up and run over. “The -one who whistled is Wallace,” he whispered as Paul held him. - -“Most likely is, but let’s wait and make sure.” - -There was a pause of a minute or so. Again the man whistled, then -they both waved handkerchiefs. Paul and Jack then came out of hiding -as they finally recognized Tom Woods and Wallace. Jack was sent to -notify the other boys and to instruct them to continue their watch. In -the meanwhile, the three of them withdrew to take counsel together. -The government agent said, “You boys have it all fixed up here. A man -couldn’t get away to save his life. I think you have done marvelously -well.” - -Paul smiled. “We have laid our plans very carefully,” he answered, “and -we hope everything will come off all right.” - -“I hope so too.” - -Just then an airplane fell out of the sky and dived straight for the -ground. Straightening out at about five hundred feet up, the plane -circled the field several times. Wallace whispered, “That’s the same -plane we told you about. We saw it land here once before. I remember it -well.” - -Tom Woods barked, “Keep quiet now and don’t move; we may be seen from -above.” - -“No chance of that, sir,” answered Paul. “From up above they can’t see -a thing except the top of the trees. We had better hurry and take our -positions before they land.” - -With Paul in the lead, the three of them sprinted from cover to cover -and took their positions. At the last moment the government agent -told the boys to hurry and move away somewhere else—take some other -position. If there was any shooting, he didn’t want them to be in line -of fire. - -The boys moved off. The plane in the meanwhile had glided down to a -landing. It was quite a large, powerful ship with a double motor. -Two men jumped to the ground. The one in the lead was recognized by -the boys as the Chief. Very unconcernedly, the two walked across the -clearing and headed directly for the cave. As they came to the edge of -the woods, the chief, for no reason and without any provocation as far -as it could be determined, whipped a gun out of his pocket and fired -across the top of the cave. Tom Woods, who thought that he was firing -at one of the boys, sent a bullet whistling past their heads. The -trap which the boys had laboriously prepared and set was now a futile -gesture. Whereas if they had walked into the trap as set, there would -have been no bloodshed; now it seemed inevitable. - -The two gangsters now dropped to the ground and sent bullets whistling -in a semi-circle. To rise and dash back to their plane was suicide. -They would be in the open, a clear and perfect target for Tom Woods’ -bullets. On the other hand, dropping to the ground and taking shelter -where they did, they forestalled being surrounded by the boys. As for -the government agent, there was nothing he could do to obtain a more -advantageous position. Of course, he could have one of the boys keep up -a withering fire while he crept to their side or their rear. But he was -against risking the life of any one of the boys. - -For a while only occasional shots were exchanged. Suddenly Tom became -aware that the two gangsters had devised a means of escape, if not -for both, at least for one of them. The two were separating, moving -further apart slowly and gradually. The agent realized that their plan -was to separate a certain distance, so that one of them would keep -him occupied while the other crept back to the plane. It was a clever -and subtle plan and from every indication it appeared that they would -succeed. They were also most probably aware that only one man faced -them. Under that condition, there was nothing Tom could do that would -prevent the one who got back to the plane from returning with help. Or -possibly he might bring out of the plane a machine gun, and that would -be enough to wipe him out. He became really worried. What could he do -to prevent one of them from reaching the plane. - -He determined that as long as it was possible for him to do so, he -would fire alternately at both racketeers and occupy both of them. He -also wondered what the boys were doing. “But,” he thought to himself, -“I had better keep from thinking of anything else and concentrate my -attention on those two gangsters. I’m positive the boys will be able to -take care of themselves.” - -Tom noticed that slowly and gradually the gangster on his right was -moving backwards, and each time he fired at the moving form, he was -answered by the second man, the one on his left. The spasmodic shooting -kept up for almost half an hour. Suddenly there was heard the roar -of the airplane motor; in an instant, the machine was turning into -the wind and taxiing for a take-off. Both Tom Woods as well as the -gangsters were so surprised that they almost forgot each other. As the -plane was still taxiing across the field, one of the racketeers sent -a couple of ineffective bullets after the machine; but the shots did -no harm. The plane rose off the ground easily. Tom rationalized to -himself, “Whoever it was that escaped with the plane, couldn’t be a -friend of theirs, or he wouldn’t have fired at it.” - -Tom’s ammunition was running low and he could answer only one shot -to his enemy’s three or four. Five or ten minutes after the plane had -gotten away, he was again astounded to realize that someone was firing -at the gangsters from their rear. “Must be Wallace,” he thought to -himself. - -And so it was. Paul and he had withdrawn at the behest of Tom Woods. -Eagerly they watched the battle. Several times Wallace wanted to use -the gun the government agent had given him but Paul held him back. -They, too, soon became aware of the manoeuver of the two gangsters to -permit one of them to return to the plane. Cautioning Wallace on how -to behave himself and what to do, Paul crept away and was soon out of -sight. A short while later Wallace heard the roar of the motor and -he heaved a sigh of relief as he watched the plane take off. He was -positive that one of his comrades was escaping with the plane, though -he couldn’t imagine who. As for himself, now was the time to act, he -thought; the two were trapped. Moving closer to the edge of the woods -and picking out a sound shelter and one that placed him well to the -rear of the gangsters, he aimed carefully and fired his first shot. - -Now to return to Tom Woods, the government agent. Realizing that -someone was attacking from the rear, perhaps it was Wallace or maybe -Paul, he tried to trick the gangsters into surrendering, “You better -throw down your guns and surrender, you two,” he called out. “That was -the signal that my men have arrived. You can’t get away now.” - -“We’ll give you hell first,” cried the chief. - -“Very well, then,” returned the agent. “I’ll count three. If you don’t -surrender, I’ll give my men the signal to blast you to hell. One!” - -The smugglers answered with a volley of shots. “Two!” cried Tom. - -The gangsters withheld their fire. They waited. “Three!” The word -echoed through the stillness of the woods. - -“Go to hell!” answered the chief. “How the devil did you ever break -your chains and escape, you flatfoot?” - -“Wouldn’t you like to know?” countered Tom. - -“Yes, tell me.” - -“When I have you in jail. Then I’ll pay you a visit and tell you all -about it.” - -“I should have cut your throat instead of merely chaining you.” - -“Why didn’t you? Soft-hearted or something?” - -The chief answered with his gun. Tom raised his voice and cried, loud -enough to be heard a mile away, “All right! Shoot to kill.” - -He had two guns and he shot from both of them as quickly as he could -pull the trigger. Wallace, who heard him, took the cue and also emptied -his revolver. The effect was that the two smugglers seemed to be -attacked on all sides. - -Silence ensued, suddenly broken by a shot coming from a third -direction. A piercing cry cut short the echo of the bullet. The chief -bounded up from the ground and then fell back again, dead. Tom wondered -who it was that had shot. He took advantage of it, however, and called -out, “Hey, Smoky, do you want to give up or do you want to join your -chief?” - -There was a pause. Smoky answered, “I want to give up. Tell your men -not to fire.” - -Tom cried out, “Hold your fire!” To the gangster, he said, “Now, drop -your gun and stand up.” The smuggler complied. “Raise your hands above -your head. Now turn around. You make one move and you’ll go home in a -box.” - -Smoky complied willingly. The government agent dashed from one cover -to another, his gun ready for action should the smuggler change his -mind. Finally, stepping forward softly, he came up behind the gangster. -Taking a short piece of rope that he carried in his pocket, the agent -tied the smuggler’s hands behind his back. Just then Wallace stepped -forth out of the woods, and handed Tom several yards of sturdy rope -which the agent used to tie the smuggler’s hands and feet. That done, -he turned to the boy and said, “I think it’s all right now to get the -boys together.” - -Wallace nodded. He whistled three times and the boys crept like shadows -through the woods. They met in front of the cave. The government agent -looked at the boys, their expressions still set and determined and -their eyes full of wonder and anxiety. He laughed. “Everything is all -right now, boys. You may relax.” He turned to Paul and asked, “Where -did you get that rifle?” - -Paul scrutinized his weapon. “Inside the cave,” he answered. “Bullets -too.” - -“And you were the one that shot the chief?” - -Paul looked away embarrassed. “I was terribly surprised to see him -topple over. Because I didn’t even aim at him.” - -The boys and the government agent joined in laughing heartily. “So!” -Tom muttered, twisting the words into a humorous expression, “You don’t -aim but you hit the bull’s eye just the same!” - -Their laughter was interrupted by the roar of an airplane overhead. -They watched the machine lose altitude gradually and continually circle -around and around. When it was at about a thousand feet, Wallace -exclaimed, “It’s the same machine.” - -“Who escaped with the plane, by the way?” asked Tom Woods. - -The boys looked at each other. “Who is missing?” asked Paul. - -“William.” - -“Jack.” - -“Anyone else?” - -“Bluff, but he’s at camp.” - -“Then it must have been William and Jack who are in the plane,” Paul -stated. - -“Then you had better wave to them. Signal them to land,” said the agent. - -They all ran to the clearing and waved. As the huge machine showed that -it was going to land, all of them retreated, so that the plane might -have a perfectly clear space in order to land. Tom remarked, “I didn’t -know you had aviators among your group.” - -Wallace informed him, “Six of us are pilots.” - -“And you never told me!” The agent said that he was angry that they had -kept the information from him. “In the meanwhile,” he called out, “you -boys take shelter. It doesn’t pay to take chances and we really don’t -know who is in the plane.” - -The boys took up hiding positions and watched the machine descend to a -perfect landing. - - - - -CHAPTER XX - -BATTLE IN THE SKY - - -While those on the ground were so occupied with the fight they did not -notice a battle going on above their heads; a battle between two planes. - -When the plane landed with the smugglers, Jack was with Paul and -Wallace. As soon as the first shot was fired, his first thought was -that the crooks might use the plane to escape in. So he whispered to -his two companions that he would return to his former station and watch -the road; possibly, others of the gang might drive up and it would be -best to spy them before they had a chance of becoming acquainted with -the situation. Paul thought it was an excellent idea and he permitted -Jack to carry out his plan. - -As Jack moved noiselessly away, Wallace wanted to enter the conflict -and Paul restrained him. Then Paul went away and left Wallace by -himself. The latter immediately moved into position and was going to -fire when his attention was attracted by a creeping shadow at the -farther end of the field. By the form and outline of the moving -figure, he guessed it was Jack. And for that reason, he withheld his -fire—so that the attention of the smugglers might not be attracted to -the figure moving toward the machine. - -Jack was a short distance away from the plane when he became aware that -someone else—almost at a right angle to him—was also creeping toward -the machine. He flattened out in the grass to wait and see who the -other creeping figure was. For a short while he lay there hugging the -earth, not daring to move or lift his head even slightly to see who the -creeping figure might be. After about five minutes, a pebble fell near -him and Jack flattened out still more. In a minute another pebble fell -near him, followed by a hissing sound. He lifted his head very slightly -and out of the corner of his eye saw the other person wave a finger -at him. He decided that it must be one of the boys and he continued -dragging himself across the earth toward the plane. - -Jack and William crept up to the under-carriage of the plane almost -simultaneously. William whispered, “Inside.” - -Without any further hesitation, William swung himself up and into the -plane. Jack waited. A hissing sound came to his ears and he knew it was -the signal for him to follow. Up he went and into the plane. Both boys -heaved a sigh of relief. William got into the pilot’s seat. “Now to -take her up into the air,” he muttered. - -“You think you can fly her? She’s a pretty large ship, you know.” - -“I can try. In the meanwhile, you go in the back and look around.” - -Jack nodded and proceeded to obey. William studied the dashboard as -well as all the other gadgets everywhere around him. Though he had -never flown this type of ship, he was sure he knew how. Major McCarthy -had explained it to him in detail and he now knew exactly what to -do. He only hoped that the motor wouldn’t falter or need warming up, -because that would necessitate the loss of precious time. But he didn’t -think so because the motor was still warm from its previous trip. -He was right. Everything went off beautifully. Every single gadget -responded to his slightest touch. The motor roared, the ship turned -into the wind and giving the ship a sufficient run, it took off like a -great bird winging into the sky. - -William was thrilled and exhilarated. He felt the power flowing into -him through his finger tips which rested lightly on the joystick. Jack -came forward “How is she flying?” he asked. - -“Beautifully. What did you find back there?” - -“Nothing much. Some boxes, a couple of small wooden cases, two -revolvers in one of the lockers, and also two boxes of cartridges.” - -“You had better bring the revolvers and cartridges here. Most likely -we’ll have no opportunity of using them but we might as well be -prepared.” - -“I thought so too,” answered Jack. “I have them right here.” - -“Good.” - -They were climbing. When they reached an altitude of about four -thousand feet, William guided the machine away so that his companions -and all the others below would not see the plane and would think that -he had flown away. He flew in an extended circle and kept circling -around and around. Jack asked, “What are we going to do now?” - -“I don’t know myself. What do you suggest?” - -“How about flying to the airport and getting Major McCarthy and maybe -the police?” - -“I don’t know whether that would be of any help.” responded William. -“By the time we come back, their help would be of no use. On the -other hand, if we stick around here and watch how the situation below -unfolds itself, we may be of some help. They may need our revolvers and -ammunition and we might drop them. Or they might need us for something -else.” - -“That’s true. But then again, if we should land, perhaps those -smugglers will get the ship again and make their escape.” - -“I can fix that very easily,” explained William. “I’ll cut the -ignition.” - -“That’s right. Never thought of it.” - -The boys continued their circling flight. Some five minutes elapsed -when William caught sight of another plane making its appearance on the -eastern horizon. Coming nearer, they saw that the machine was heading -directly towards them. “You think he’s coming at us?” asked Jack. - -“Let’s wait and see.” - -The plane was soon upon them. The boys recognized it as a Bristol, a -small craft but possessing a powerful motor, modeled after army pursuit -planes. The Bristol flanked the boys on their right side and flew -along. The pilot was making signs to William which the latter could not -understand; besides he was too intent on piloting his plane to pay any -attention to him. He called to his companion, “Can you make out what he -wants, Jack?” - -Jack was already at the window and watching the other craft. “No,” he -answered. “He holds his fist up and moves it in a circular motion and -then points down. I can’t understand what that means. Can you?” - -“Perhaps he wants to land and is asking us about a safe place to land.” - -“I doubt it,” answered Jack. “He doesn’t seem to be in any trouble. -And coming from the direction he did, he must have passed the Stanhope -airport.” There was a pause while Jack continued to watch. “I think -he’s using his wireless,” he called out. “See if you can pick him up.” - -William inserted a plug and turned a disc on the dashboard. Half a -minute later, William nosed his plane into a dive and was off. But the -Bristol was right on its tail. “That guy is a confederate of those -smugglers,” hissed William. “He was asking if the stuff was on board -and we were ready.” - -“Ready for what?” - -“He didn’t say. Just asked if we were ready.” - -The next moment they heard a sharp sound and knew that the pilot of the -Bristol had fired at them, the bullet burying itself in some part of -the fuselage or wings. William brought the nose up and began to climb. -Simultaneously he cried, “Load the revolvers, Jack, and see if you can -fire back.” - -William wondered what he could do to get the pursuing plane off his -trail. He banked and dived again and came up climbing. Jack broke a -window, stuck his hand out and fired point blank at the nose of the -Bristol. He pulled the trigger fast and emptied his revolver. A bullet -must have struck close to the pilot, for the next instant the Bristol -dived. - -The Bristol was a much faster plane, easier to manoeuver than the -craft the boys were in. “What are you going to do now?” queried Jack -anxiously. - -“I’m going up into the clouds and try to shake him.” - -But the next instant Jack cried out, “He’s coming right up and it looks -as though he intends to hit you amidships.” - -“Fire when he comes close enough, and when I hear you fire the first -shot I’ll bank right and dive.” - -Jack pulled the trigger and William performed a half arc and dived; -the Bristol zoomed past so close that Jack held his breath. William -levelled out and began to climb again, hoping this time to reach -the clouds. But again the Bristol was upon them and sending bullets -into the fuselage and wings. William, however, kept on climbing and -Jack frustrated the other fellow’s getting on their tail by firing -point blank at the nose of the Bristol. For a moment the enemy craft -disappeared and then William discovered it overhead. They heard the -muffled thud of bullets sinking into their craft but doing no harm. -The next instant William cried, “He’s flying away.” - -“You think he has given up?” - -“Maybe he—” William left off in the middle of the sentence and gasped -as he watched the Bristol execute an Immelmann turn. He intended to fly -straight into the craft, firing as he did so and hoping to hit the gas -tank, and dive just in time to avoid a crash. William was aware of the -manoeuver. “You better lay low, Jack,” he cried. - -The two machines flew against each other. Just as soon as the enemy -fired the first shot he banked and pulled the nose of the ship up. -He still had to climb a thousand feet to get among the clouds. He -decided to risk it even if the Bristol got on his tail. “The other -pilot certainly must be a clever one,” he thought. Besides, the Bristol -was a lighter and faster craft and with the other fellow’s obvious -experience, he couldn’t help being out-manoeuvered. His safety depended -upon getting into the clouds and shaking the enemy. “Jack,” cried -William, “is he following?” - -“Yes,” was the reply, “but he doesn’t seem to be decided what to do -next. He has stopped firing.” - -“Perhaps he has run out of ammunition.” - -“Perhaps. But he also seems to be aware of your effort to get among -the clouds. He is following closely though.” - -William glanced and saw that he was rapidly approaching an altitude of -eight thousand feet. Seeing a cloud which appeared like a mountain of -cotton wool in front of him, he headed for it. Billow upon billow of -clouds rose for thousands of feet above them. In a minute the machine -plunged into the cloud mass and they saw nothing but white all around -them. They flew into the mouth of a deep cloud valley. Directly below -them they saw the snowy floor rolling away. On either side were white -walls that rose upwards to the blue ceiling of the sky. In a few -moments, the machine plunged nose first into another mountainous cloud. -William executed a left bank. - -“What are you doing?” questioned Jack. - -“Doubling back on my track.” - -“What for? He may be out there waiting for you.” - -“Let him. If he is I’ll dive for the clouds again. If he is not there -and we have lost him, then all the better. We want to be as close to -the cave as possible.” - -William timed himself. After seven or eight minutes of flying he called -out, “I’m getting out of the clouds.” - -And the next instant they dived. Out in the open again, both boys -looked everywhere for the enemy plane but there wasn’t a speck in -sight. Both boys heaved a sigh of relief and smiled at each other. “You -did it this time,” asserted Jack. - -“There’s the clearing,” announced William and pointed. - -“That’s right. Are you going to land now?” - -“I’ll first circle the field a couple of times.” - -He proceeded to do so. Some moments later, William cried, “Look they -are waving.” - -“Yes, it’s the boys. I can recognize Paul, Wallace, Mr. Woods. They all -seem to be there.” - -“I’m going to land,” announced William. - -“All right.” - -William fixed his attention on the field and prepared. Jack remarked, -“Wonder why they are hiding?” - -“Perhaps because they are not sure we are the ones flying this ship.” - -“Very probable.” - -William made a perfect landing and Jack and he jumped out of the plane -waving their handkerchiefs. The boys ran out of their hiding places -and cheered the two young aviators. Tom Woods looked on benignly and -laughed. Funny, but he had gotten to like these boys a great deal; -it’ll be tough, he mused, to leave them when the whole mess was finally -cleared up. - - - - -CHAPTER XXI - -NIGHT ENCOUNTER - - -The boys and Tom Woods squatted on the ground in a circle. They were -pretty well satisfied with their day’s accomplishments. There were a -few things yet left to be done. Paul, addressing the government agent, -said, “I guess it’s up to you now to decide what’s to be done next.” - -Tom fingered his bearded chin, smiled, and replied, “Well I don’t know -about that. It seems to me that you fellows have done more to capture -and annihilate this gang of smugglers than I have.” He paused and mused -for a moment. “I want to tell you boys,” he added, “that I’m mighty -pleased with you. I’ve never come across a more lively, energetic and -smart bunch of boys than you are.” - -There was an embarrassing silence. Wallace spoke up and remarked, “It’s -very nice of you to say that, but I don’t think we are any different -than other boys. We are about the average, and the average boy, if you -give him a chance, is a pretty lively chap and a nice person to have -around.” - -“I’m glad to hear you say that,” said Mr. Woods. “Though, of course, I -don’t know whether you’re right or not. I hope you are. However, this -has nothing to do with the matter at hand. Paul, what do you think we -ought to do now. It’s getting dark and we have to work fast.” - -Paul hesitated. “I suppose all those wooden cases and boxes in the cave -have to be removed?” he asked. - -“Yes, of course. That’s very important.” - -“In that case, we couldn’t do it tonight. In half an hour, it’ll be -pitch dark, and it would take more time than that to load the stuff on -the plane. Once it gets dark, you can’t take the plane off the ground.” - -“Well, what’s your suggestion?” - -“That we camp here overnight, keep careful watch and do everything in -the morning.” - -“How about that fellow in the Bristol? You think he may come back here -for any reason?” - -Most of the boys were undecided and Tom Woods did not express his -opinion but waited for the others to say something first. William -said, “I don’t think he will come back. He must realize that something -happened to his companions and that he will be awaited with open arms, -so to speak, if he returns.” - -Tom asked, “Any more suggestions?” Pause. Silence. “I want you to -express your opinions because it’s very important. Although I have -already decided on what to do, you may bring to my attention something -I had forgotten to consider.” - -Paul said, “Suppose you tell us your plan and if any one of us thinks -that it should be altered we will speak up.” - -“That’s well said. My plan is to take my prisoner and the dead man in -the car and go down to the farm house. There I will pick up the other -prisoner, who is hurt and requires medical attention, and the other -dead gangster, and have the town police care for them. All of that -shouldn’t take me more than about an hour and a half to two hours. Then -I’ll return, spend the night here with you and tomorrow morning we will -finish our job.” - -Ken said, “You can’t go alone. You will have two prisoners and—” - -“I didn’t expect to,” interrupted Tom. “I was considering taking one of -you boys along.” - -“The plan sounds all right,” spoke up Paul. - -“You think you could hold the fort until I return?” the government -agent asked. - -Several of the boys grinned and nodded. Tom laughed and muttered, “It’s -foolish to ask, I guess, but—” - -It was decided that they would pitch camp for the night a short -distance above the cave. Ken went with Tom Woods, Bobolink was left -behind to keep a watch at the cave while the others returned to camp to -get their knapsacks and things. Just as soon as they returned, which -was in a little over an hour, William got busy preparing supper for the -boys, while the others went about attending to other things. Around the -campfire, Nuthin’ said, “Now that this thing is over, what are we going -to do next?” - -“P-p-plenty of things,” answered Bluff. - -“And this thing is not over yet,” added Wallace. - -“You expect that guy to return?” queried Nuthin’. - -“You can’t tell,” spoke up Paul. “He may or he may not. Most likely he -won’t. But then we have quite a bit of work for tomorrow.” - -“Do you think we will be able to load all those cases and boxes onto -the plane?” asked Bobolink. - -They all turned their heads in the direction of the plane but it -was too dark for them to see it. Wallace assured them all with the -assertion, “Of course it will.” - -“It will be a mighty heavy load,” responded Bobolink. “Who will fly -it?” - -“Who do you think?” demanded Nuthin’. “There is only one fellow who is -going to do it.” - -They were all aware whom he meant, yet they were eager to hear the name -mentioned. The question was on the lips of each one of them, but only -Bobolink asked, “Who?” - -“William, of course,” replied Nuthin’ with finality. - -Soon Ken and Tom Woods returned. The boys hailed them and wanted to -know how everything went. Ken burst out, “You should have seen Chief of -Police Bates—I mean his face; it turned all colors as Mr. Woods told -him who he was and what it was all about. And his eyes—they almost -popped out of his head.” - -“I can imagine,” interposed Jack. - -“He wanted to send his whole police force to watch the cave over -night,” added Ken. - -The boys laughed quietly. The government agent sat down in front of the -fire and stroked his beard as he laughed to himself. Ken continued, -“Well, Mr Woods assured him that we didn’t need any police protection—” - -“Ha, ha, ha,” laughed the boys. “Police protection! Ha, ha, ha,” -laughed the youngsters and slapped each other on the back. - -“—and,” continued Ken, “Tha we would take care of everything.” - -“Absolutely!” exclaimed one of the boys. - -“We most certainly will”—that from someone else. - -Eventually the boys quieted down and they sprawled around the campfire -and talked aimlessly. The conversation turned to the airplane and -William was asked, “How does she fly?” - -“Swell. Beautifully,” was the answer. - -“If we only had a ship like that!” dreamed Bobolink. - -Paul lay on his back and stared at the blue sky and the stars. “If!” he -muttered. “If! It’s like asking for the moon. That plane is worth at -least anywhere between twenty and twenty-five thousand dollars. More I -think.” - -“Twenty-five thousand dollars!” exclaimed Bobolink. “Paul, you don’t -know what you’re talking about.” - -“Why. You think it’s worth much more?” - -“More? There isn’t so much money in the world.” - -The boys laughed heartily; even Tom Woods enjoyed the humor of it. The -agent remarked casually, “Why, Bobolink, twenty-five thousand dollars -isn’t such an awful lot of money.” - -“It’s plenty. Too much,” was the retort. - -Again the boys laughed. The government agent said off-hand, “So you -boys would like to have a plane like that, eh?” - -The boys stopped laughing and all of them sat up and strained their -ears. “What was that you said?” asked Jack. - -Tom Woods smiled, “I merely asked whether you boys would like to own a -plane like that?” - -Some of the boys grinned at the very thought of possessing such a -machine. William said, “We certainly would. It’s a beauty.” - -“Well,” muttered the agent, “maybe I can fix that.” - -Several of the boys cried out simultaneously, “How? How can you do it?” - -“I don’t know myself,” replied the agent nonchalantly and rubbing his -chin. “I didn’t say I could or that I would. I simply said maybe.” - -“Oh!” sighed several of the boys. - -They felt the wind taken out of their sails and their possessing such a -machine remained a dream. - -They lingered around the fire a while longer. Somebody remarked that it -was time to turn in for the night. Addressing the agent, Paul asked, -“Mr. Woods, do you think we ought to keep guard all through the night?” - -“What do you think?” - -“My opinion is that we should. We can designate now who is to be on -the first, second, third shift and so on and change guard every hour.” - -“I don’t think it’s really necessary. I am pretty certain that that -pilot won’t return or any other member of the gang. But—” he mused, -“Of course,” he added, “we could do it just to be on the safe side.” - -“I think we should,” spoke up Jack. - -“How about it, fellows? Are you all agreed that we keep watch?” - -“Yes, of course,” agreed Bobolink. - -“S-s-sure,” stuttered Bluff. - -“Certainly,”—that from Nuthin’. - -“Who will take the first watch?” asked Paul. - -“I will,” cried Nuthin’. - -“The second?” - -“I,”—that from Bluff. - -And so on. As it finally turned out the boys were to go on guard as -follows: Nuthin’, Bluff, William, Wallace, Paul, Ken, Bobolink and Jack. - -“You left me out,” interrupted the government agent. - -“You ought to rest, Mr. Woods,” explained Jack. - -“Well,” drawled the agent, “I guess I should. But don’t any of you -start shooting if I should come upon you to pay you a visit any time -during the night.” - -Nuthin’ went on guard and the boys turned in for the night. They were -all rather tired and it didn’t take them long to fall asleep. Bluff -muttered sleepily as he was awakened to go on watch next. As soon as he -walked off, Tom Woods crept out from under his blankets, with the help -of some rocks and such things he formed the outline of a person asleep -and himself slinked out of camp so quietly that no one was any the -wiser. - -Everything went along nicely and quietly until it came to Paul’s watch. -He sat on a stone and listened carefully to every sound, watching -intently for any moving shadows. Suddenly the dull echo of a pistol -shot shattered the stillness of the night. He jumped to his feet and -grasped firmer hold of the automatic in his hand. For several seconds -he debated what to do. He realized it would be foolhardy to do anything -himself. The wisest course was to awaken the camp. He sprinted to camp -but Ken and William were already up and pulling on their trousers. -“What’s up?” demanded Ken. - -“What was that shot?” William asked anxiously. - -“Don’t know,” Paul replied hurriedly. “Awaken everybody.” - -Ken cried, “Wake up Mr. Woods.” - -Paul ran to do so but, naturally, he did not find the agent. - -The discovery so shocked him that for a moment he couldn’t speak. -Finally he regained his voice and shouted, “Mr. Woods isn’t here!” - -By now all the boys were awakened and they came running up. They -saw the stones and sticks that the agent had used to shape a form -resembling a person. “Say,” cried Wallace, “what do you think this is -about?” - -“What do you think he is up to?” questioned Nuthin’. - -“You don’t suspect him of doing anything wrong?” William wanted to know. - -Paul interrupted the argument and called for silence. “Never mind -quibbling, fellows,” he said. “Let’s see what we can do. We have to do -something.” - -“Let’s all spread out and make a thorough search,” asserted Bobolink. - -“That’s no good,” countered Jack. “Whoever fired that shot might fire -at any one of us in the dark.” - -“Wait a minute, fellows,” called Paul. “Let’s first build a fire so -that the camp will be illuminated. Everybody, however, keep in the -background so that no one will be fired at. As for me, I have an -automatic. I’ll take Jack with me and we will go down to the cave and -investigate. Wallace, you have the only other revolver, haven’t you?” -The latter nodded. “In that case you remain here and shoot any stranger -who steps into the circle of the campfire. Everybody else stay out of -sight.” - -He wheeled around on his heel and was on the point of proceeding when -he stopped dead in his tracks and stared at Tom Woods and another man -who was bound and gagged. The agent had the light of his flashlight -shining upon himself and his companion. All of the boys were shocked -into silence and rooted in their tracks. The government agent was -quietly smiling. Breaking the silence, he said, “You need not bother, -fellows.” Pause. “I am sorry I had to put one over on you.” Again a -short pause. “I have a visitor here; I hope you don’t mind.” - -“B-b-but,” someone stuttered, and it was not Bluff. - -“Never mind. I’ll explain everything. I heard Paul suggest building a -fire; I think it is a good idea.” - -In a short while, the boys had built a roaring, blazing campfire. There -was no sleep any more so all the boys formed a semi-circle before the -spitting, burning logs. Tom Woods tied up his prisoner hand and foot -and removed the handkerchief from his mouth. “Hungry?” the agent asked -his prisoner. - -The man shook his head and growled. Tom sat there placidly, his -revolver in his lap. The boys waited but the latter did not offer to -speak. Finally Paul ventured to say, “Do you, er, mind explaining the -mystery?” - -The man grinned. “What do you want me to tell you?” - -“You might start at the very beginning and save us asking you a lot of -questions,” Jack said. - -“Well,” he began, speaking low and lazily, “I really had no idea that -he would show up. And by the way, this is the pilot.” - -William and Jack nodded. They had suspected it, but were not quite sure. - -“As I was saying,” continued the government agent, “I really had no -suspicion that he would return. But I figured that if he did take it -into his head to do so, what would be his object? He certainly would -not take it upon himself to rescue his friends. That would be foolish -and stupid. But if he still insisted on coming, he would have a good -reason for doing so. For example, he might want to get something, -something valuable. Then where would he go?” - -He paused and waited for someone to answer. Jack did, saying, “To the -cave.” - -“Quite right,” responded the agent. “Therefore, not wanting to take any -chances, I decided to guard the cave all night long. But I also didn’t -want to scare you boys in case one of you should discover that I was -gone. So I used the stones and sticks to give the impression that I was -still here and fast asleep.” - -“But why didn’t you tell us?” demanded Wallace. - -“I didn’t want you boys to be uneasy.” - -He waited for more questions but none were asked. Jack said, “Do you -mind continuing?” - -“There isn’t much left. He came and I nabbed him.” - -Nuthin’ wagged his head. “But why should he come?” he asked. “Seems to -me that only a fool would do that, under the circumstances.” - -“Yes, that’s right,” added Bobolink. - -The agent smiled. “He’s really no fool and he had a very good reason -for coming.” - -“What?” Several of the boys shot that question simultaneously. - -“A big bunch of money. Maybe ten, fifteen or twenty thousand dollars. -Perhaps more. I haven’t counted it yet.” - -“Where is it?” - -“In the cave. I guess it is perfectly safe until morning.” - -There was silence, some of the boys, especially Bobolink, trying to -imagine how much money twenty thousand dollars was. Jack asked, “But -how do you know he came to get the money?” - -“That’s simple. I watched him until he found what he was looking -for and then I showed myself and told him who I was. And he very -courteously and promptly surrendered.” - -“What about the shot?” asked Paul. - -“That was his fault,” and the agent nodded in the prisoner’s direction. -“He accidentally discharged his gun.” - -For some while the boys sat there humbly, silently thinking over Tom -Woods’ story. Paul rose, stretched himself and yawned. “Some night!” he -drawled. “I’m going back for some more sleep.” - -All the other boys did likewise, except Bobolink whose watch it was. -And after him, Jack. - -In the morning, Tom Woods took his prisoner to town and returned in -about an hour, carrying under his arm a small package. When asked what -was in the package, he merely said that it contained several sticks of -dynamite. But when pressed to tell what he was going to use it for, he -laughed and replied, “Wait and see.” - -Instead of loading all the cases of guns and boxes of ammunition -onto the plane, the government agent had a truck come from town to -transport the load. It took the truck driver and the boys several hours -to cart all the cases and boxes from the cave to the truck. When it was -at last done, the agent called the boys together and said, “Now you’ll -see the purpose of the dynamite.” - -He strung together the several pieces of dynamite, attached a fuse to -it and buried the bundle of explosives at the mouth of the cave; then -he laid out the fuse for about twenty feet and lit it. As he did so he -and the boys retreated some distance. “Why are you doing that?” asked -Jack. - -“To shut up the mouth of the cave.” - -“Yes, but what for?” - -“To prevent anyone from using it again as those smugglers did.” - -“But the rear exit of the cave will be available,” asserted Wallace. - -“You boys stuffed it up, didn’t you?” - -“Yes, but somebody is liable to find it.” - -“They’ll have a hard time finding it.” - -Jack asked, “It would be all right if we used the cave -occasionally—that is, using the rear exit, and closing it up when we -left, would that be all right?” - -Tom Woods smiled. “As a matter of fact,” he drawled, “I had that in -mind when I decided to close up the front entrance to the cave. -Otherwise I would blow up the whole thing.” - -Just then there was an explosion and the front part of the cave fell -in. The boys sighed and walked to the plane. They all climbed in and -William took the pilot’s seat. The agent relaxed in his seat and said -casually, “Now show me what a good pilot you are, William.” - -The motor roared. William taxied the plane across and then lifted it -off the ground. Tom Woods leaned back in his seat and closed his eyes; -a deep sigh escaped from between his lips and he relaxed utterly, all -the tenseness and anxiety of these last days leaving him. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII - -“THE CAVE” - - -William circled the airport. Paul looked out of the window and cried. -“Say, look at that crowd of people below!” - -The boys looked down and uttered exclamations of surprise. “I wonder -what it’s all about?” exclaimed Wallace. - -“Perhaps it’s a committee to welcome us,” asserted the government -agent, opening his eyes as he spoke. - -“To welcome us!” Bobolink cried. “What for?” - -Ken shouted to the pilot, “Just keep on flying, William. Never mind -landing. We don’t want any welcoming committee.” - -William guided the plane down to a perfect landing. Just as soon as the -machine came to a stop, the crowd came running toward it. The boys were -swallowed up by the mass of people. There were reporters, newspaper -photographers and other cranks who asked them a thousand questions and -tore at their clothes and hair. But the boys did not mind all that. -They were afraid for the safety of the plane. Although it was not -theirs yet, it was a valuable machine and it would be a shame if it -were harmed in any way. - -However, Major McCarthy and two of his mechanics pushed their way -through the crowd. Without stopping to greet them, he called upon the -boys to help clear a path to wheel the plane into one of the hangars. -“It is much safer than leaving it out here,” he added. - -The boys fell to and the machine was stored away. Then they had a hard -time getting through to the office. Most of the boys were angry rather -than pleased by the reception. “I wish I knew what this is all about,” -demanded Ken. - -The Major smiled. “Perhaps you are not aware of it,” he informed them, -“but you are heroes.” - -“Heroes!” exclaimed Bobolink. “What kind of heroes?” - -McCarthy shrugged his shoulders, “I couldn’t tell you what kind. Just -plain heroes, I guess.” - -Nuthin’ waved the suggestion of heroism away. He had a word for it. -“Phooey!” he muttered under his breath. - -“But how did the news get out, that is something I should be interested -to know.”—that from Paul. - -“I guess the police couldn’t keep it from prying reporters,” mumbled -the government agent. - -“Let’s forget it and go home,” remarked Jack. - -“That’s a swell idea,” added William. “And just as soon as I get home—” - -Ken interrupted, “You are going to do what?” - -“Practice the piano,” suggested Nuthin’. - -“He will change his tie,” counter-suggested Paul. - -“—I’m going to take a bath,” concluded William. - -The boys laughed and Tom Woods joined in. “What are you going to do -now, fellows?” he asked. - -“Go home,” answered Jack. - -“I mean, what are your plans?” - -“We don’t have any,” Paul informed him. - -Using two cars, the Major’s and one belonging to a mechanic, Tom Woods -and the boys were taken to town. At police headquarters, Tom got out. -“So long, boys,” he called. “I’ll be seeing you soon.” - -The boys waved. The agent walked off and they continued their way home. - -At the home of each of the boys, a similar scene was enacted that -day. Coming home, Paul found his mother waiting for him. As soon as -he stepped over the threshhold, she fell on his neck and kissed -and hugged him. Putting his arms around her, he found that she was -trembling. Not knowing the reason for it, he was puzzled. He said, -“Mother, is there anything wrong? You are trembling all over.” - -“There is nothing wrong with me. It’s you. Are you all right? Not hurt -or wounded or anything?” she questioned anxiously. - -“Why, no! Of course not. I’m perfectly all right.” And to prove it he -began to go through a series of stretching and bending exercises. - -His mother looked sternly at him. “The idea of the thing!” she -exclaimed. “You said you were going camping and all the time you -knew that you and your friends were going there to catch a gang of -smugglers. You might have gotten hurt. You might even have been killed.” - -“But, mother,” protested Paul, “nobody was killed or hurt. All the boys -are perfectly all right and in the best of health.” - -“Well, it’s a good thing. But, big as you are, if you ever do that -again, I’m going to have your father give you a good thrashing.” - -Dr. Morrison, who had just entered, laughed. “My dear,” he said, “if -it ever comes to that, I’m afraid I would get the worst of it. He is -taller than I by a head and weighs about twenty-five pounds more.” - -“I would never do that, dad,” protested Paul. - -“I know you wouldn’t. But if you ever took it into your head to—Well, -I hope you never do.” And again he laughed. - -For the following several days, the boys were made miserable by the -public acclaim that was showered upon them. They could not appear on -the street; that was out of the question. To set foot outside the -house meant to be immediately surrounded by an ever increasing crowd, -with every individual wanting to shake the boy’s hand, slap him on the -back, pinch him, and ask a thousand questions. But staying in the house -was almost as bad. The capture of the smugglers had aroused national -interest and many out of town reporters suddenly appeared and they -went to the home of each boy to get a story; accompanying the reporter -was a photographer to take pictures. The boys were tired of answering -questions but they couldn’t very well refuse—it seemed that getting -the story meant so much to the reporter. Then, also the homes of the -boys had overnight become exceedingly popular and all day long there -was a continual coming and going of visitors. - -On the third day, a car appeared in front of Paul’s home and Major -McCarthy jumped out. “Come on, Paul,” he said, “let’s go.” - -“Where to?” - -“The airport.” - -“What for?” Paul was curious. - -“You’ll find out when we get there,” the Major answered with a twinkle -in his eye. - -At Jack’s home Paul ran inside to call his chum. “Come on Jack, the -Major is outside and we are going to—” - -Jack was at the moment in the living room answering the questions of a -neighbor. “Never mind,” he said, interrupting, “don’t tell me where we -are going, just so long as we go somewhere.” - -So they went from home to home, picking up the boys who piled into two -cars, the Major’s car and Mr. Carberry’s car with Wallace at the wheel. -The boys riding with the Major prodded him for some information as to -why they were going to the airport, but he only smiled and shook his -head “Wait until you get there,” he answered them. - -At the airport, the boys were a buzzing group of children as they -followed the Major to the office. As they stepped inside, they found -Tom Woods leaning back in a chair and quietly smoking a cigarette. He -laughed and greeted them, “Hello, fellows,” he called out. - -“Hello, Mr. Woods.” - -“How are you, Mr. Woods?” - -“What are you doing here?” - -Turning to the Major, the boys asked, “Well, now what? What’s the -surprise?” - -McCarthy smiled. Pointing a finger at the government agent, he said, -“It’s his surprise, fellows. You tell them, Tom.” - -Woods lifted himself out of his seat. “Very well, then,” he drawled. -“Let’s go down to the hangars.” - -The boys eagerly followed the Major and Tom Woods. At the hangars, -Bobolink cried, “Look, fellows. The smuggler’s plane—she is still -here.” - -“Yes,” replied the agent, “She is still and what’s more, she is -remaining here.” - -“What do you mean?” asked Paul. - -“Well, the ship now belongs to you boys.” - -The statement knocked the breath out of them. Suddenly they all -exploded simultaneously and shouted questions. “What do you mean she is -ours?” - -“How?” - -“Why?” - -“How come? Tell us.” - -Tom Woods smiled. “Just what I said, fellows. She is yours and don’t -ask questions.” - -“Hooray! Hooray for Mr. Woods!” cried Nuthin’. - -And the boys cheered him lustily and vigorously. - -Caustically, the agent remarked, “I hope that some day you will be -kind enough to give me a ride in her.” - -“We will,” they answered and laughed heartily. - -Wallace, however, was a bit puzzled. “But, Major,” he asked, “What -about the plane you were supposed to buy for us.” - -“I almost did,” was the reply. “But when Tom told me, I cancelled the -deal. Now you can use the money to run this plane.” - -“Hooray!” they cheered. - -The boys were happy. They walked around the machine and caressed it. -“We ought to give it a name,” suggested Jack. - -“How about calling it ‘Stanhope’?” asked Paul. - -“No, that name is not a very good one,” objected Ken. “You have the -Stanhope Drug Store, the Stanhope Vegetable Market, the—” - -“How about calling it ‘The Cave’?” Jack had spoken and all the boys -looked. “You get my meaning?” he asked. - -“Of course.” - -“Certainly. That’s just the name for it.” - -“It is settled,” said Nuthin’. “We will call it ‘The Cave’. Are there -any objections?” - -There were none. They were all eager to take off, and ten minutes later -“The Cave” was taxiing across the field, rising from the ground like a -beautiful bird. - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Banner Boy Scouts in the Air, by -George A. Warren - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS IN THE AIR *** - -***** This file should be named 52394-0.txt or 52394-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/2/3/9/52394/ - -Produced by Giovanni Fini, Roger Frank and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/52394-0.zip b/old/52394-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a0ce15d..0000000 --- a/old/52394-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52394-h.zip b/old/52394-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d882a46..0000000 --- a/old/52394-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52394-h/52394-h.htm b/old/52394-h/52394-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index f82e641..0000000 --- a/old/52394-h/52394-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8860 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of Banner Boy Scouts In the Air, by George A. Warren. - </title> - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - <style type="text/css"> - -body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} -div.limit {max-width: 35em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} -div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} -.vh {visibility: hidden;} -.bord1 {border: double 8px; color: black; margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%;} -.bord2 {border: solid 1px; color: black; margin: 0.5em; padding: 1em;} -.font1 {font: 1em "Monotype Corsiva", serif;} - - - h1,h2 {text-align: center; clear: both;} - -p {margin-top: 0.2em; text-align: justify; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 1.5em;} -.pc {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.pc2 {margin-top: 2em; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.pc4 {margin-top: 4em; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.pch {margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1.5em; font-size: 140%; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.ptn {margin-top: 0.3em; text-indent: -1em; margin-left: 2%;} - -.p4 {margin-top: 4em;} - -.small {font-size: 75%;} -.reduct {font-size: 90%;} -.mid {font-size: 125%;} -.large {font-size: 150%;} -.elarge {font-size: 175%;} -.xlarge {font-size: 200%;} -.star {font-size: 400%;} - -hr {width: 33%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em; margin-left: 33.5%; margin-right: 33.5%; clear: both;} -hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} -hr.d1 {width: 15%; margin-left: 42.5%; margin-right: 42.5%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 4em;} - -table { margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} - - .tdl1 {text-align: left; vertical-align: top; padding-left: 0.5em;} - .tdl2 {text-align: left; vertical-align: top;} - .tdr1 {text-align: right; vertical-align: bottom; width: 1em;} - -#toc {width: 70%; font-size: 90%; line-height: 1em; margin-top: 1em;} - -.pagenum { /* visibility: hidden; */ position: absolute; left: 94%; color: gray; - font-size: smaller; text-align: right; text-indent: 0em; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -.figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;} - -.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; color: black; font-size:smaller; padding:0.5em; margin-bottom:5em; font-family:sans-serif, serif; } - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts in the Air, by George A. Warren - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Banner Boy Scouts in the Air - -Author: George A. Warren - -Release Date: June 23, 2016 [EBook #52394] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS IN THE AIR *** - - - - -Produced by Giovanni Fini, Roger Frank and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -</pre> - -<div class="limit"> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<div class="transnote p4"> -<p class="pc large">TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:</p> -<p class="ptn">—Obvious print and punctuation errors were corrected.</p> -<p class="ptn">—The transcriber of this project created the book -cover image using the front cover of the original book. -The image is placed in the public domain.</p> -</div></div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[1]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p class="pc4 xlarge">BANNER BOY SCOUTS<br /> -IN THE AIR</p> - -<hr class="d1" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span></p> -<p> </p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span></p> -<p> </p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span></p> -<p> </p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span></p> - -<div class="bord1"> -<div class="bord2"> - -<h1><span class="large">THE BANNER<br /> -BOY SCOUTS<br /> -IN THE AIR</span></h1> - -<p class="pc2 elarge font1"><i>By</i></p> - -<p class="pc2 elarge">GEORGE A. WARREN</p> - -<p class="pc star">☆</p> - -<p class="pc4 mid">THE WORLD SYNDICATE<br /> -PUBLISHING<span class="vh">–.</span>COMPANY<br /> -<span class="small">CLEVELAND<span class="vh">.————</span>NEW YORK</span></p> -</div></div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span></p> - -<p class="pc4 reduct"> -Copyright, 1937<br /> -by<br /> -The World Syndicate Publishing Co.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"> - <img src="images/logo.jpg" width="200" height="258" - alt="" - title="" /> -</div> - -<p class="pc reduct"><i>Printed in the United States of America</i></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CONTENTS</h2> - -<table id="toc" summary="cont"> - - <tr> - <td colspan="2" class="tdl2"><span class="small">CHAPTER</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><span class="small">PAGE</span></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">I</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">At the Airport</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_9">9</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">II</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">The Meeting</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_17">17</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">III</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Bobolink is a Hero</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">IV</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Flying</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_28">28</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">V</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">The Reward</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_39">39</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">VI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">What To Do with the Money</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_46">46</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">VII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Mystery</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_56">56</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">VIII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">The Mystery Becomes Complicated</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_65">65</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">IX</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Clues</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_75">75</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">X</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Flying Instructions</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_86">86</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Baseball Game</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_102">102</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">What Happened to Wallace</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_123">123</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XIII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">The Cave</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_134">134</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XIV</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Flying Solo</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_146">146</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XV</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">A Complicated Surprise</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_155">155</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XVI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Swimming Contest</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_163">163</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XVII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Man Chained</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_177">177</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XVIII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">The Trap</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_193">193</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XIX</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">At the Cave Again</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_204">204</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XX</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Battle in the Sky</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_216">216</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Night Encounter</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_226">226</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">“The Cave”</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_242">242</a></td> - </tr> - -</table> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span></p> -<p> </p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p class="pc4 xlarge">BANNER BOY SCOUTS<br /> -IN THE AIR</p> - -<hr class="d1" /> - -<h2>CHAPTER I</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">At the Airport</span></p> - -<p>Paul and Jack were dashing along on their -bicycles through Main Street. It was a clear, beautiful -summer day. School was over and they -grasped the first opportunity to run over to the -airport about a mile outside of Stanhope and -which had only recently been completed.</p> - -<p>The two boys wore their Scout uniforms and -they pedalled along swiftly. Several townspeople -paused to watch them pass by and wondered what -might be the cause of their haste. Paul stuck his -left hand out and they turned right into Oliver -Street, thus taking a short cut to the highway and -then to the aerodrome. When they arrived at their -objective, they dismounted and stood around, taking -everything in with their eyes.</p> - -<p>The flying field was about a mile long and half a -mile wide and entirely cleared of trees, bushes or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span> -anything that might be an obstruction. To one side -were a group of sheds and a building, evidently -the office. At about the middle of the field there -was a solitary monoplane.</p> - -<p>Jack gasped. Finally he remarked, “Gee, isn’t -this grand?”</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. He was as much overcome with -the wonder of it as his chum. “Boy!” he exclaimed, -“it sure is.”</p> - -<p>Jack said, “Let’s walk over to the buildings.”</p> - -<p>His chum nodded. “Sure, let’s go.”</p> - -<p>Pushing their bicycles along side of them, they -walked across the field. They could barely contain -themselves with wonder, joy and astonishment, -which was the cause of their lack of speech. For -the past weeks they had been so excited by the -news of the flying field being completed that they -found it difficult to control themselves enough to -go on with their school work. And it wasn’t only -Jack and Paul, but all their chums had suddenly -become interested in aeronautics. They began to -boast of their ambition to become pilots, fly all -over the world and enjoy all sorts of adventurous -experiences. At times, instead of studying their -biology lessons or French, they would be reading -thrilling air stories or books on flying.</p> - -<p>As the two boys approached the office building, -a man emerged and waved to them. They waved<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span> -back. Paul whispered, “I’ll bet it’s Major McCarthy, -the manager.”</p> - -<p>Paul was right. The Major was a tall, stocky -man of about forty and almost bald. He smiled to -them and said, “Hello fellows. I’m Major McCarthy. -Is there anything I can do for you?”</p> - -<p>Jack said, “We came over to look around, if -you have no objections, Major.”</p> - -<p>The Major smiled warmly. “Oh, none whatsoever. -You’re welcome.”</p> - -<p>Paul said, “My name is Paul—Paul Morrison.”</p> - -<p>“And your dad is Dr. Morrison?”</p> - -<p>“That’s right. How did you know?”</p> - -<p>“Well, there’s only one Dr. Morrison in Stanhope. -Glad to meet you, Paul.”</p> - -<p>The two shook hands. Jack said, “I’m Jack -Stormways.”</p> - -<p>“Glad to know you,” the major said and they -shook hands.</p> - -<p>For a few seconds there ensued an embarrassed -silence. Neither Jack nor Paul could think of anything -to say and Major McCarthy was waiting -for them to ask questions. Finally the major said, -“Suppose you boys lean your bicycles against the -wall and I’ll show you around. There isn’t much -doing now and I have some time on my hands.”</p> - -<p>Paul cried, “I think that’s swell of you.”</p> - -<p>And Jack added, “Thanks a lot.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span></p> - -<p>The boys quickly leaned their wheels against -the wall and then joined the major, one on either -side of him. The major said, “I might as well begin -by telling you something about the field. You’ll -notice that the field is cleared of all obstructions. -That’s absolutely necessary to make sure -there is nothing to cause an accident in taking off -or landing. The field is about a mile long. That’s -to provide plenty of room for taking off or -landing.”</p> - -<p>Jack interrupted. “How much of a run does it -take to land or take off?”</p> - -<p>Paul nodded, implying that he too was interested -in the question. Major McCarthy answered, -“It all depends. A light ship can take off in about -a hundred yards or less. A big ship heavily -loaded may take a quarter or half a mile or even -more to take off. In landing, the ground speed -depends a lot upon the velocity of the wind. The -stronger the wind, the less space required in -which to land.”</p> - -<p>They were walking towards the sheds. Pointing, -Paul asked, “What’s that?”</p> - -<p>The major looked in the direction the boy was -pointing. “That’s a wind indicator,” he said. -“That shows which way the wind is blowing.”</p> - -<p>“And what’s the purpose of that?” Paul asked.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span></p> - -<p>“To tell which way to land. You always land -directly into the wind.”</p> - -<p>They were heading toward the monoplane. The -boys were thrilled. They had seen planes in the -movies and in the daily newspapers, but they had -never seen a <i>real</i> plane. As soon as they neared -the ship, the first reaction of the boys was to pat -it, caress it as if it were a live thing. The major -smiled casually and understood how they felt. -He said, “Suppose the two of you get into the -observer’s seat while I get into the pilot’s place -and I’ll explain a few things to you about a -plane.”</p> - -<p>The boys gasped for breath, they were so -shocked by the invitation. “Do you think it’s all -right?” Paul asked bewildered.</p> - -<p>“Of course,” the major answered, “otherwise -I wouldn’t ask you.”</p> - -<p>Quickly, lest he reconsider his invitation, the -boys scrambled into the observer’s seat. Major McCarthy -climbed into the pilot’s seat. They leaned -over the major’s shoulders and stared at a bewildering -and numerous collection of gadgets on the -dashboard. The major said, “First I had better -explain to you the meaning of these gadgets.” -Pointing to a dial, he explained, “This is the revolution -counter. The engine in this plane is designed -to give about two thousand revolutions<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> -per minute. For all practical purposes, about 1700 -or 1800 revolutions are sufficient. Here, on the -right, is the throttle lever. And here are the gasoline -and oil gauges. This is the ‘doper’ which -pumps a spray of gasoline into the engine to help -in starting it up. These are the gasoline taps connecting -the two tanks and each of the tanks with -the feed pipes leading to the carburetors. And this -is the ignition control. You keep it advanced when -running but retarded when starting up. This is -the water temperature indicator. You always keep -the water pretty hot.” He paused, then he asked, -“Do you have any questions?”</p> - -<p>The boys shook their heads, bewildered by it -all. “If there are no questions,” Major McCarthy -said, “then I’ll continue.”</p> - -<p>“This is the control lever, or the ‘joystick’ as -it is commonly called.” And he grasped the handle -of a short straight stick that protruded upwards -between his legs from the floor of the cockpit. -“The stick is attached to a universal joint, -and it controls both the longitudinal movements -as well as the lateral movements by means of -wires attached to the elevator and the ailerons. If -you want to go up, all you do is pull the stick -back; if you want to go down, you push the stick -forward. Now notice where my feet are—on the -rudder bar. If I want to turn to the left, I push<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span> -my left foot forward; if I want to turn to the -right, I push the right foot forward. Simple, isn’t -it?” And he looked up to see the astonishment on -the boys’ faces. He continued with his interesting -lecture. “Now when I want to turn, I must push -the joystick over simultaneously and in the same -direction as the rudder. This is called ‘banking’ -on one side. The object of banking on a turn is -to offer the under-surface of the wings as a plane -of resistance to the air. Not banking the plane -over retards the forward speed. If you don’t bank -enough you may get into a ‘flat turn’. Now a ‘flat -turn’ is bad because you may thus stall the motor -and take a nose dive and unless you keep your -head clear and straighten out again, you’ll most -likely crash. Do you understand what I’m talking -about?”</p> - -<p>Both boys nodded; actually it was all a puzzle -to them. Paul remarked, “Gosh, Major, it must -be wonderful to be a pilot.”</p> - -<p>“It isn’t such a bad job.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think we could learn to fly?” inquired -Jack.</p> - -<p>“Of course. Anybody could.”</p> - -<p>“Could you teach us?” Jack was anxious.</p> - -<p>“Certainly. But I imagine you’d first have to -get permission from your parents. I don’t suppose -either one of you is eighteen or over.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span></p> - -<p>The boys shook their heads dejectedly. “I’m -only seventeen and a half,” Jack said.</p> - -<p>“I’m going to be eighteen the fifteenth of next -month”—that from Paul.</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy looked up. Somebody over at -the hangar was calling to him and motioning -for him to come over. “Well, I have to go now. -Let’s get out of the plane.” Walking back toward -the hangers, the major said, “Come around again -one of these days and if I have time I’ll take you -up.”</p> - -<p>“Gee, wouldn’t that be swell,” Paul cried. “You -really mean it?”</p> - -<p>“Of course.”</p> - -<p>Jack was eager. “How about tomorrow?” he -asked.</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy nodded. “Okey” he said, -“but I must ask you boys to obtain permission of -your parents. Otherwise I won’t do it.”</p> - -<p>“That’s a bargain,” said Paul. “If my dad or -mother object I’ll tell you the truth.”</p> - -<p>“Same here,” chimed in his chum.</p> - -<p>“All right then, I’ll see you boys tomorrow.”</p> - -<p>Waving their hands to the Major, they took -their bicycles and walked off the field.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER II</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">The Meeting</span></p> - -<p>Peddling back to town, their minds were in the -clouds. Each one was thinking how wonderful -it would be to learn to fly, to be a pilot and fly all -over the country, perhaps all over the world. -And when they thought of the adventure that was -in store for them, their hearts swelled with joy -and their pulses missed a couple of beats. Paul, -who was riding behind, pulled up alongside of -his chum, and asked, “Do you think we ought to -tell the boys about it?”</p> - -<p>“You mean about our coming over here?” Jack -queried.</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Why not? They would certainly be very much -interested and there’s no reason why we can’t -tell them.”</p> - -<p>Paul mused for a moment. Then he said, “But -if we tell them that the Major promised to take -us up tomorrow, then the whole gang will come -out here and want to be taken up. Then perhaps -he won’t take any one of us up.”</p> - -<p>“I never thought of that,” Jack said. “But then<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span> -I suppose—” He didn’t finish his sentence because -he didn’t know what to say. He didn’t want to -hold anything back from the boys, yet he thought -it was rather selfish on his part not to let them in -on it. The same thoughts were going through -Paul’s head. They were both fine chaps and ready -to share with their friends not only their thoughts, -adventures but even their most personal things. -But the idea of going up in the air, of actually -flying in a real airplane, stunned them. And they -naturally hated to be deprived of their forthcoming -joyous adventure. Finally, Jack said, “I don’t -know, but I think we ought to tell them.”</p> - -<p>Paul’s face lit up. “That’s just what I was -thinking,” he told his chum.</p> - -<p>That off their chests, they wheeled into town -briskly. On Main Street, they caught sight of Arline -Blair. They jumped off their bikes as they -pulled up alongside of her. “Hello, Arline,” both -boys cried out.</p> - -<p>She was about a year younger than the boys -and one of the prettiest girls in town. “Hello,” -she said. “Where are you boys coming from? -You’re so flushed and look so happy, I wonder -what you fellows were up to.”</p> - -<p>“We were over to the airport,” Paul told her.</p> - -<p>“Really?” She opened her eyes wide with astonishment.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack blurted out, “Sure. And we’re going to -learn how to fly and be pilots.”</p> - -<p>“Both of us,” added Paul.</p> - -<p>Arline pursed her lips. “Isn’t it glorious just to -think of it!” she remarked.</p> - -<p>The boys stuck their chests out. “It certainly -is,” both agreed.</p> - -<p>Paul asked, “Which way are you going, -Arline?”</p> - -<p>“Home.”</p> - -<p>“Take you there on my handle bars.”</p> - -<p>Jack interrupted, “Perhaps Miss Blair would -prefer to ride on my handle bars.”</p> - -<p>Arline shook her head. “No. It isn’t very nice -for a young lady to ride on handle bars,” she remarked -coolly.</p> - -<p>“But you used to do it and like it too,” insisted -Paul.</p> - -<p>“Yes, that’s right,” echoed Jack, “you used to -ask me to give you rides.”</p> - -<p>Miss Blair raised her chin several inches. “My -childhood days are over, gentlemen. Good day -Mr. Morrison, and you, Mr. Stormways.” And -with that continued her walk down the street, -every inch of her a queen.</p> - -<p>Jack and Paul looked at each other puzzled, -speechless. Paul shrugged his shoulders and put -his hand out. Seriously and affectionately they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span> -shook hands, jumped on their bikes and were off -again.</p> - -<p>When the two boys arrived at the meeting -place, they found their chums, members of their -Patrol, waiting for them. All were dressed in -Scout uniforms. The Carberry twins—Wallace -and William—were there; so were Bluff Shipley, -Bobolink (Robert Oliver Link), Nuthin’ (Albert -Cypher), and Ken Armstrong. Just as soon as -Paul and Jack came in sight, the boys set up a -howl. “Hey, where have you guys been?”</p> - -<p>“We’ve been waiting an hour for you fellows.”</p> - -<p>“What’s the idea of keeping us waiting like -this?”</p> - -<p>“You fellows must be up to some mischief.”</p> - -<p>Paul and Jack looked at each other and smiled. -Paul held up his hand and the boys quieted down -considerably. “Would you care to know where -we’ve been?”</p> - -<p>“Of course.”</p> - -<p>“Certainly.”</p> - -<p>“Come on, Paul, tell us.”</p> - -<p>“Hey, Jack, don’t hold back on us.”</p> - -<p>Jack, to tantalize his friends, turned to Paul -and asked, “Do you think we ought to tell them?”</p> - -<p>“Hey, how do you get that way?”</p> - -<p>Wallace began jumping up and down. “You -better tell us,” he cried, “or we’ll roast you.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Roast them, that’s it,” echoed Bobolink.</p> - -<p>Paul held up his hand and the boys quieted -down. “We’ve been over to the airport,” he announced.</p> - -<p>Bedlam broke loose, the boys were so thrilled -and excited. So many questions were hurled at the -two boys that they stuck their fingers into their -ears and turned away. When the boys finally -quieted down again, Paul said, “If you promise -to keep order, we’ll tell you about it.”</p> - -<p>Bluff stuttered, “Sure, we p-p-promise. Don’t -we, b-boys?”</p> - -<p>They all nodded and agreed. Between Paul and -Jack it was decided that Paul should be the one -to narrate the events of their adventurous afternoon. -As he told the story, the boys gasped with -amazement. And when he told them about the -major’s promise to take them up into the air on -the morrow, the boys were dumbfounded. Finally, -the first one to regain his speech, William, exclaimed, -“Gee, what luck!”</p> - -<p>Bluff muttered mournfully, “Luck! There is no -word for it. These two have all the luck in the -world.”</p> - -<p>Wallace, the sober and serious one of the twins -arose. “Scouts,” he began in a dignified tone, “in -view of the fact that we are all interested in aeronautics, -I propose—” he hesitated and looked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span> -around to see all eyes on him. “I propose,” he -continued, “that we consider ways and means to -learn everything there is about flying and about -airplanes.”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ cried, “That’s a mighty fine suggestion, -but how are we going to do it?”</p> - -<p>Paul suggested, “We might talk it over with -Major McCarthy, he’s the manager of the airport -and he ought to know.”</p> - -<p>Bobolink cried, “Sure he knows and he’ll tell -us too. I want to be a pilot.”</p> - -<p>“S-s-same here,” stuttered Bluff.</p> - -<p>“In that case,” spoke up Jack, “I guess we -better postpone any further discussion until Paul -and I will see Major McCarthy tomorrow. We’ll -speak to him and then report back.”</p> - -<p>“That’s swell.”</p> - -<p>“Okey.”</p> - -<p>“That’s the right idea.”</p> - -<p>Paul asked, “Is everybody agreed?” All the -boys nodded. “Then the meeting is adjourned -until tomorrow,” he concluded.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER III</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Bobolink is a Hero</span></p> - -<p>Jack and Paul mounted their bicycles and peddled -along very leisurely. The other six, in formation, -marched on the side walk. Suddenly a shriek -pierced the air. Bobolink was the first to notice. -Dropping out of line, he began to run at full -speed. The others, although they were not sure -what it was all about, nevertheless also joined in -the run. A blue sedan was speeding down the -street and bearing down on a little boy of about -three who, unconcerned of traffic or any danger, -was crossing the street. Half way across he -paused and stared for several seconds at the cobblestones, -then he continued walking to the other -side, thus getting into the path of the oncoming, -speeding automobile. Several women screamed. -The mother, about ten yards away, fainted.</p> - -<p>Bobolink ran until his breath was gone. It was -the fastest hundred yard run a human could do. -The speeding car was barely a yard away when -Bobolink reached the spot. With his outstretched -arms he gave the child a shove that sent him -sprawling. The next moment he saw a galaxy of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span> -stars, a piercing pain made him cry out and then -darkness, unconsciousness. The automobile had -side-swiped him and scraped his right side.</p> - -<p>A great number of people immediately collected -and surrounded the two victims. The child, -except for being shocked and very slightly bruised, -was unhurt. Bobolink, however, lay stretched out, -appearing more dead than alive.</p> - -<p>Paul and Jack, on their bicycles, saw the incident. -Immediately they wheeled around and peddled -vigorously after the speeding car. Ordinarily, -the chase would have been a futile and useless gesture. -But the boys knew that about 500 yards -away was a very sharp left turn, and at the speed -the driver was going, he was sure either to crash -or turn over. And sure enough, the driver, ignorant -of the sharp turn ahead, did not slow up until -it was too late. Frantically he swung the wheel, so -he would not crash into the wall that loomed up -in front of him. The side of the car bounced -against the concrete wall and turned over into the -ditch. Just as the boys came up and jumped off -their wheels, the driver had extricated himself. -He was a tall, husky, evil looking young man. -Dazed, he stood wavering on his legs and shaking -himself trying to shake off his dizziness. Without -hesitation, the boys jumped on him. He offered no<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> -resistance. He lay stunned. Paul said, “Guess he’s -out all right.”</p> - -<p>They looked down at the unconscious form -sprawling on the ground. The man’s face was a -mass of blood and his hand was twisted as though -broken at the wrist. Paul said, “I’ll stay here and -watch him. You ride back and get the police and -have an ambulance come.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded. “But suppose he comes to, do you -think you could hold him?”</p> - -<p>Paul looked down at the victim. “Even if he -comes to,” he said, “he’d be too weak to run or -put up any fight.”</p> - -<p>“All right, then,” Jack said, “I’m going.”</p> - -<p>But just as he was about to mount his bike, he -saw an ambulance come speeding toward them. -Evidently someone in the house a short distance -away had seen the accident and immediately reported -it by telephone.</p> - -<p>The ambulance stopped. An interne jumped out -and with him a policeman. The doctor examined -the man, then had him put on a stretcher and into -the ambulance. The policeman examined the -wrecked car, took the license number, removed a -valise, and then questioned Paul and Jack who -told him all they knew. They asked him about -Bobolink but he knew nothing of what happened -to the boy.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span></p> - -<p>The ambulance turned around and went back -to town. With heavy hearts and wondering -whether their friend was alive or dead, the two -boys mounted their bikes and wheeled back to -town. Jack sidled up to his chum. “What are we -going to do now, Paul?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“I guess we better try to find out how Bobolink -is,” he answered.</p> - -<p>“He was a swell guy,” muttered Jack.</p> - -<p>“He certainly was,” echoed Paul.</p> - -<p>“Do you think he was killed or just hurt?”</p> - -<p>Paul shrugged his shoulders. “Don’t know,” he -answered. “We better wait and see.”</p> - -<p>They peddled along slowly and mournfully. At -last they came to Bobolink’s home and found all -the other boys idling dolefully on the porch.</p> - -<p>Paul approached the twins and asked, “How is -he?”</p> - -<p>Wallace shook his head and turned away. William -whispered hoarsely, “Don’t know yet.”</p> - -<p>About ten minutes later Dr. Morrison emerged -from the house. Noticing the boys congregated on -the porch, with their faces drawn and appearing -quite sombre, he looked puzzled, then suddenly -smiled. They rushed up and surrounded him. Paul -asked, “How is he, Dad?”</p> - -<p>“He’s fine,” Dr. Morrison replied. “Nothing -to worry about. He’ll be back with you and running<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span> -around as though nothing had happened, in -three days.”</p> - -<p>Bluff for once didn’t stutter and cried, “Hooray! -Hooray for Bobolink!”</p> - -<p>The other boys joined and they cheered the -hero. When they quieted down, Paul asked his -father, “May we go in to see him?”</p> - -<p>The doctor nodded. “Yes, of course. That is, if -it’s all right with Mrs. Link.”</p> - -<p>So Jack was delegated to go in and ask Mrs. -Link for permission to see Bobolink, which was -granted. So they entered in a body to cheer up the -invalid and hero.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER IV</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Flying</span></p> - -<p>That evening Paul and Jack approached their -parents for permission to be taken up in an airplane. -Paul encountered little difficulty, much to -his surprise. Of course, he was cautioned several -times to be careful and he reiterated all the arguments -he could muster about how safe flying had -become and that there was no danger involved at -all. Jack, on the other hand, found his mother set -against any such thing. His father was reasonable -and consented, but only on condition that his -mother did not object. But she did, very strenuously! -Jack argued his case as well as the best -lawyers until his mother would no longer answer -him but merely shake her head. Finally he told -her that if Paul’s mother didn’t object he didn’t -see why she should. So she called up Mrs. Morrison -and then reluctantly gave her consent. Jack -jumped high in the air and whooped for joy.</p> - -<p>That night both boys found it difficult to fall -asleep thinking of the adventure that was in store -for them. And when they finally did fall asleep -they dreamed of all sorts of things. Jack dreamed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span> -that he was a pilot flying across the country. Paul -dreamed that he and his chum were flying across -the jungles of South America and that they -crashed and became lost in the jungles. And just -as a wild animal which he couldn’t recognize was -about to jump at him, he woke up and tumbled -out of bed.</p> - -<p>At about noon, Jack met Paul at the latter’s -home and, mounting their bicycles, they were off -to the airport. They were so thrilled that they -couldn’t talk. So they peddled along briskly and -when they arrived at their destination they found -the Carberry twins and Nuthin’ already there and -waiting for them. As Paul and Jack came in sight, -the three boys set up a yell. Major McCarthy -came out of the office building and waved to them. -“Hello, there,” he said. “Are you ready to go -up?”</p> - -<p>Paul cried, “Sure. And we can hardly wait.”</p> - -<p>Jack said, “And our parents gave us permission, -too.”</p> - -<p>The major smiled cheerfully. “I don’t see any -reason for them to object,” he said, “but then -some parents object thinking that it’s dangerous -when it isn’t at all.”</p> - -<p>The boys agreed with him. Nuthin’ cried, “You -fellows don’t know how lucky you are. I’d give -a right arm to be in your place.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span></p> - -<p>William offered higher stakes. He said, “I’d -give a right arm and a right leg to change places -with either of you two.”</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy grinned. “Maybe I’ll take -you boys up on that,” he said. “I can always use -a couple of right arms.”</p> - -<p>William jumped high in the air and whooped. -“Say, do you mean that?” he demanded.</p> - -<p>“I’m not saying a thing,” the major replied. -“We’ll just wait and see.”</p> - -<p>He went into the office and returned a few minutes -later. “Already to go up?” he asked. They -answered eagerly that they were and he said, -“Then let’s go.”</p> - -<p>The two boys fell in alongside of him with the -three others trailing behind. At the hangar, one -of the mechanics helped the major wheel out the -plane. Then the mechanic hunted up a couple of -jackets and goggles for the boys. When everything -was ready, the major said, “All right, boys, -climb into the observer’s seat. If you make yourselves -small enough, there will be plenty of room -for both of you.”</p> - -<p>They climbed in. The other three boys were -told to retreat about a hundred yards away. -Finally the major got into the cockpit. Turning -to the boys, he asked them, “Everything all right? -Not frightened?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span></p> - -<p>They shook their heads and assured him that -they felt perfectly at ease. The mechanic grasped -hold of the propeller. “Ready! Switch off! Suck -in!” he shouted.</p> - -<p>“Switch off! Suck in!” answered the pilot.</p> - -<p>The boys leaned over to watch what the pilot -was doing. As the mechanic turned the propeller -over about half a dozen times, the pilot, with a -few strokes of the doping pump, sprayed gasoline -vapor into the cylinders. “Contact!” cried the -mechanic.</p> - -<p>“Contact!” replied the major. He pressed -down the switches and quickly turned the handle -of the starting magneto. Brrr ... brrrr ... went -the engine. The mechanic sprang away. The mechanic -made as though to bound forward but was -checked by the wooden chocks, placed in front of -the under-carriage wheels.</p> - -<p>Just as he was ready, he turned back and asked, -“Are you ready boys?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir,” they replied.</p> - -<p>“Very well, then, we’re off.”</p> - -<p>The three boys at the sheds cheered lustily as -the machine began to move and Paul and Jack -waved to them. And before they realized it the -machine was about six feet off the ground which -seemed to be falling away beneath them. The -plane kept climbing steadily upwards. The boys<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span> -leaned forward. They saw that the air-speed indicator -registered a little over a hundred miles an -hour, and they wondered because they couldn’t -feel the machine traveling at such a rate of speed. -As they continued to climb, the boys looked over -the side at the scene below them. The earth now -appeared like a great colored map, with fields -showing up in different shades of green and -brown. The airport which they had only shortly -left, was a little to the left of them. Sheds and -houses and barns appeared as very small rectangular -blocks. As they climbed still higher, things -took on yet smaller proportions. Major McCarthy -spoke to them through the telephone. “Well, -how do you like it?” he asked.</p> - -<p>Paul answered for both of them. “Marvelous!” -he cried.</p> - -<p>The pilot banked the machine and it steeped -over on one side so sharply that the boys instinctively -clutched for support. McCarthy’s voice -came over the telephone “Don’t be alarmed,” he -said, “there’s no danger and you can’t fall out.” -He straightened out the machine. Again they -heard his voice. “Feel a little giddy?” he asked. -“If you do,” he cried, “look down upon some fixed -object on the ground and you’ll feel all right.”</p> - -<p>Both boys complied with his instructions and -they soon got over their giddiness. The pilot kept<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span> -the machine sailing at an even keel. Soon they -were flying over a small town and they saw what -appeared to them as ants scurrying along. They -knew that the ants were really men and women -and they marveled how small they appeared. As a -matter of fact, everything looked like toys from -that distance and flying above a railroad, the track -seemed to be two thin lines drawn with a pencil. -Major McCarthy’s voice came over the telephone. -“How would you boys like some stunts?” he -asked.</p> - -<p>The boys grinned at each other. Paul answered -for both of them. “Very much,” he said.</p> - -<p>“All right,” he said, “we’ll have to be satisfied -with only one today. Just to see how you fellows -take it. First we’ll bank and turn around. Ready!”</p> - -<p>But before they could answer the pilot already -had the machine keeled over on one side. On an -even keel again, the major asked them, “How -about your safety belts.” They adjusted their -safety belts and told him so. “Very well,” he said, -“here goes.” And so saying, he opened the throttle -and the plane bounded forward. In a few seconds -the nose sprang upward. As it rose the forward -speed decreased, yet the engine continued -to run at the maximum revolutions. The machine -was not pointing vertically upwards. For a moment -the plane appeared to hang on the revolving<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span> -propeller and it felt as though the machine must -inevitably drop tail foremost. But right away the -nose fell over to one side and dropped and the -tail shot up and the machine was shooting sharply -downward. For some distance they continued to -dive, then the pilot shut off the throttle and pulled -back the elevator lever and brought the plane -again on an even keel. However, they were now -flying in the opposite direction. McCarthy asked, -“How was it?”</p> - -<p>The boys were thrilled. “Fine!” cried Paul.</p> - -<p>“Were you afraid?”</p> - -<p>“No, not in the least.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that was an easy one, but the next time -we’ll try a harder one.”</p> - -<p>Jack couldn’t contain himself, so he cried, -“How about now?”</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy shook his head. “Enough for -today,” he told them.</p> - -<p>They were now flying over the airport and a -minute later they landed. The three waiting boys -sent up a couple of greeting cheers and ran over -to meet the grinning two who were tumbling out -of the plane. “How was it?” demanded Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>William was impatient. “Tell us about it, -quick,” he cried.</p> - -<p>Paul nudged his chum in the ribs and asked, -“Do you think we ought to tell them?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack smiled and wiggled his head. “I don’t -know,” he said. “I think we ought to consider it.”</p> - -<p>William was impatient. “Hey, come on,” he -cried. “No stalling now.”</p> - -<p>The major joined the group and the two boys -thanked him. He said, “It’s quite all right, boys, -I’m only too glad to do it. And by the way, I -heard all about what happened yesterday. You tell -that fellow, what’s his name—”</p> - -<p>“Bobolink,” cried Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>“Bobolink,” repeated the major. “He’s a -friend of yours, isn’t he?”</p> - -<p>Wallace interjected, “He certainly is. He is a -grand fellow, too.”</p> - -<p>“I’m glad to hear it,” said the major. “So you -tell him that just as soon as he’s recovered, to -come over here and I’ll take him up for a ride.”</p> - -<p>“Yea!” cried Nuthin’, “hooray for Major -McCarthy!”</p> - -<p>They gave the major three cheers. But William -wanted to know something else. “How about -us?”</p> - -<p>“Well,” he said, “I’ll think it over.” They were -now at the door of the office building. Entering, -he turned around and said, “Don’t go away, now. -I’ll be out right away.”</p> - -<p>The boys squatted on the ground, with Paul -and Jack in the center and the two boys were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span> -obliged to tell every detail of their experience. -It took about fifteen to twenty minutes to narrate -the story and when finally it was told, the boys -sat back, speechless and lost in thought. William -said, “Gee, I hope the major gives me a ride. I’d -do anything.”</p> - -<p>Wallace said, “Getting a ride is all very well, -but what I really am interested in is to learn how -to fly. I wonder if it’s hard to learn.”</p> - -<p>“No, I don’t think so,” replied Paul. “Major -McCarthy told us yesterday that it was easy to -learn.”</p> - -<p>Jack said, “I was watching him all the time and -it looks very simple. But we could ask him.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, we could do that,” remarked Wallace, -“but what we want to know is whether he would -teach us.”</p> - -<p>William spoke up, saying, “All of us.”</p> - -<p>“Of course, all of us,” agreed Paul.</p> - -<p>Just then the major came out and they called -him over. He seated himself on the ground beside -them. Paul asked, “Do you think you could teach -us how to fly?”</p> - -<p>“Of course,” he said. “I’ve taught a lot of people -how to fly.”</p> - -<p>“Is it difficult to learn?” demanded Wallace.</p> - -<p>“Why, no. On the contrary, it’s very simple.”</p> - -<p>Again Wallace asked a question. “If you could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span> -teach us to fly, would we—would we—” he hesitated. -Finally he said, “Would it cost a lot of -money?”</p> - -<p>McCarthy thought for a moment. “Well,” he -said, “I don’t think so. As a matter of fact, I’d -love to teach you young fellows and I’m sure we -could come to some arrangement.”</p> - -<p>“That’s mighty nice of you,” Paul said, voicing -the sentiment of the other boys.</p> - -<p>“I think what you ought to do,” said McCarthy, -“is to consider yourself a single group and -I’ll teach you as a group. Of course I couldn’t -take you up all together, but whatever ground-work -there is to be done, I could instruct you as a -group.”</p> - -<p>“That’s just what we were thinking, sir,” said -Jack.</p> - -<p>“In that case, everything is settled, except that -I must insist that you bring written permission -from your parents. Is that agreeable?”</p> - -<p>The boys were so surprised and shocked by -the willingness of McCarthy to instruct them -that they were left almost speechless. William was -the first one to recover. “You mean to say that -you’re actually willing to teach us to fly?” he -asked skeptically.</p> - -<p>The major smiled and nodded. “That’s just -what I said, didn’t I?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes, but you said it so casually and carelessly -that we didn’t grasp it at once,” said Nuthin’. -“Say it again, please, sir,” he pleaded.</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy reiterated his offer and the -boys let out wild yells of joy.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER V</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">The Reward</span></p> - -<p>The major got up and the boys also jumped to -their feet. “Well, who wants to go up now?” he -asked.</p> - -<p>“I do!” cried William lustily.</p> - -<p>“Me too,” insisted Wallace.</p> - -<p>“What about me?”—that from Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>The three boys milled around the major. Paul -and Jack, smiling, retreated to the background. -They had had their ride and it was somebody -else’s turn now. “I’ll tell you what,” the major -said, “the three of you choose and I’ll take the -two winners up now. And when I come down I’ll -take up the loser.”</p> - -<p>It was a good suggestion and fair enough. And -as luck would have it, William who was the most -persistent and eager, lost and his twin brother -Wallace and Nuthin’ went up. From the ground, -they watched the plane in the air. McCarthy -kept them in the air for a much shorter time than -Paul and Jack and performed no stunts. When -they landed, the two boys, thrilled and excited,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span> -climbed out of the machine. The pilot smiled -cheerfully and cried, “Well, who’s next?”</p> - -<p>William shouted, “I am!” And quickly and -eagerly tumbled into the observer’s seat. This -time the other boys thought that William was the -lucky chap, since he was going to fly all by himself. -Jack immediately spoke up. “Major McCarthy,” -he said, “would it be all right with you if -the four of us chose to see which one of us could -go up with you a second time?”</p> - -<p>He nodded. “Sure,” he said. “That’s fair -enough, I guess.”</p> - -<p>Paul was the lucky one and he went up in the -air for a second time. When McCarthy landed, -the boys thanked him heartily. When they returned -to Stanhope they all went to Bobolink’s -house because he was still unable to leave his bed -and they had decided to hold the meeting that -afternoon in his room. When they got there, they -found Bluff and Ken already present and they -could hardly contain their excitement. William, -impatient as well as impulsive, broke into the -room, shouting, “Hey, fellows, we flew in a real -airplane.”</p> - -<p>The boys in the room were also highly excited -and Bluff, who was eager to explain, stuttered so -because of the exciting news, that he couldn’t<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span> -talk. He cried, “A-a-a-and y-y-you n-n-n-know -what—”</p> - -<p>He was interrupted, however, by Ken, who -called out, “Wait, Bluff, don’t tell them until we -hear what they have to say.”</p> - -<p>Paul demanded, “What is it you’ve got to tell -us?”</p> - -<p>Bobolink, propped up in bed, declared, “Oh, -nothing, nothing much.”</p> - -<p>But their eyes glittered so with excitement and -their faces were so flushed that the new-comers -could tell at a glance that there was something up.</p> - -<p>“Say, you fellows are holding something from -us; come on, tell us,” William demanded.</p> - -<p>Ken, who was always able to keep a straight -face, no matter what happened, remarked very -coolly and casually, “Nothing, really. You tell us -first what happened at the airport. Did you all -get a ride?”</p> - -<p>The boys grinned. “We most certainly did,” -announced William.</p> - -<p>“Each and everyone of us,” added Jack.</p> - -<p>Paul said modestly, blushing to admit the -truth, “I went up twice.”</p> - -<p>Bluff made believe he was fainting. “Is that -b-boy l-l-lucky!” he exclaimed, “H-h-how come y-y-you -w-were thus h-h-honored?” he wanted to -know.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul explained. Wallace interrupted to say, -“And what’s more, Major McCarthy told us to -tell you, Bobolink, that just as soon as you’re recuperated, -he’s going to take you up, too.”</p> - -<p>The boys swarmed about Bobolink’s bed and -the boy had to turn his head from one side to the -other to listen to what each fellow said. He replied, -“I’m glad and I appreciate the major’s -offer but I wish you boys would stop jumping -around like frogs and get chairs and sit down.” -He was interrupted by William and Jack who began -to speak at once but he stopped them and -added, “Don’t all talk at the same time.”</p> - -<p>Wallace got ahead of all the others this time -and announced, “Major McCarthy also told us -that he is going to teach us all how to fly.”</p> - -<p>Bluff and Ken who heard the news for the first -time, jumped high in the air and shouted, -“Wow!!”</p> - -<p>Paul called the boys to order and admonished -them not to make so much noise because that -would be a very poor manner in which to reciprocate -Mrs. Link’s kindness in permitting them to -meet in Bobolink’s room. All the boys nodded and -agreed to refrain from making any further noise. -They brought in chairs, placed them around the -bed and sat down very orderly to discuss the business -at hand, which was, Major McCarthy’s offer<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span> -to teach them how to fly. For the moment they -forgot everything else and thought only of their -ambition to learn how to fly and be pilots. Bluff, -however, soon remembered that there was some -exciting news to tell which had been temporarily -forgotten. At the first opportunity, therefore, he -interrupted and said, “W-w-wait a minute, f-f-fellows, -we h-h-have f-f-forg-g-gotten s-s-something.”</p> - -<p>Given the cue, they all suddenly remembered. -William jumped out of his seat and cried, “That’s -right, you were supposed to tell us something. -So come across, don’t hold back, tell us,” he -demanded.</p> - -<p>Bluff waved his arms and wanted to tell but -Ken restrained him and said, “No, it’s Bobolink’s -news; let him tell it.”</p> - -<p>All eyes turned on Bobolink. A modest and unassuming -person, he hesitated. Ken urged him on, -saying, “Don’t be bashful, tell them.”</p> - -<p>Blushing, he said, “It’s really Paul and Jack -who deserve all the credit for catching that crook -and they should really get all of the reward.”</p> - -<p>“Reward! What reward?”</p> - -<p>“What crook?”</p> - -<p>They all spoke simultaneously, without listening -to each other. Paul held up his hand and -motioned for everybody to be quiet. He said,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span> -“Let’s first hear what it’s all about. All right, -Bobolink, tell us what you’re talking about.”</p> - -<p>Bobolink said, “Well, the story is all very simple. -You remember yesterday how that speeder -nearly ran over the Smither’s kid?”</p> - -<p>They all nodded. Wallace said, “Of course we -do, and if it weren’t for you, the kid would be -dead.”</p> - -<p>“It wasn’t much, really,” said Bobolink. “But -what happened afterwards is what’s really important. -Jack and Paul went after the fellow and -caught him and then the police arrested him.”</p> - -<p>William was impatient. “So what about it?” -he demanded.</p> - -<p>“Well,” continued Bobolink, “a short while -ago Chief of Police Bates called up and said that -there was a two thousand dollar reward for the -arrest of that fellow and that very likely the -money will be awarded to be shared by Paul, Jack -and me. But it’s Jack and Paul who should really -get all of it.”</p> - -<p>The last sentence was not heard because of the -commotion that followed. The boys jumped high -in the air, shouted, screamed, cheered Paul, Jack -and Bobolink. They were beside themselves with -joy. When at last they quieted down, Jack asked, -“But who’s the culprit, Bobolink? What crime did -he commit and who’s giving the reward?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span></p> - -<p>Bobolink answered, “Chief Bates explained to -mother that the culprit is a well known counterfeiter -and the government is giving the reward. -He said that in a day or two a government agent -will come to town to determine who really deserves -the reward. But my mother told me that he -assured her that the three of us are going to get -the reward.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER VI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">What To Do With The Money?</span></p> - -<p>The boys were in such a turmoil of excitement -that they barely noticed Jack and Paul draw aside -and whisper together. It took them only a few -seconds to agree to a mutual proposal. Paul -walked over to Bobolink and whispered something -in his ear. Paul then called the boys to order, told -them to sit down, then said, “Fellows, we have -some serious thinking to do. We must determine -the best manner in which to dispose of the $2,000 -reward.”</p> - -<p>Ken objected. “What do you mean ‘we’?” he -demanded. “The money belongs to you, Jack and -Bobolink and it’s up to you to do as you please -with it.”</p> - -<p>Jack and Bobolink shook their heads in disagreement -with the statement. William, however, -remarked, “I think Ken is right.”</p> - -<p>Bluff nodded in agreement while Wallace was -noncommital. Paul said, “The money belongs to -all of us, the members of this Patrol. Furthermore, -if there is any argument about it, Jack, -Bobolink and I are agreed that we want the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> -money to be shared by the eight of us. Now let’s -discuss, orderly and intelligently, what we should -do with the money.”</p> - -<p>All the boys were silent, not knowing what to -say or how to deal with the situation. Wallace, -however, the sober and serious fellow of the -group, remarked, “I’m sure all the boys agree -with me when I say that we appreciate very much -the gesture of Paul, Jack and Bobolink. Furthermore, -it is my opinion that none of us should hesitate -to accept their offer. Ever since I can remember, -since the time we were kids, we have always -lived together, played together, gone to school -together and shared each other’s property. If a -fellow had a dime, he bought candy and shared it -with all of us. I cannot remember a single instance -when a fellow refused to share anything he possessed -with the rest of us. You’ll remember that -when we first became Scouts, we pooled our money -to buy uniforms for <i>all</i> of us. We’ve been doing -that ever since and therefore I—”</p> - -<p>That was quite a long speech and the boys -would not permit him to continue. They applauded -him to show their whole-hearted agreement. -Even Ken now agreed and said, “I think -we owe a vote of thanks to Wallace for explaining -it to us and making it so clear that we cannot -help but agree with him.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span></p> - -<p>Some of the boys nodded. William jumped up -to offer a suggestion. He said, “All right, we all -agree by now that the money is the property of all -of us. Now what are we going to do with it? I -propose that we use it to learn how to fly and—”</p> - -<p>“R-r-righto!” exclaimed Bluff.</p> - -<p>“I think that is a good idea and it suits me perfectly,” -said Jack.</p> - -<p>“Same here.” cried Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>The others nodded their approval.</p> - -<p>William held up his hand and called for order. -“I’m not finished yet,” he cried.</p> - -<p>“What else?” someone asked.</p> - -<p>“Hear, hear!” somebody else shouted.</p> - -<p>William continued. “What I want to add is -this,” he declared, “That we have enough money -not only for all of us to learn how to fly but maybe -to buy a plane, too.”</p> - -<p>“Wow! Wouldn’t that be swell!”</p> - -<p>“Perfect is the word!”</p> - -<p>“Gee, a plane of our own!”</p> - -<p>Paul made himself heard. He said, “We’ll -have to wait and discuss it with Major -McCarthy.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right, we’ll do that.”</p> - -<p>“He’s just the man.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sure he’ll be glad to advise us.”</p> - -<p>Wallace rose to address the boys. He said,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span> -“We’ve been so excited that we’ve completely forgotten -how to think straight.” The boys were -seized by a feeling of discomfort. “I know that I -too got lost in the excitement,” he added, “and -only a moment ago it occurred to me that we -weren’t quite fair to our parents. We should by all -means consult them and find out whether they object -to what we propose to do with the money.”</p> - -<p>The boys became sombre and thoughtful. Someone -said, “But after all, the money is ours and we -ought to be able to do with it as we please.”</p> - -<p>William added, “And suppose they won’t let -us use the money to learn how to fly, what’ll we -do?”</p> - -<p>Paul said, “I don’t think we should feel disheartened -by the thought that perhaps our parents -will object to the manner in which we propose -to use the money. I’m sure that our fathers -and mothers are considerate of our welfare and -will most likely permit us to dispose of the money -according to our desires. Whatever we do, however, -we should by all means take our parents into -our confidence and ask for their advice.”</p> - -<p>Jack supported his chum. He announced, “I -agree whole-heartedly with Paul and I hope you -all do likewise.”</p> - -<p>Bobolink raised his hand. “I do,” he declared.</p> - -<p>“S-s-same here,” Bluff cried.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span></p> - -<p>“And me too,” said Wallace.</p> - -<p>The others also agreed. It was then decided -that Wallace, Paul and Jack approach Dr. Morrison -and speak to him about it. The meeting was -then adjourned.</p> - -<p>On the street, the boys were acclaimed everywhere. -It seemed that the news had spread all -over town very quickly. Walking through the -streets, many townspeople stopped the boys to -congratulate them, shake hands and slap them on -the back. By the time they arrived at Dr. Morrison’s -office, they were worn out. Dr. Morrison -greeted them, then asked, “Well boys, what can -I do for you?”</p> - -<p>Jack distorted his facial features and muttered, -“Something for a backache, Doctor, I’m all sore.”</p> - -<p>The doctor laughed good naturedly. Paul held -up his right hand. “Dad,” he said, “my fingers are -swollen, can you do something?”</p> - -<p>Wallace interjected, saying, “And I, the innocent -party, have to suffer also.”</p> - -<p>The doctor smiled, then remarked, “I guess it’s -because you fellows deserve it.”</p> - -<p>They settled down to a serious talk and told -Dr. Morrison everything that had transpired. He -listened respectfully and carefully noted all their -remarks. When they were finished, he agreed with -them and then suggested that each boy explain the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> -entire matter to his father and mother and then -invite them to a meeting at Dr. Morrison’s home -the following evening. He offered to speak over -the telephone with all the parents and personally -urge them to come to the meeting. The boys -thought it was a very good plan and agreed to go -and tell it to the other boys.</p> - -<p>The following evening all the parents assembled -at the home of Dr. and Mrs. Morrison. The -boys were somewhat nervous and fidgety. They -met again in Bobolink’s room and worried together. -What if their parents vetoed their plan -or decided that the money should be disposed of -in some other manner? What if their fathers and -mothers decided this, that, or something else? -They were truly worried.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile the parents assembled. Paul -had been told to stay with Jack for the night. Dr. -Morrison called the meeting to order and suggested -that they elect a chairman. He himself was -nominated and elected unanimously. It didn’t take -long after that for the meeting to warm up and -for everyone present to enter the discussion and -passionately plead his or her arguments. Soon the -parents became separated into two factions, one -led by Dr. Morrison and the other by Mr. Armstrong. -It was Dr. Morrison’s idea that although -the parents should by all means keep a guiding<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> -hand over the boys and advise them accordingly, -yet the plan of the boys to use the money for -flying instructions, should be respected. Mr. Armstrong -argued that he was not anxious to disappoint -the boys and that learning to be a pilot -was all right as far as he was concerned, but he -thought that the money should be used for more -worthy purposes. For instance, the money might -be used to send some poor but deserving boy -through college, or it might be used to build a club -house for the boys.</p> - -<p>Mr. Carberry, who supported Dr. Morrison, -argued that the suggestion of a club house was a -poor one, because the boys always had a -place at their disposal to meet; that such a -state of affairs was preferable to a club house -where they would withdraw and do things the parents -would be ignorant of. And as for using the -money to send some poor but able boy to college, -it was a most commendable suggestion but the -money after all belonged to the boys and they -should be permitted to use it for their own ends.</p> - -<p>Mr. Link, who supported Mr. Armstrong, argued -that it was all right to let the boys have their -way but that when they were on the verge of doing -something wrong, such as mis-using a large -sum of money, it was up to the parents to advise -them and see that they acted differently;</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p> - -<p>And thus arguments flew back and forth. Finally -Mr. Shipley suggested that a vote be taken to -see how matters stood. A show of hands revealed -that one faction won by a vote of ten to six. There -was some applause and then Dr. Morrison told -them all to relax, that although they had argued -one against another, it was all on good faith and -friendliness. Several minutes later Mrs. Morrison -served tea.</p> - -<p>Although the boys were in bed and supposedly -asleep when their parents returned home at about -eleven, yet they were all very much awake. They -couldn’t question their parents that night, however, -as to the results of the meeting. They were -obliged to spend a wakeful night and wait until -morning to learn the results.</p> - -<p>At precisely eight o’clock the next morning, -Wallace and William came downstairs for breakfast. -Wallace affected a reserved, calm attitude -while William was openly impatient and eager to -know the results. In the dining room, Mr. Carberry -was already at the table. He greeted the -boys with a cheerful good morning. Just then, -Mrs. Carberry came in from the kitchen. The -twins kissed their mother. Wallace sat down at -the table. William glanced from one parent to -another. “Well?” he queried.</p> - -<p>The parents smiled and the boys knew that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span> -everything was all right. William shouted, -“Wow!” He threw his arms around his mother -and hugged her. Both boys then pressed their -father’s hand affectionately and insisted for the -details of the conference.</p> - -<p>Similar scenes were enacted at the homes of all -the boys. Jack and Paul had decided, before they -came down for breakfast, that they would attempt -a carefree, noncommittal attitude and -would not inquire but wait until they were told the -news. Both boys sat down glumly at the table and -played with their food, insisting that they were -not hungry. But their appetites were quickly revived -when Mr. Stormways told them the story -of the meeting.</p> - -<p>Bobolink, just as soon as his mother entered -his room bringing him his breakfast, inquired -anxiously, “What was decided last night, -mother?”</p> - -<p>She smiled carelessly and answered, “Well, I -really don’t approve of the decision and I argued -against it, but—”</p> - -<p>Bobolink’s face fell and he expected the worst. -But when she told him the truth, that the majority -of parents had voted to permit the boys to -use the money as they planned, he became so excited -that he almost overturned his breakfast tray.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span></p> - -<p>At the Shipley home, the moment he woke up, -Bluff donned a bathrobe and raced downstairs to -ask his mother for the news. Nuthin’ was told the -news at the breakfast table and Ken’s father also -told his son the good news at breakfast.</p> - -<p>About nine o’clock all the boys left together -for the airport to confer with Major McCarthy.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="pch">CHAPTER VII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Mystery</span></p> - -<p>At the airport the boys had to wait a while -until Major McCarthy showed up. When they -told him their plans, he approved heartily and -assured them that he would try his best to get -them a good second hand airplane for the money -available. Then he also informed them that he -was leaving that same afternoon for New York -and expected to be away about a week. The boys -would therefore have to wait, until he returned, -for their flying instructions.</p> - -<p>On their way back to town the boys decided -that in the meanwhile they could go camping for -a week. Someone mentioned that Bobolink would -be unable to come along and that therefore they -should postpone their camping trip. Paul then -called their attention to the fact that for the next -month or so they would be occupied at the airport; -in three weeks they had an agreement to -play a baseball game against the Ted Slavin team -and then a swimming match against the same -group. “Sure,” he said, “we won’t have another -opportunity to go camping until just before school -opens and we plan to do that anyhow.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack suggested, “Let’s put it up to Bobolink -and then do whatever he decides.”</p> - -<p>They all agreed to the proposal. Bobolink, -when he heard of it, urged them to go. And they -decided to leave early the following morning.</p> - -<p>The air was fresh and clear. The dew was still -on the ground. The sun shone brightly. Stanhope -was only now awakening out of its slumber and an -occasional car or truck that passed seemed to be -committing sacrilege against the peace and quiet -that hung like a mantle over the town.</p> - -<p>Main and Chestnut Streets was the meeting -point upon which they had agreed. Paul, Jack and -Ken arrived almost simultaneously. They greeted -each other with a smile. They inhaled deeply the -fresh, invigorating air that set their blood dashing -through their veins. William and Wallace arrived -next and a minute later followed Nuthin’. They -conversed in whispers lest they disturb the hushed, -still air that hung everywhere about them. They -were aglow with the joy of life. They huddled -together, bubbling over with excitement and -anticipation.</p> - -<p>Bluff, gasping for breath, came running up. All -there, Paul, the leader, gave the order to fall in -line. Then he called out, “Forward, march!”</p> - -<p>They were on their way. They walked in double -file; each boy was dressed in his Scout uniform,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> -with a knapsack on his back. As far as the end of -the town they marched in formation. Turning into -the road leading to Black Mountain, Paul gave -the order to break formation. They divided into -groups of twos and threes and walked along -briskly. Soon they broke into song and during -the next hour they sang every song they ever -knew.</p> - -<p>At about eight-thirty they decided to stop for -breakfast. They picked a small clearing about a -mile and a half up the slope of the mountain. -Under the direction of Paul, enough wood was -soon collected to build a fire and Ken, the official -chef, set to work. It didn’t take long to prepare -the meal and soon they all sat around in a circle -and ate heartily, with gusto. After putting out -the fire and cleaning up their dishes, they decided -to rest there for about half an hour. The boys -stretched out on the ground and stared up at the -sky. Paul remarked casually, “This is the life, eh -fellows?”</p> - -<p>Bluff agreed, saying, “N-n-nothing l-l-like it.”</p> - -<p>William interrupted, calling out, “Is that so! -Just wait until we learn how to fly and have our -own ship, then we’ll be able to camp anywhere -within a radius of a thousand miles.”</p> - -<p>Jack wanted to know, “What’s the matter with -camping on Black Mountain?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Nothing at all,” answered William. “But just -think of it: being able to fly, being able to pilot -your own airplane and going anywhere your heart -desires; and think of it, you pick out your camping -ground as you fly along and looking down -from a height of 5000 feet, that tree over there -would look like a tiny household plant.”</p> - -<p>Paul said, “Yes, there is something staggering -about it, a feeling of tremendous power when -you’re up in the air.” He sat up and yawned. -“However,” he added, “what we have to decide -right now is where are we going to camp?”</p> - -<p>Ken spoke up, “Let’s return to where we -camped last year; it’s as good a spot as you can -find anywhere on the mountain.”</p> - -<p>Bluff agreed, saying, “That s-suits me.”</p> - -<p>Wallace suggested, “Why not go somewhere -else this year? I know a swell spot about three -miles south east.”</p> - -<p>Jack asked, “How about it, Paul, you want to -try this new camping site Wallace suggests?”</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. “It’s all right with me,” he said.</p> - -<p>The boys resumed their hike. It took them -about four hours of steady walking with a few -short rest periods to reach their goal The clearing -was off the beaten track. A hundred feet away -was a precipice overhanging the tops of many -trees about a hundred feet below. There was a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span> -stream of fresh, cool water just behind the -clearing.</p> - -<p>Tired, footsore, ravenously hungry, they immediately -set to and prepared a sumptuous meal -of chops and potatoes prepared over an open fire. -Later they pitched their tents and settled themselves -for a week’s stay. That night, at the camp -fire, the boys huddled close around the flaming -logs of wood. Jack and Wallace were sitting together, -about a yard or so away from the rest of -the group. Jack asked his companion, “How did -you happen to know of this place?”</p> - -<p>Wallace hesitated. Finally he said, “Well, -there’s a story behind it, some sort of mystery -I never could make head or tail of.”</p> - -<p>Jack perked up his ears. “What do you mean?” -he inquired in a low tone of voice. “You never -told us anything about it.”</p> - -<p>The other boys were singing, and the echoes -resounded far out across the mountain. The two -whispered to each other. Wallace answered, “No, -I didn’t, but that’s only because the story doesn’t -seem to have any meaning and I didn’t want the -fellows to think I was trying to put over a tall -one on them.”</p> - -<p>Jack became interested. Eagerly he asked, “Do -you mind telling me the story?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span></p> - -<p>Wallace shook his head. “No, I don’t, but I -warn you—there’s no sense to it all.”</p> - -<p>“Well, let’s hear it anyhow,” said Jack urging -his companion on.</p> - -<p>Wallace twisted and turned and finally found -a comfortable sitting position. He began his story -by saying, “This camping ground is about three -miles south east of the camping ground we usually -go to. If you were particularly attentive, you -would have noticed as we came here that this -place is off the usual course followed by campers, -is a little difficult to find and yet it appears to -have been used frequently.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded, glanced at the fire and his companions, -permitted his eyes to wander about the -general extremities of the camp, then turned to -his story teller and said, “Yes, but how did you -come upon this camp site? Tell me that.”</p> - -<p>Wallace betrayed a bit of uneasiness. He said, -“I’m coming to that. Last year, camping up -there”—he motioned with his hand—“I decided -one morning to take a walk through the woods. -There was no path, so I had to fight my way -through bushes, shrubbery and all sorts of entanglements, -until I came to a spot where the -bushes were beaten down, a couple of low -branches were broken off—there was every indication -that on that spot a struggle had taken place<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> -between two or more people. I examined the -ground very carefully for torn pieces of clothing -and such things, and walking straight ahead I -came upon the stream. Following the stream, I -came upon this camp site.”</p> - -<p>Jack mumbled, “Hm! Nothing mysterious -about that.”</p> - -<p>Wallace demanded, “What do you mean?”</p> - -<p>Jack answered, “What I mean is, that there is -no evidence of any mystery or anything. The -whole thing seems to fall flat.”</p> - -<p>“I told you that before,” said Wallace. “But -you haven’t heard all of it. I have told you only -the beginning.”</p> - -<p>Jack felt foolish for having spoken out of turn -instead of listening to the rest of the story. He -squirmed in his seat and said, “I’m terribly sorry -for interrupting. Go on.”</p> - -<p>Wallace had by now become enthusiastic and -he leaned closer to his companion. But just then, -William called out, “Hey, you two, no secrets. -Come on over and join us.”</p> - -<p>A few of the other fellows cried, “Yes, come -on, join us!”</p> - -<p>“If it’s a story you’re telling him, Wallace, tell -it to all of us.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t be snobs. Join us.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack waved to them and replied, “He’s telling -me a ghost story without a ghost and no story to -it.”</p> - -<p>The boys laughed. The two drew closer together -and Wallace continued. “Listen closely,” -he said, “can you hear the gurgling sound of the -stream?”</p> - -<p>Jack listened closely and to his astonishment -he couldn’t hear the sound of running water. Yet -he was sure that the stream was less than ten -feet away from where he sat. He looked in the -direction of the stream but he didn’t see it. He -turned quickly to his companion and whispered, -“I don’t see it. Isn’t it supposed to be right -there?”</p> - -<p>Wallace grinned. “Correct,” he remarked. -“But that’s another thing, one yard away from -the stream and you don’t see it any more. Notice -how cleverly, yet how naturally it is hidden.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded and looked around in amazement. -He crept up on his knees, then stood up and still -he couldn’t see the stream. He wanted to walk -over there and assure himself that the stream was -there but he was afraid of arousing suspicion. He -sat down again and Wallace continued. “One -more link in the chain,” he said. “About half a -mile down this side of the mountain, there is a -cave—a natural cave. I came upon it accidentally.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Did you go inside?” queried Jack eagerly.</p> - -<p>“I only took a peek inside. Then I heard a noise -or at least I thought I heard a noise and I jumped -away, thinking that I would hide behind some -shrubbery or something. But I never saw it again -because I couldn’t find it.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?”</p> - -<p>“Just what I said. I looked for it, I retraced -my steps as carefully as I knew how, but no cave.”</p> - -<p>Both boys remained silent for a while. Jack -seemed to be lost in thought. Finally he asked, -“Is that the whole story?”</p> - -<p>Wallace nodded. “Yes.”</p> - -<p>Jack shook his head. “Doesn’t seem to make -sense.”</p> - -<p>“That’s what I told you before,” insisted his -companion.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER VIII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">The Mystery Becomes Complicated</span></p> - -<p>Jack and Wallace joined the other boys in their -singing. Later there circulated around the camp -fire a series of humorous anecdotes followed by -tall stories, each boy trying to improve upon the -previous tale. Nuthin’ was doing his best to hold -the attention of his listeners (and he was succeeding -fairly well) with a ghost story which he had -read in a magazine, but was relating as a personal -incident. Suddenly Paul, possessing the sharpest -ear among the group, wheeled around and listened -carefully. The noise that he thought he -heard stopped. Dropping on his stomach, he put -his ear to the ground. A couple of minutes later, -they could all hear various small noises, that -sounded like the breaking of twigs or rolling -stones set loose. Somebody was coming. Silent, -awaiting the arrival of whoever it was, they sat -hushed around the fire and stared expectantly at -the probable spot where he would emerge. Tense, -eager, every moment was an hour and the five or -six minutes they waited seemed like an age. Finally<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span> -a short, husky man, with a brutal face, emerged -out of the woods and stepped into the light. He -glanced from one boy to another. His facial features -were distorted by his smile. At last he spoke. -“Hello, fellows,” he said, his voice a bit raucous -and loud. “Did I scare you?”</p> - -<p>Paul stood up. “Why, no,” he answered calmly, -“not at all. Won’t you join us?”</p> - -<p>The man laughed with a gurgle in his throat. -“Sure,” he answered, “but only for a couple of -minutes. I have a shack a couple of miles yonder,” -and he pointed in the general westerly direction. -He joined the circle of boys around the fire. -“What are you fellows doing here?” he asked.</p> - -<p>Paul answered for all of them. “We’re seven -Boy Scouts,” he said, “and we’re camping here -for a week.”</p> - -<p>“A week!” he exclaimed. He mused and -stroked his chin. “Where are you boys from?” he -inquired further.</p> - -<p>“Stanhope,” he was told.</p> - -<p>“Stanhope! I go down there about once every -two weeks for supplies. But why do you boys -camp here? I can tell you of a far better place to -camp.”</p> - -<p>“Where?” one of the boys asked him.</p> - -<p>“About three miles northwest of here,” he -answered.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span></p> - -<p>They all guessed at once that he was referring -to their old camping site. A couple of the boys -were on the verge of telling him that they knew -all about the place. But Jack spoke up first and -asked, “What sort of a place is it?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, it’s a very good camp site,” he answered. -“There is a large clearing where you can play -ball or any other game, and a large stream where -you can go fishing and swimming.” he paused, -glanced from one boy to another, then added, -“Oh, it’s a far better camping site than this.”</p> - -<p>“Where did you say this place was, sir?” asked -Paul, affecting ignorance.</p> - -<p>“Almost directly northwest of here,” the man -replied with what seemed undue eagerness. “You -can’t miss it.”</p> - -<p>All the boys nodded in unison, as though they -understood perfectly the directions he was giving -them. In silence they wondered why the man was -so anxious to have them move from their present -camping ground. He tried hard not to betray his -eagerness and anxiety, but he was a very poor -actor. Jack inquired, “Is there anything wrong -with this camping ground?”</p> - -<p>The man scratched his head. “Well,” he answered, -“not very much but it isn’t anywhere near -as good as the one I’m telling you about. You -really ought to go over there and see it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span></p> - -<p>Wallace spoke up, saying, “I’m sure the gentleman -has the best of intentions and if he says that -the camping ground he’s telling us about is superior -to this one, it must be so. In that case, it would -be a shame not to take advantage of the information. -The first thing tomorrow morning I’m going -over there and take a look. If it is all the gentleman -says it is, we’re going to move.”</p> - -<p>The man grinned, the curl of his lips betraying, -his deep self-satisfaction. “That boy is a smart -one,” he cried. “He’s got the right idea.” He -jumped to his feet. “Well, I’ll be going,” he announced. -“So long, fellows.”</p> - -<p>“So long.”</p> - -<p>He went in the direction he came from. The -boys held their breath and silently waited for fully -five minutes, until the man’s footsteps could no -longer be heard. Ken exploded. “Can you imagine -that?” he cried. “He said he was going the other -way and he walked back in the direction he came -from.”</p> - -<p>Paul held up his hand and motioned for order. -“Hush, fellows,” he said. “We can discuss this -quietly. Trees and bushes have ears, you know.”</p> - -<p>They huddled closely together and whispered -among themselves. Nuthin’ voiced the thought -that disturbed them all. “I wonder why he objects -to our camping here?” he asked.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span></p> - -<p>William answered, “That’s something we all -would like to know.”</p> - -<p>Bluff stuttered, “S-s-something m-must be up.”</p> - -<p>With a wave of his hand, William dismissed -Bluff’s remark. “Anybody can guess that,” he -said. “But what is it about, that’s what we want to -know.” He turned to the other boys. “I’m -stumped, I admit it,” he told them. “Can anybody -guess?”</p> - -<p>By the blank look on their faces he could tell -that all his companions were just as much in the -dark as he was. Jack whispered to Wallace, “You -think this has something to do with the story you -told me?”</p> - -<p>Wallace shrugged his shoulders. “I’m at a loss. -I can’t imagine.”</p> - -<p>Paul addressed them. “Fellows,” he said. -“There is something up, that we can all tell. -There must be a reason why he wants us to move -camp. But what the reason is and what it’s all -about, we can’t find out tonight. There’s nothing -we can do tonight anymore except go to sleep. -In the morning we will consider the whole thing -and see what we can do.”</p> - -<p>The boys were nonplussed, neither agreeing nor -disagreeing with Paul. They were loathe, however, -to turn in just then. The incident had the -effect of keeping them wide awake and of arousing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> -in them the curiosity to know what it was all -about. But it was evident that there was nothing -they could do that evening. So in spite of their -inclinations they all decided to go to sleep. But -just then Bluff spoke up and inspired a new argument. -“D-d-don’t you think that w-w-we ought -t-t-take turns k-k-keeping guard?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Keep guard!” exclaimed Nuthin’, “What are -you talking about?”</p> - -<p>William jumped to Bluff’s defense. “Sure,” he -cried, “he’s got the right idea. We ought to keep -guard all night and watch out against any one -creeping up on us while we’re asleep.”</p> - -<p>At other times the boys would have laughed at -the suggestion. But their thoughts were such -that the idea appealed to them and seemed -reasonable.</p> - -<p>Paul objected. “Don’t be foolish,” he said. -“Who’ll creep up on us? Who’ll want to harm -us?”</p> - -<p>William retorted hotly. “How should I know? -But you were a witness to what happened tonight. -You’ll admit that the stranger was eager to have -us move camp. There must be a reason for it. -And—”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” interjected Wallace, “but does that imply -that he wants to harm us or attack us? I think<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span> -you’re permitting your imagination to run away -with you—like that time with the ghost.”</p> - -<p>That remark broke the ice and the boys laughed -heartily, recalling the ghost incident. The boys -then dismissed all thoughts of danger and decided -to retire. It had been a big day for them and they -were very tired. They slept soundly all through -the night without awakening or being disturbed.</p> - -<p>In the morning before breakfast, Jack took -Paul aside and the two carried on a hurried, whispered -conversation. They then called over Wallace -and the three withdrew for a serious conference. -After Wallace had told his story, Paul -asked, “Well, what’s your opinion of the whole -thing?”</p> - -<p>Wallace said, “It’s my impression that there -is some connection between the incidents, but -what it is I don’t know.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded. “I’m somewhat of the same opinion,” -he commented.</p> - -<p>“Let’s not try to solve the puzzle now,” remarked Paul. -“Are you two agreed that we ought -to move camp?”</p> - -<p>A decisive yes was Jack’s answer and Wallace -approved, saying, “Same here.”</p> - -<p>“In that case we’ll have to convince the other -fellows that we should move,” said Paul.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Do you think we ought to tell them the rest of -the story?” inquired Wallace of his two friends.</p> - -<p>Jack shook his head. “I don’t think it will help -any or serve any good purpose,” he asserted. “It -will only excite them.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” added Paul. “It’s a shame we have to -keep it a secret from them, but I think we’re justified. -My opinion is that we should convince them -somehow that we ought to move. In the meanwhile, -just as soon as you two can get away, -you’ll slip out quietly and explore the woods for -a couple of miles around and return in time for -lunch. We’ll break camp and move after lunch.”</p> - -<p>As the boys were having breakfast and making -wild guesses to solve the mystery, a large airplane -appeared in the sky, circled at a very low -altitude directly over their camp and then flew -away again. The boys stopped eating and kept -their eyes glued to the machine. One of the boys -remarked, “Wonder who that is and what he -wants?”</p> - -<p>Someone suggested, “Maybe it’s Major McCarthy -looking for us.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t be silly,” was the snappy answer of -someone else.</p> - -<p>Wallace noticed Jack writing something down -in his notebook. “What is it you’re writing?” he -asked.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack shrugged his shoulders. “The numbers on -the plane. It might come in handy sometime.”</p> - -<p>The plane disappeared into the horizon and the -boys resumed their breakfast. For a while they -discussed whether the airplane appearing overhead -had any connection with the stranger of -the previous night. The arguments for and against -were about evenly divided. Then Paul opened the -discussion by remarking casually, “Well, fellows, -do you think we ought to break camp and move?”</p> - -<p>William was the first to object. “What for?” -he wanted to know.</p> - -<p>Wallace explained. “We all know,” he said, -“that the stranger who was here last night must -have good reason for wanting us to move away -from here. Whatever it may be, it is most advisable -for us to go away.”</p> - -<p>“But this is a good camp site,” argued William, -“so why should we go away. Nobody is going to -harm us.”</p> - -<p>“Last night you thought differently,” Jack reminded -him.</p> - -<p>“All right, what I want to do is stick around -and see what happens,” he confessed.</p> - -<p>“If you do that, you might regret it,” warned -Paul. A few of the boys gasped, and he hurried -to explain his statement. “What I mean,” he -added, “is that you don’t wait until your car is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span> -stolen before you lock the garage. I’m sure no -harm would come to us if we stayed here, but -why stay here and wait for someone to come and -kick us when we can avoid it?”</p> - -<p>He spoke with a certain anxiety and he transmitted -it to the other boys, for they kept silent for -a while. Ken, however, sided with William and -he remarked, “Paul is perfectly logical and reasonable, -but I still don’t see why we should run away. -Nothing has happened to us and I imagine that -the stranger last night was some crank who has a -shack somewhere around here.”</p> - -<p>William supported his friend’s argument. -“That’s right,” he said, “There’s no reason for -us to turn tail and run away.”</p> - -<p>His twin brother explained, “It isn’t a matter -of turning tail or running away. An ounce of prevention -is worth a pound of cure. If we can prevent -any trouble, why shouldn’t we do it?”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ said, “Let’s stop arguing and take a -vote on it. Then we’ll see how the land lies.”</p> - -<p>A vote was taken and the majority favored -the proposal that they break camp and move. On -Paul’s suggestion it was decided to break camp -after lunch.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER IX</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Clues</span></p> - -<p>At a nod from Paul, Jack and Wallace soon -slipped away into the woods. When they were -a safe distance away, Jack called a halt to consider -carefully their first move. They had taken -the direction in which the stranger had gone. -Wallace proposed, “I think that the first thing -we can do is follow the stranger’s trail.”</p> - -<p>Jack mused for some seconds. Finally he replied, -“I guess it wouldn’t hurt to do that, but -I don’t think it will be possible.”</p> - -<p>“Why?”</p> - -<p>“Because if the stranger had a good reason to -want us to move, and knowing that we’re Boy -Scouts and capable of following a trail, he -wouldn’t be so stupid as to leave a trail for us -to follow.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” agreed Wallace, “that’s very logical. -But what else can we do?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing yet. For the present let’s see if we can -follow the trail.”</p> - -<p>For about a quarter of a mile they had no difficulty -in following the trail. Soon they came to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span> -a rocky ledge and the trail disappeared. The boys -therefore decided to separate and examine the -ground within a radius of a hundred yards. Jack -was busily engaged looking for signs of a trail -when he heard a sharp whistle and he knew that -Wallace was calling him. Again the whistle broke -the silence of the mountain and he determined -the approximate spot where it was coming from. -He found Wallace sitting on a rock and waiting -for him. A short distance away were some footprints -that Wallace had come upon. They followed -the trail for about a hundred yards when -Jack called a halt. He got on his knees and examined -the footprint very carefully. Nodding his -head satisfactorily, he said, “I’m pretty sure it’s -the same footprint all right. Notice, however, -the direction the trail seems to follow.”</p> - -<p>Both boys took out their compasses. “The trail -seems to be leading to our old camp site,” averred -Wallace.</p> - -<p>“Correct,” pronounced Jack. “Therefore we’re -going to disregard it.”</p> - -<p>“What should be our next move then?” inquired -Wallace.</p> - -<p>“The cave,” replied Jack. “We ought to try -and locate the cave.”</p> - -<p>They returned to the ledge and sat down to -determine their position. For that purpose they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span> -drew a map. A small circle indicated their camp -site; a wavering line, running northwest, and another -circle indicated their old camp site. Then -they put in the path they had followed and approximately -their position. “Now,” said Jack, -“according to your best knowledge, about where do -you think the cave should be situated?”</p> - -<p>Wallace bent over the map and drew a double -line. “This,” he said, “is the stream, west of our -camp site. The cave, therefore, should be directly -south. In that case we have to return to camp -and—”</p> - -<p>Jack interrupted. “No,” he said, “we won’t do -that. We’ll cut across.”</p> - -<p>Wallace approved the plan. Rising, the boys -determined by compass the exact direction they -had to follow. The first thing they had to do was -to drop from the ledge about eight feet below. -After that, they were obliged to take a descending -route and at the same time cut across in the general -direction of the camp. Pretty soon they -reached a level plateau heavily wooded. Indian -file, one behind the other, they walked along -slowly and carefully. Suddenly they came upon a -large clearance, circular and with possibly a little -less than half a mile radius. Jack lay down on -his stomach and Wallace did likewise. Jack said, -“Quick, seeing this field, what’s the first thing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span> -that comes to your mind?” Wallace shook his -head. Jack added, “Remember the airplane circling -overhead this morning? Now put two and -two together.”</p> - -<p>Wallace whistled. “An airport!” he exclaimed.</p> - -<p>“Correct!”</p> - -<p>For a while they continued lying on their -stomachs and carefully examined the field and the -outlying woods. Absolute silence reigned. Not a -sound, not a moving shadow, as far as they could -see or hear. Finally Wallace whispered, “What -now?”</p> - -<p>The two boys rose and, single file, Jack leading, -they walked through the woods, keeping within -sight of the clearing but trying hard to keep -themselves hidden. Jack stepped on a twig and it -snapped, the sound echoing loud through the dead -silence of the woods. He stopped and the two -boys remained rooted to the spot for at least five -minutes. They continued. Every once in a while -they strained their ears to listen. Not a sound. -Wallace suggested they again approach the edge -of the clearing. Getting down on their hands and -knees they crept up to the very edge of the woods. -Lying on their stomachs, they let their eyes roam -all around the field. Suddenly Jack grasped Wallace -by the wrist. “Ouch!” he cried.</p> - -<p>Jack cautioned him to be silent. “Sh!” he hissed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> -and put a finger over his lips. Then he pointed. -Wallace shook his head; he saw nothing. Again -Jack pointed, but his friend still saw nothing. -“You remain here and keep your eyes wide open. -I’m going to creep out and get it.” He crept forward -on his stomach for about ten feet, then -crept back, dragging something along. Crouching -alongside his friend, he showed him the object -and whispered, “Rifle!”</p> - -<p>Wallace nodded. “What’s your opinion?” he -asked.</p> - -<p>His companion shook his head. “Don’t know,” -he whispered.</p> - -<p>“Arms smugglers!” Wallace seriously suggested.</p> - -<p>They examined the weapon. It was an old style -army rifle. Jack whispered, “You may be right -about ‘them’ being arms smugglers, but I have -my doubts. If you consider, you find that smuggled -arms can have only one destination—South -America. And we’re too far away from the Mexican -border.”</p> - -<p>Wallace clutched his friend by the sleeve. -“That’s just it,” he answered eagerly. “Just because -we’re so far away from the Mexican border, -they have less chance of being caught or -suspected.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack mused. “Hm! you may be right. But what -do you think we ought to do now? Return to -camp or what?”</p> - -<p>Simultaneously, both boys flattened out. Two -men emerged from the woods, no more than about -seven or eight feet in front of them. The boys -nudged each other. One of the men was the stranger. -The other man was saying, loud enough so -the boys could hear, “Okey, then, we’ll be here tomorrow -at the usual time. And make sure those -Boy Scouts are gone.”</p> - -<p>The stranger answered, “Okey, Chief. But suppose -they don’t go, how am I to get rid of them?”</p> - -<p>“Frighten them away, scare them, but don’t use -any violence,” the Chief answered.</p> - -<p>The stranger saluted. “Okey, Chief, I’ll do just -as you say.”</p> - -<p>They parted and the Chief walked across the -clearing while the stranger turned on his heel -and entered the woods again. The two boys lay -there flattened to the ground, not daring to -breathe, lest they give themselves away. They -watched the Chief cross the clearing and enter the -woods at the other end. Ten minutes elapsed before -they dared to utter a whisper. Jack said, -“The cave! Let’s try to locate it.”</p> - -<p>“What about the rifle?”</p> - -<p>“We’ll leave it here. We have no use for it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p> - -<p>They crept along noiselessly to the approximate -spot where the stranger entered the woods. -Using that as their starting point, they searched -everywhere but didn’t find a sign of the cave. Not -even the slightest clue. Finally Wallace suggested -that they return to camp and Jack agreed.</p> - -<p>At camp, Jack and Wallace had not been -missed for a while. Paul kept a sharp eye on the -boys to see that they didn’t walk off. Soon Ken -suggested that they do something. William cried, -“Sure, let’s have a knot-tying contest. Get the -fellows together.”</p> - -<p>When the boys assembled, it was evident that -two of the group were missing. Someone said, -“Hey, Jack and Wallace aren’t here.”</p> - -<p>They all looked at each other in astonishment. -Paul remarked casually, “I saw them only about -a minute ago. They must have walked somewhere -and will surely come right back.”</p> - -<p>Bluff offered a solution. “L-l-let’s have the c-c-contest -without t-them,” he proposed.</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” seconded Paul. “If they’re not -here, it’s their hard luck.”</p> - -<p>They proceeded with the contest. As time wore -on all the boys became strangely conscious of the -absence of the two boys. To dispel their fears, -Paul remarked, “They must have gone out reconnoitering. -They’ll surely be back soon.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span></p> - -<p>As Jack and Wallace did not come back, the -boys began to harbor all sorts of fears. Each boy -made believe that he wasn’t at all worried. Time -hung heavy on their hands and the morning -seemed to stretch out into an eternity. Soon the -boys lost all interest in what they were doing and -just sat around doing nothing, keeping intensely -silent. When someone did dare to whisper, the -sound seemed to shatter the air and grate on their -nerves. Finally, as lunch time approached, William -jumped to his feet and cried, “Why are we -sitting here like dummies? A couple of us ought -to go out looking for them.”</p> - -<p>Paul spoke calmly and with reserve. He said, -“It wouldn’t do to search for them now. To begin -with, we don’t know which way they went. -Secondly, they haven’t been missing such a terribly -long time. In all likelihood they’ll return to -camp soon.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” echoed Ken. “Let’s prepare lunch and -that will give us something to do and keep us -busy for a while.”</p> - -<p>The only one who objected was William. -Words or arguments he felt were futile, so he -just gritted his teeth and helped prepare lunch. -When it was done, they waited a while and then -silently agreed to eat and leave some over for -the boys. Even Paul was becoming worried. He<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span> -distinctly told them not to be absent long. And it -was almost six hours now that they were gone. He -didn’t himself know what to do, whether to send a -searching party out for them or merely sit tight -and wait. Rising, he walked over to the stream for -a drink of water. And just then the three met face -to face. Paul was angry. “What kept you away so -long?” he demanded.</p> - -<p>He felt relieved that at last they were back. -Jack quickly summarized their experiences. Then -he asked, “Did they miss us?”</p> - -<p>“And how! There is only one thing to do now -and that’s to tell them everything.”</p> - -<p>“We might as well,” agreed Wallace, and Jack -had no objection either.</p> - -<p>The boys walked into the clearing. Nuthin’ -was the first to notice them and he screamed, -“Hey, fellows, here they are!”</p> - -<p>Instantaneously, Jack and Wallace were surrounded -and plied with questions. “Where have -you two been?” someone demanded.</p> - -<p>“What’s the idea of disappearing without telling -us?” they were reproached.</p> - -<p>William shook a threatening finger under his -brother’s nose. “You ever do that again,” he -warned, “and I’ll—I’ll spank you.”</p> - -<p>The boys laughed. Paul said, “They’re hungry,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span> -fellows. Let them eat first and then we’ll make -them tell us all about it.”</p> - -<p>Jack and Wallace had their lunch. The other -boys gathered around the two and Wallace told -the first part of the story. When he was through -talking, some of the boys shook their heads in -amazement. William exclaimed dolefully, “And -you never even mentioned it to us.”</p> - -<p>Wallace was embarrassed. He replied modestly, -“There was nothing to tell. It might have -sounded fishy.”</p> - -<p>Jack then appropriated the floor and narrated -their adventures of that morning. In conclusion, he -said, “You fellows now know all the facts. I must -impress upon you, however, the necessity of absolute -secrecy. To begin with, the wrong ears may -hear the story and then it will be too bad. Secondly, -there is not enough evidence to call in the -police. There is nothing we can prove. They would -say that we invented it all just to get a lot of -publicity. And that isn’t true, is it fellows?”</p> - -<p>Ken contributed the remark, “If this thing is -ever solved, we’ll have to do it ourselves.”</p> - -<p>They all agreed that that was right.</p> - -<p>William inquired, “But isn’t there something -we can do now?”</p> - -<p>Paul replied, “Yes, there is.” The boys were -all attention. “What we can do now,” he said, “is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span> -to break camp and move. We’ll postpone further -discussion until after we have pitched camp again -at the old site.”</p> - -<p>The boys enjoyed heartily the dramatic manner -in which Paul had aroused their curiosity only -to tell them something which was routine. They -jumped to their feet and immediately got busy. By -sunset they had moved.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER X</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Flying Instructions</span></p> - -<p>With the first ray of sunrise, Wallace was up. -He dressed himself hurriedly, donned a sweater -to keep warm, and then sat down on a rock to -watch the sky. He had a suspicion that something -would happen and that the incident would -occur in the air. He didn’t dare walk up and down -to keep himself warm because he feared that the -noise of his footsteps would awaken some of the -boys. So he quietly built a fire to keep himself -warm. After he had watched the sky for an hour -a plane appeared on the horizon. It flew nearer -and nearer, circled about where he thought the -mysterious airport was, then nosed down as if -to land, which it evidently did. Wallace became -terribly excited. His suspicions bore truth. And -now he didn’t know what to do. He paced up and -down several times, musing, thinking hard. His -first impulse was to go down there himself, but -he immediately discounted it.</p> - -<p>He awakened Paul, who listened eagerly to his -story. Wallace reminded him of his suspicion -that a plane would land there in the early morning, -and that was what had happened. Paul<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span> -dressed hurriedly. Leaving behind a note, the -two set off at a rapid pace. Just as they were about -to reach the wooded plateau, the drone of an airplane -motor was heard. They looked up, but the -sky was hidden by the branches of the trees. -When they at last reached the clearing, it was -empty and still. They spent about half an hour -searching the woods, but it was in vain. They returned -to camp and told their comrades. A lot -of discussion ensued and it was finally decided -that every day a detail of two boys should go -down there, to see what they could discover. But -it was all in vain. When the time came for them -to return to Stanhope, a week later, they had -discovered nothing new.</p> - -<p>As the boys reached the outskirts of the -town, about six in the evening, they lined up and -marched down Main Street. On the very same -spot from which they departed, Paul sang out, -“Patrol, halt!” For several seconds they remained -at attention, with the eyes of many people -upon them. Then Paul snapped the command, -“Dismissed!” The boys broke formation and went -home.</p> - -<p>The boys did not propose to lose any time in -beginning their flying instructions. They set a definite -time, therefore, for all of them to meet, to go -out to the airfield in a group. Paul was a few minutes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span> -late, having been detained by his mother who -took a long time impressing upon him the importance -of being careful. When he joined the group, -they were all very much excited and discussed -their future adventures in the air. Ken and Nuthin’ -tried hard to appear just as excited as the -others, but it was an empty gesture. Paul, addressing -Ken, asked, “Anything wrong? You look -kind of green around the gills.”</p> - -<p>Ken made a gesture of dismissal. He answered, -“Nothing. It really doesn’t matter.”</p> - -<p>“But what is it?”</p> - -<p>The boy confessed sadly, “My parents absolutely -refused to allow me to fly.”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ heard the statement and he felt glad. -Not that he was glad that Ken was unable to -learn to fly, but misery loves company. He said, -“You’re not alone, Ken. The same tragedy here.” -And he made a comical gesture of weeping.</p> - -<p>Paul was disappointed. “Gee, that’s a shame. -I wonder if there is anything we can do about -it?”</p> - -<p>Both boys shook their heads listlessly. Ken remarked, -“You know my dad. When he puts his -foot down it’s like the Rock of Gibraltar.”</p> - -<p>“With me,” informed Nuthin’, “it’s my mother. -She actually wept, so my father wouldn’t give -me permission.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span></p> - -<p>“It’s a shame,” repeated Paul. “At any rate, -you two can come along and watch us. You can -at least get all the ground work.”</p> - -<p>The boys mounted their bicycles and were off. -At the airport, they were greeted by Major McCarthy. -“Hello, fellows,” he called.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Major,” answered several.</p> - -<p>“Did you have a good time while I was away?”</p> - -<p>“Very good,” said Paul.</p> - -<p>“And interesting,” informed William.</p> - -<p>Jack spoke. “We went camping.”</p> - -<p>“That should have been enjoyable and interesting,” -commented the major. Then he asked the -most pertinent question. “Are you ready for flying -instructions?”</p> - -<p>The boys shouted lustily and eagerly, “Yes, -yes.”</p> - -<p>“All of you have the permission of your -parents?”</p> - -<p>Paul answered for the group. “All except two—Ken -Armstrong and Albert Cypher.”</p> - -<p>“Hmm,” mused the major. “That’s too bad.” -He looked at the two unfortunate boys and they -appeared very ill at ease. To cheer them the -major said, “Well, not everyone can be a pilot. -Some of us have to do other work, quite naturally. -So we’ll make mechanics out of you. How about -it?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span></p> - -<p>The boys smiled gratefully. “Thank you, sir,” -answered Ken. “I’d love nothing better.”</p> - -<p>“That’s settled, then,” said McCarthy. “Now, -fellows, I have some good news for you. I’ve -made inquiries about obtaining a plane for you -boys and I have one definitely in mind. It’s a good -machine, in perfect order and perhaps in a week -or so it may be yours.”</p> - -<p>“Yea!” shouted William and all the boys -joined in. The major held up his hand and motioned -for silence. “Cheering is all to the good, -fellows, but if you want flying instructions, we -have no time to lose.”</p> - -<p>“Those are just our sentiments,” commented -Jack joyously.</p> - -<p>“Now,” began the major, “I’m to spend about -an hour or so explaining in detail the major parts -of an airplane. I want to teach you to be not only -pilots but your own mechanics. If something -should happen to a plane you’re flying, I want -you to know how to go about repairing the motor -or anything else that may be wrong. For that -reason I want you to spend a lot of your spare -time fussing with an old plane, which is used -just for that purpose. It is situated in the corner -hangar.” He paused for several seconds, then continued. -“Now about flying instructions. I can’t -instruct more than one of you at a time and no<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span> -more than two each day. So you’ll have to pair -off and you’ll all get a lesson every other three -days—that is, two lessons a week. Is that -understood?”</p> - -<p>“Yes!” shouted the boys in unison.</p> - -<p>“Very well, then, I’m going into the office for -a couple of minutes. In the meanwhile you can -pair off and also decide which pair will get their -instructions today, which tomorrow and the day -after.”</p> - -<p>To pair off, the boys drew lots. Three sets of -small pieces of paper were prepared, the two -pieces of each set numbered one, two and three. -The two boys who drew number one were partners, -numbers two and three likewise. The number -one pair was to receive its flying instructions -that day, number two on the following day, and -number three the day after. As it turned out, -Paul and William were the number one pair, Jack -and Bobolink number two and Wallace and Bluff -number three. The drawing of lots was fair -enough and there were no murmurs of disapproval -or dissatisfaction.</p> - -<p>When the major came out again, he showed -that he approved of what was done. In a group -he marched them over to the hangar which -housed the old plane and for about an hour he -lectured to them on the mechanics of an engine.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span> -When he was through, he sent them home for -lunch. Then he told the first pair, Paul and William, -to be back at the airport at three o’clock -for flying instructions.</p> - -<p>As the boys were mounting their bikes, Jack -whispered to his chum, “Fall behind with me, -Paul, I have something to tell you.”</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. Wheeling along about ten feet -behind the others, he asked, “What is it, Jack?”</p> - -<p>“It’s this, Paul. This morning I happened to -glance through the <i>Dispatch</i> and I came across -a small article stating that last Wednesday it was -discovered that several hundred army rifles were -stolen from an armory in New York and that the -crime had most likely been committed within the -past twenty-four hours.”</p> - -<p>“What about it?”</p> - -<p>Jack pursed his lips, mused for a moment, then -said, “Remember, Paul, last Wednesday morning -was when Wallace saw that airplane land at that -mysterious airport.”</p> - -<p>Paul cried, “By golly, that’s correct. Do you -really think that they are arms smugglers and -that this theft of army rifles has any connection -with that airplane landing at the mysterious -airport?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” answered Jack. “I’m wondering.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span> -But if you stop to consider, the parts seem -to fit the puzzle mighty well.”</p> - -<p>“You’re right Jack. What do you think we -ought to do? Do you think we ought to take -Major McCarthy into our confidence?”</p> - -<p>Shaking his head, he replied, “No, I don’t -think so. He might either tell it to the police and -we don’t have enough evidence for that; or he -might fly over there, land, and possibly complicate -everything.”</p> - -<p>Again Paul agreed with his chum, adding, -“Yes, we have to follow it up slowly. Another -thing, we must learn how to fly darn quick because -if we want to get anything on them we have -to do it in their way—by air.”</p> - -<p>“Correct,” said Paul. “For the present, we’ll -just let matters take their own course.”</p> - -<p>All the boys saw fit that afternoon to be at the -airport. Only Paul and William were to go up -for flying instructions but the others wanted to -be there to see what it was like. At a little past -three, the major came out of the office and approached -the group of boys. The two boys stepped -forward and William informed him, “We’re -ready, major, if you are.”</p> - -<p>Smiling, he said, “That’s fine. But now that -you’re all here, I’m going to tell you something -about flying.” All the boys gathered in front of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span> -him, forming a semi-circle. Very quietly and seriously -they listened to every word he said. “The -first thing I want to impress upon you, fellows,” -he began, “is that flying is not in the least dangerous, -providing, of course, you adhere strictly to -the rules and regulations of flying. Everything -has its rules which you must observe, flying is -not an exception. The most important rule in flying -is that you must never risk stalling your machine -near the ground. At no time must you lose -flying speed until you are at a safe altitude—approximately -five hundred feet above ground.</p> - -<p>“Now suppose your engine cuts out as you are -taking off, then what you must do is to push the -nose down and go straight ahead, regardless of -what is in front of you. If you cannot avoid running -into a shed, or a tree, or any other obstacle, -while landing, it just can’t be helped. You will -smash the machine but you yourself will not be -hurt. Another rule to remember is, never turn -back in order to return to the airport or some -other good landing ground. When you do that you -risk stalling your machine. And when you stall -near the ground, you usually lose control of your -machine, go into a spin and crash nose first into -the ground. And that may be the last time you -will ever fly.”</p> - -<p>“Those are a few elementary rules of flying.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span> -You’ll learn more as you go along. What you -must understand is that you must always obey -these rules, or take the consequences. I don’t -want to frighten you, but there are rules in every -game and you have to observe them.”</p> - -<p>He stopped and scanned the faces of the boys. -From every indication, they had taken his words -seriously and were convinced by his authoritative -tone of voice. Nothing more to say, the major -now called upon his first two pupils and inquired, -“Are you ready?”</p> - -<p>“Ready!” the two boys answered in unison and -precision.</p> - -<p>“Which one is going up first?”</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to choose,” answered Paul.</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy took a coin out of his pocket -and tossed it into the air. “Heads,” cried -William.</p> - -<p>“Tails,” cried Paul.</p> - -<p>Heads it was and William was the first to go -up for instructions. “Very well,” announced the -major, “let’s go.”</p> - -<p>The whole group followed the major and William -to one of the hangars. Two mechanics pushed -the training plane into the open. Again the major -turned to the group and said, “This is an Avro, -one of the finest training machines in the world. -She is light on the controls, very easy to handle<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> -and has an 80 h.p. Le Rhone engine. What kind -of an engine is it, anybody know?”</p> - -<p>William answered at once, with confidence, “A -rotary engine.”</p> - -<p>“Fine,” said the major. “And what kind of -engine is a rotary engine?”</p> - -<p>All the boys seemed to know that and the major -was pleased by their knowledge. However, he -called upon William to answer the question. “A -rotary engine is one which has the cylinders rotate -round the crankshaft which remains stationary,” -answered William correctly.</p> - -<p>“And what is another type of engine?”</p> - -<p>“A stationary engine.”</p> - -<p>“The crankshaft rotates round the cylinders.”</p> - -<p>“Correct,” announced the major with a gleam -of satisfaction in his eyes. “I can see,” he added, -“that I’m going to enjoy teaching you boys. All -right William, put this hat on and get the ear -pieces in the right position; I’ll be talking to you -all the time. And before we start, remember this, -if I hit you on the back take your hands and feet -off the controls immediately and put your hands -above your head which will show me that you -have obeyed my signal. Okey?”</p> - -<p>Wallace remarked, humorously, “Don’t hit -him too hard, major. I’d hate to take home a -corpse.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span></p> - -<p>Major McCarthy withdrew to the shed telling -William to get into the front seat. When he had -climbed into the rear seat, he said, “Now William, -don’t touch the controls until I tell you to. -In the meanwhile you can watch them working -because both sets of controls are connected and -work simultaneously. Are you ready?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> - -<p>The boys at the shed cheered lustily and William -waved his hand as Major McCarthy took -off. The machine rose lightly into the air and -was mounting fast into a clear sky, smoothly and -easily as a bird. William, was at first nervous and -tense, but soon he relaxed, his whole body seeming -to vibrate to the rhythm of the machine. Suddenly -he felt a light bump on the back and he -quickly threw his hands up into the air. The major -was rather surprised. Usually pupils during their -first lesson are too excited to remember the instructions -they have received. The major felt a glow -of satisfaction, and hoped that William would -respond to all instructions so quickly.</p> - -<p>They were about two thousand feet in the air. -William felt a thrill when he heard his instructor’s -voice through the telephone. The major was -saying to him, “Okey, William, in a couple of minutes -I’m going to let you fly the machine and you -must obey precisely all my instructions. Put your<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span> -hand on the joystick and your feet on the rudder -bar.”</p> - -<p>He complied. The next instant he felt a bump -on his back and quickly he put his hands above his -he had. McCarthy was delighted with the boy’s -quick response. “This boy,” he said to himself, -“is a natural born flyer.”</p> - -<p>The major’s voice was coming over the telephone. -“Okey, William,” it said, “you’re going -to fly the machine now. Only obey instructions -precisely.”</p> - -<p>McCarthy spoke gently and authoritatively. -William obeyed. The machine responded to his -slightest touch. William felt a certain power in -handling the machine and it thrilled him. The -major said, “Now when I give the command, -‘Right turn,’ you kick on the right rudder and -push the joystick over to the right. Ready? Now, -‘Right turn.’ Keep the same altitude.”</p> - -<p>The major kept talking most of the time, explaining -every movement and demonstrating his -instructions. They practiced banking, climbing, -diving. This was no ordinary pupil, the major -thought. He was aware that the other boys would -not respond as well as William, with whom he -progressed much more than with the average -pupil. To satisfy himself for the last time, he permitted -William to fly alone for several minutes,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span> -then tapped the boy on the back. Instantly the -latter’s hands flew above his head. The major, -deeply satisfied, said, “That was very good, William. -I think you’ve had more than enough for the -first lesson, so we’ll go back now.” Thus saying, -he took control of the machine.</p> - -<p>The boys cheered as the plane taxied to a -landing. As the instructor and his pupil climbed -out of the machine, the boys came running up. -“How did he do, major?” asked Wallace.</p> - -<p>McCarthy smiled, very much pleased with his -first pupil. “He did very well,” he announced.</p> - -<p>“Yea!” shouted Bobolink.</p> - -<p>“Hooray for William!” shouted Ken and -Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>When the boys quieted down again, the major -put his arm affectionately on William’s shoulder, -and said, “I don’t like to praise a pupil, because -he is apt to become cock-sure of himself. But this -time I can’t help praising him. William is a natural -born flyer. I don’t want any one of you to -feel badly if you’re not as good as he is because -there are very few who take to flying spontaneously. -I don’t want you to blame yourselves or -feel badly about it. It’s something that none of us -can help. We’re either born that way or not.”</p> - -<p>Jack asked, “Did he fly by himself already?”</p> - -<p>“He certainly did,” replied the major. “For<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span> -about fifteen minutes he flew the machine all by -himself.”</p> - -<p>The boys cheered, proud of their friend. William -was thrilled, but tried not to show it.</p> - -<p>It was Paul’s turn now. Instructor and pupil -took their respective places in the machine. Paul -was excited, tense. McCarthy was curious to know -how this boy would compare with William. He -repeated the directions for a second time. The -machine was climbing and they were gaining altitude. -Paul was thrilled as he examined the various -gadgets on the dashboard. Suddenly he felt a -bump on his back. He was bewildered. What had -happened. He turned around to see McCarthy -chuckling and enjoying the baffled look on his -face. The instructor said, “I told you to raise your -hands above your head as soon as I tap you on -the back. Keep alive.” Paul settled back in his -seat, feeling ashamed of himself. Suddenly he -again felt a tap on the back. Immediately he raised -his hands above his head. “Very good,” said McCarthy -encouragingly. Paul, too, would be a flyer, -but not like William.</p> - -<p>Soon Paul was at the controls and flying the -machine in response to the instructor’s guidance. -After the necessary instructions, McCarthy called -out, “Ready? Left turn.”</p> - -<p>Paul pushed out his left foot. The machine<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> -whipped to the left at a terrific speed. Suddenly he -felt the stick being pushed over to the left. Then -the right rudder bar moved forward, the stick -came back to the right, now they were flying level -once again. McCarthy had to intervene to help -him out. He explained the mistake and Paul nodded, -intimating that he understood. He was eager -to do it over again, to show that he could do it. -But this time the command was, “Right turn.” -Paul got it all right.</p> - -<p>After about thirty-five minutes of instructions, -they returned to the airport. They climbed out of -the machine and McCarthy inquired, “Well, how -did you like it?”</p> - -<p>“It was fine,” answered Paul grinning, “except -that I think I was a trifle dumb in responding.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, no, you weren’t,” McCarthy answered -him. “You were all right. For about ten minutes -you were flying all by yourself and I’m very -pleased with you.”</p> - -<p>Walking toward the office building, the major -commented, “I see now that I’m going to enjoy -teaching you boys. From the way it looks, I should -say that all of you are someday going to be mighty -fine flyers.”</p> - -<p>“How long before we can go solo?”</p> - -<p>“It all depends. About eight or ten lessons is -the average.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Baseball Game</span></p> - -<p>During the following weeks, the boys spent -the major part of their time at the airport. Most -of the boys were usually on hand when one of -them took off for a lesson. And if there was no -lesson, they spent their time dismantling the old -plane and putting it together again. Ken and -Nuthin’ became assistants to Fred, the chief mechanic. -These two boys imparted their technical -knowledge to their comrades.</p> - -<p>As for McCarthy, he was happy and really enjoyed -instructing the boys, because all of them -responded so quickly to training. He taught them -everything he knew about flying and found that -William learned more easily than the others. McCarthy -taught them to land, to take off, to do a -few simple stunts. After four lessons, William was -ready to solo. But his instructor wouldn’t permit -him because McCarthy wanted them all to go up -solo the same day, making it in the form of a -graduation exercise.</p> - -<p>In spite of their preoccupation in aviation, they -spent many half hours discussing the mysterious<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> -airport and its consequences. Whatever evidence -they had, however, was circumstantial and insufficient. -And they couldn’t think of taking time out -to do anything about it. The boys had other obligations, -temporarily forgotten, which also had -to be considered.</p> - -<p>One day Paul called the boys together. Most -of them were in overalls, their hands dirty with -grease and their faces smeared. Looking at each -other, they could not repress their smiles. Each -in his own way was rather a funny sight. Ken -laughed. “Hey, fellows, look at Bluff, will you?”</p> - -<p>Bluff was wearing a pair of overalls that were -much too large for him and his face was smeared -with grease. “You’re n-no Ap-p-pollo yourself,” -he countered.</p> - -<p>Wallace asked, “What is it you want to talk -to us about, Paul?”</p> - -<p>“It’s this, fellows. We have been so busy the -last few weeks, what with getting flying instructions -and spending most of our time at the airport, -that we have completely forgotten our baseball -game with the Slavin team. We haven’t practiced -at all and the game is only three days away.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps we can call the game off,” remarked -William.</p> - -<p>Several of the boys nodded in agreement, as -their interest in aviation was much stronger than<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span> -any thought of baseball just then. They were so -engrossed in their work that any excuse was sufficient -to try to break an agreement. Paul, however, -objected. He said, “I fully know that all of -us are more interested in our flying and all that, -but we can’t go back on our word. We promised -Ted Slavin and his team that we would play them -and we’ve got to keep our word.”</p> - -<p>Ken reminded the boys, “We also promised -them a swimming match. That’s something we -ought to practice up for, too.”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ asked, “Well what do you think we -ought to do, Paul?”</p> - -<p>“We have to keep our word and go through -with it,” was the answer. “Beginning tomorrow, -we have to keep away from the airport and spend -the next two days practicing.”</p> - -<p>“What about those who have flying lessons?” -Bobolink wanted to know.</p> - -<p>“Those who have lessons should not miss -them,” answered Paul. “But the rest of us will -have to keep away from the airport.”</p> - -<p>The boys agreed. William said, “All right, -then. Tomorrow morning we’ll meet at the baseball -field for practice.”</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy was glad to hear of their -plans for reasons of his own. He was a bit skeptical -of their sudden and overwhelming interest in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> -aviation, because he feared that they might drop -it just as suddenly and completely. Spending only -limited periods of time at the airport, therefore, -would test them. Besides, the major was also of -the opinion that they were too young to have only -one dominating interest, it was healthier for them -to have a series of interests.</p> - -<p>During the following two days, they spent -most of their time on the baseball field. And when -the day of the game arrived, they were in pretty -good shape. They had one worry, however. Wallace, -star pitcher for their team, had not come -around all morning. They sent William to find -out what had become of him.</p> - -<p>As the time for the game approached, a fair -crowd of townspeople had filled the stands. The -Ted Slavin team with Ted as pitcher, was warming -up, and some of his followers were encouraging -him to demonstrate his famous slow ball. The -opposing team, however, was in great agitation. -William, out of breath, came running up. Paul -guessed that William had accomplished nothing. -Nevertheless he asked, “Well, any news?”</p> - -<p>William gasped, “No. My mother said he left -for the airport in the morning and that he hasn’t -returned yet.”</p> - -<p>“Did you call the airport?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I did and Fred told me that he left hours -ago.”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head dejectedly. “Wonder what -could have happened to him?” he muttered.</p> - -<p>The boys formed a circle around Paul. Someone -asked, “You think there is any chance of calling -the game off?”</p> - -<p>“No. What for? Suppose we lose the game, -what difference would it make? We’ll play just -the same.” Most of the boys nodded in agreement. -Paul added, “All right, fellows, break it up. -Let’s not show that we’re handicapped and need -anyone’s pity. We’ll hold our own. Ken, are you -warming up? You’re going into the box to start -the game.”</p> - -<p>Ken nodded. “Okey. I’m ready.”</p> - -<p>Just then Major McCarthy came walking -across the field. The boys waved to him. Paul -greeted him. “Hello, major.”</p> - -<p>“Hello, Paul. Came over to see the game.” Paul -took the major by the arm and led him to one -side.</p> - -<p>“Wallace is missing,” he said. “He’s our star -pitcher; without him, we have no chance of winning. -But that’s beside the point. I’m worried -about him. You have no idea what happened to -him, do you?”</p> - -<p>The major shook his head. “Why, no,” he answered.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span> -“I gave him a lesson and he left the airport -at about ten. He even asked me to come -and watch him pitch the game.”</p> - -<p>“I can’t imagine what could have happened to -him. He’s nowhere to be found and nobody seems -to have seen him or heard from him.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sorry to hear it. Is there anything I can -do?”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head. “Guess not. You can sit -on our bench though, and watch the game.”</p> - -<p>“That’s swell. Thanks a lot.”</p> - -<p>Just then the umpire came up, followed by Ted -Slavin. “Ready?” asked the umpire.</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. “Yes.”</p> - -<p>“For up,” announced the umpire as he tossed -a coin. The Slavin team was to go to bat first. -“Who’s your pitcher?” the umpire asked.</p> - -<p>“Ken Armstrong.”</p> - -<p>Ted raised his eyebrows in astonishment. -“Where’s Wallace?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“He’ll be here in a short while. We’re saving -him.”</p> - -<p>Ted shrugged his shoulders. “Good luck,” he -called as he walked away.</p> - -<p>“Same to you,” countered Paul.</p> - -<p>Paul signalled to the boys to take the field. The -umpire took his place in the pitcher’s box and -called, “Batter up!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul was catching. He motioned to Ken to -meet him halfway. He said, “Don’t let them discourage -you. Let them hit; the boys out in the -field will back you up.”</p> - -<p>They separated and returned to their respective -positions. As Ken poised, measuring up the -first batter, a wave of applause and loud cheering -went up from the stands. His team-mates encouraged -him. “Alright, Ken, give it to him.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t be too hard on him, boy. Let him smell -it.”</p> - -<p>“Sure. That guy’ll never see it.”</p> - -<p>Paul signalled and Ken wound up. He took his -time pitching the first ball. The batter patted the -home plate with the bat as the umpire called, -“Strike one!”</p> - -<p>“That’s the boy, show him your dust.”</p> - -<p>“Pity the poor guy! He’ll die without moving -a leg.”</p> - -<p>Ken wound up. He threw the ball. The batter -gripped his bat, swung it and ran toward first base. -Ken stuck his gloved hand out and pulled it in -again. Everybody looked for the ball but nobody -saw where it went. The umpire called, “Out!” -Then Ken took the ball between his fingers and -held it up for public inspection. A wave of laughter -rolled slowly across the field. The hit had been<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span> -a fast level one and Ken had snapped it out of -the air so quickly that no one saw it.</p> - -<p>The second batter was at the plate. Ken -poised; without winding up, he pitched. The batter -swung. It was a pop fly. Ken ran forward several -feet, caught the ball and threw it to Bluff at -first base. The ball then travelled to Bobolink at -third, to William at second and back to Ken.</p> - -<p>The third batter was up. Ken took his time -measuring up the fellow. The batter stood at ease -as the ball bounced with a plop into the catcher’s -mitt. The umpire called, “Strike one.” Paul signalled -and Ken threw the ball. The batter gripped -his stick, but at the last moment he shook his head -and let it pass. “Ball one!” called the umpire. The -third ball came sailing down the line, fast, an inside -curve. The batter stepped back and swung. -The ball sailed away far out in left field. Nuthin’ -saw the ball coming; he walked back several steps, -waited for the ball to drop into his glove, then -threw it to William at second.</p> - -<p>The boys threw their gloves into the air as they -ran in from the field. “That’s the boy, Ken!” they -called, “that’s showing them.”</p> - -<p>Ted Slavin was pitching for his team. He was -a good man. Several semi-pro teams were out to -sign him up but he held out. He was now in good -form and he struck out the first batter in three<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span> -pitched balls. The second batter made an attempt -to hit the ball but he merely scraped it and the -ball went up into the air and was caught by the -catcher. The third man also struck out.</p> - -<p>In the second inning, the Slavin team sent a -man to first and third but they died on base. Paul -started off for his team with a double but he died -on third. During the next inning, the boys were -kept on their toes backing up Ken. A grounder to -the shortstop precipitated a double play to second -and first. Ted, on the other hand struck out his -three batters in quick succession.</p> - -<p>The fourth inning began with the Slavin team -set to send in a couple of runs. The first man up -bunted and landed safely at first. The second batter -placed a swift grounder between the pitcher -and first base. Bluff went after it and threw the -ball to second. William tried hard to get it but it -was far over his head. The spectators were on -their feet, yelling themselves hoarse. William -dashed after the ball and threw it, but the runner -was already safe on third. Ken got the ball. He -looked at the men on second and third. Bobolink -called, “Don’t worry, Ken, they’ll die on base.”</p> - -<p>Someone else called encouragingly, “Come on, -fellow, show them your speed.”</p> - -<p>“Strike him out!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span></p> - -<p>Ken poised then pitched the ball. The batter -swung and missed. The next ball was a strike. -The batter gripped his bat and swung as the ball -came hurtling through the air. Bobolink took several -steps forward and very easily gathered in the -ball.</p> - -<p>Two men out and men on second and third. -Paul signalled to Ken and the two met midway -between home plate and the pitcher’s box. Ken -inquired anxiously, “Well?”</p> - -<p>Paul answered, “Nothing in particular. Just -thought I’d give you a minute to relax. Don’t -worry if they hit you; it can’t be helped. You’ve -been doing swell so far.”</p> - -<p>The pitcher nodded. “Okey. Thanks.”</p> - -<p>Each walked back to his respective position. -Ken poised, ready to pitch. Paul signalled and -the pitcher hurled the ball. The batter looked unconcerned, -but suddenly he tightened his grip on -the bat and swung. Crack! The sound was like a -pistol shot. The ball sailed high and far out into -left field. Nuthin’ ran far back and as the ball began -to drop out of the air, he jumped. The crowd -was on its feet, hushed, its eyes glued to the ball. -The men on base were running toward home -plate; the batter was already at second. Suddenly -the crowd gasped sounding like a wave breaking. -Nuthin’ had missed the ball by inches. He scampered<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> -after it and threw it wildly to second. William -ran for it but it was too wide. The spectators -were shouting madly; the Slavin team were dancing -wildly as the man crossed home plate safely.</p> - -<p>The din and noise still sounded in his ears as -Ken poised to pitch again. He turned around to -see if every player was in his place. But it was -totally unnecessary. He struck the batter out and -that ended the spectacle. Coming in from the -field, the players managed to smile, joke and even -laugh. They slapped Ken on the back and told -him not to worry. It was their chance now and -they would more than get even.</p> - -<p>The boys went to bat gripped with determination -to send in some runs but their enthusiasm was -destroyed by Ted’s mastery in the box. He teased -the first batter with two balls and then struck him -out. When the second walked up to the plate, Ted -repeated his performance. The spectators cheered -and his team-mates encouraged him. Bobolink -held his bat lightly and walked slowly to the plate. -The boys encouraged him. “Come on, Bobolink,” -someone shouted, “sock the old pill.”</p> - -<p>“Hit it a mile, boy!”</p> - -<p>“Sock it, kid!”</p> - -<p>Bobolink gripped the bat compressed his lips -and waited for the ball. Ted thought he again -would repeat his former performance of teasing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span> -the batter. He put over a fast ball, cutting the inside -edges of the plate. Bobolink stepped back -and swung. The spectators jumped to their feet, -watching the ball sail through the air, while they -held their breaths. Bobolink was notably a hard -hitter. Suddenly a shout rumbled across the field. -People cheered; others muttered their disgust. -The player in left field knew the batter’s ability to -hit and had moved far back. As the ball came sailing -out, he was obliged to run further back, suddenly -he realized that the ball would come down -further on his right; the next second he lunged -forward with extended arm, caught the ball barehanded -and held on to it as he nearly tripped over -himself. The inning was over and the players -came in from the field.</p> - -<p>Ken walked to the pitcher’s box and Paul took -his place behind the home plate. An agitation -rolled slowly through the stands. Play for play, -Ken and his players far outshone the other team. -True enough, Ted was doing some mighty fine -pitching, but except for the single catch, his team -wandered about idle at their posts. The other -team, however, was of unequalled showmanship. -Dramatically they pulled the ball out of the air, -off the ground, staged a double-play that took -people’s wind away. If only Wallace was in the -box! Some murmurs began to circulate. “Wallace!<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span> -Where’s Wallace!” But he was nowhere to -be seen. The umpire called, “Batter up!”</p> - -<p>Ken was piqued by all the muttering and mumbling -around him. The effect upon him was surprising; -it steeled him. He relaxed. Absolutely confident, -he pitched superbly. Three men up, three -men out. Not one of them even so much as swung -a bat. They were so bewildered by the pitcher’s -fury that they barely saw the ball whizz by them -and before they realized it, they heard the plop -of the ball in the catcher’s mitt.</p> - -<p>Again the young aviators were at bat. The -team determined to break the spell and send in a -couple of runs. The first batter bunted and -landed safely at first. Ted evidently sensed the determination -of his opponents, for he became ill at -ease. To relax, he summoned the catcher and they -met midway; for several seconds they whispered -to each other, then returned to their respective -positions. The batter waited patiently for the -pitcher to get going. Somebody in the stand -shouted, “Hit it, boy, sock it!”</p> - -<p>“Sock it a mile!” someone else screamed.</p> - -<p>Ted poised. He put all his strength into the -ball as he hurled it. The batter didn’t move a -muscle. “Ball one!” called the umpire.</p> - -<p>“Put it over!” someone shouted.</p> - -<p>“Play ball!” shouted another.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span></p> - -<p>Again Ted put all his strength into the ball. -The batter gritted his teeth. Crack! The hit was -a straight and low one, directly between the shortstop -and third basemen. Both players went for it, -collided as they tried to pick it off the ground. -The batter went to first and the man on first went -safely to second.</p> - -<p>Ted was unnerved. “You have his mark!” -someone in the stands shouted.</p> - -<p>“Hit it, hit it!” was the cry of someone else.</p> - -<p>Ted spit on the ball. Out of the corner of his -eye he could see the man on first draw away from -the base. Like a flash he wheeled and threw the -ball. The first baseman lunged wildly for the ball -but he missed by at least a foot. Shouts, cheers, -groans rolled through the stands. Jack, coaching, -at first, danced wildly and screamed, “Run, run!” -Each man advanced a base.</p> - -<p>Ken was up. He felt that now was the time to -even the score. He had to do something. With a -man on second and third, no outs, now was their -chance. But Ted rallied sufficiently to strike the -batter out. Once more Ted became confident and -self-assured. There was no danger, he thought; he -will strike the next two men out and show his -mettle. But his confidence deceived him. The batter -picked the first ball and hit a long fly which -was caught, but which helped the man on third to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span> -come home and the man on second to advance to -third base. Ted was now sufficiently unnerved to -realize it himself. He signalled to a player on the -sidelines; he waited until the relief pitcher began -to come across the field, then started to walk off -himself.</p> - -<p>“Yea!” shouted a spectator.</p> - -<p>“Knock this guy out of the box, too,” another -spectator screamed.</p> - -<p>“Swell showman,” said Paul.</p> - -<p>“You said it,” agreed Jack. “He knows when -to quit and that’s to his credit.”</p> - -<p>The relief pitcher warmed up with a couple of -throws. Finally the umpire called, “Batter up!”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ touched the home plate with his bat, -held up the stick vertically for a fraction of a -second, as a signal to the man on base, and then -waited for the pitcher. The man in the box was -perfectly confident and took his time. It was a -trick to vex the batter and force him to strike, but -Nuthin’ was a patient fellow and he waited. The -first ball came over, at least a foot outside the -plate. “Ball one!” called the umpire. The catcher -threw back the ball and Nuthin’ let fall the bat off -his shoulder. The pitcher eyed the man on third -base; then turned to the batter. Nuthin’ gripped -the bat. Shifting his position slightly, he struck at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span> -the ball. It was a foul, a couple of yards off third -base. “That’s the boy!” someone shouted.</p> - -<p>“You got his number!” was another encouraging -phrase hurled by someone in the stands.</p> - -<p>His team-mates encouraged him. “Hit it, Nuthin’. -Just sock it once,” Bobolink urged.</p> - -<p>The pitcher was not to be dissuaded from his -easy going manner. And similarly Nuthin’ was -not to be vexed; he was willing to wait, though he -realized how much depended upon him. If he -managed at least to send home the man on base, -his team would be sufficiently encouraged to possibly -even the score; if he was struck out, on the -other hand, they might not get a similar chance -again for the rest of the game. But all that didn’t -confuse him. The next ball was wide and he didn’t -move a muscle. The umpire called “Ball two!” -The next ball he lunged at, and again fouled. -“Strike two!” called the umpire.</p> - -<p>The spectators in the stands sat hushed, waiting -and watching. His team-mates hoped for the -best, but they, too, remained silent. The pitcher -hurled the ball. Nuthin’ watched it coming and -thought it would be too wide; the next instant he -realized his mistake; the ball curved and cut the -edge of the plate. “Strike three and out!” called -the umpire.</p> - -<p>The score was 3-1, in favor of the Slavin team.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span> -And so it remained for awhile. The game now became -quieter and more steady; no dramatics. Ted -returned to the box and resumed his old form; -he didn’t give out a single hit. Similarly with Ken -who was the sort of person who, the more he -was pushed to the wall and the greater the odds -against him, the surer he was of himself. He held -his opponents down to two bits and both men died -on base.</p> - -<p>The beginning of the seventh inning revealed -that both teams still had plenty of fight in them -and were out to make this a most exciting and -dramatic game. The first batter of the Slavin -team poised at the plate, swung at the first ball -that came along and hit a fast, low-flying ball that -shot past like a bullet about three feet above -Ken’s head. William, at second, lifted himself off -the ground and pulled the ball out of the air. It -all happened so quickly and suddenly that the -spectators were left with their mouths open, so -bewildered were they. They revived soon enough, -however, to cheer William for his perfect, most -beautiful catch.</p> - -<p>Ken struck out the second batter in short order -but the next man sent the ball whistling across -the ground toward third, base. Bobolink scooped -it off the ground and hurled it across the diamond -to Bluff. The latter, however, had to step back a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span> -couple of feet to catch the ball and the runner -safely crossed first base.</p> - -<p>With a man on base, the Slavin team thought -they had Ken where they wanted him. Although -his team had a safe lead of two points, Ted -wanted to increase his score still more. The next -man at bat succeeded in getting hit by the ball -and the umpire sent him to first, thus pushing -the other man over to second. Paul signalled his -friend to forget the men on base and to pitch -ball. Ken nodded. He sent over a fast one that -burned the plate in half. The umpire called, -“Strike one!” And his team-mates cheered him. -The next one was a ball, followed by a slow one -which the batter lifted far out into right field. -The spectators were lifted out of their seats, -their eyes glued to the ball. The fielder ran back -a few yards and dug his shoes into the ground -directly under the ball which flopped right into -his glove. A shout went up from the stands and -his team-mates threw their gloves into the air as -they ran off the field.</p> - -<p>Bluff was at bat. He was anxious to hit and he -waited for his favorite ball—one that was low -and cut the edge of the plate. But Ted knew his -weakness and Bluff waited in vain; he was struck -out. William, raging mad, came up to the plate. -He vowed to hit a homer or die in the attempt.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> -His mates cheered him and several voices in the -stands urged him on. Ted put all he had into the -ball and sent it whistling through the air; William -set himself as though he were going to take, -then shook his head sadly and let the ball cut -the plate. Ted imagined he had the batter fooled -and he again sent a fast one over. But it was just -what William wanted and he smashed a swift -grounder between the pitcher and the shortstop. -Ted saw it was useless for him to go for it, so he -watched the shortstop lunge for it, but in vain. -The ball skimmed past several inches beyond his -fingers. The man at second ran out to stop the -ball, picked it off the ground and poised to throw -it but no one covered second. He ran for the plate. -William dived and grasped the base with his -fingers. The umpire called loud and clear, “Safe!”</p> - -<p>Bobolink was the next man up. Paul patted -him on the back and said, “It’s up to you now, -fellow. Don’t disappoint the crowd.”</p> - -<p>Bobolink gritted his teeth and said nothing. -Some spectators screamed madly, “Come on, Bob, -kill it, sock it.”</p> - -<p>Ted looked around and waited until all his men -were in position. Ready to pitch, he seemed unconcerned -with the man on second. He shot over -a fast one, the catcher grabbed it and got into -position to throw; he hesitated, waiting for William<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> -to make a move for third base; but he was -disappointed and reluctantly returned the ball to -Ted. Again the pitcher made a mistake, throwing -a ball he thought the batter would let pass. Bobolink, -however, gripped his bat and hit far out into -left field. William had his foot on the bag and -waited. The fielder ran in for the ball; confident -that the catch was his, he waited for the fly to -drop into his glove. It did. Suddenly a deep, cry -went up from the stands. The man had muffed -and the ball fell to the ground. He lunged for it -and threw it to second. William was already on his -way to try home plate. The man at second wheeled -swiftly around and shot the ball home. William -measured his size on the ground; he touched the -base a fraction of a second before the catcher -tagged him. And Bobolink was safe on second.</p> - -<p>The score now stood 3-2, in favor of the Slavin -team. Paul shouted joyfully, “Now is our chance; -we’ll even the score yet.”</p> - -<p>His enthusiasm, however, got the better of him, -for his prophecy did not come true. Ted made -short work of the next batter and the seventh -inning was ended with the score still in favor of -the Slavin team.</p> - -<p>Nothing happened during the eighth inning. -Beginning the ninth, Ted and his players determined -to widen the margin. But all their efforts<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span> -were futile because Ken held them to one hit, a -single, and the man went no further than second. -Their last chance to even the score or win the game, -the young aviators were cheered and encouraged -by many spectators. Ted and his players were dead -set against a single run. The game was theirs, they -felt, and they wouldn’t let it slip away from them.</p> - -<p>The first batter up struck at the ball twice and -fouled both times. Ted pitched again and the -batter was struck out. Jack was up next and he hit -a beautiful grounder to the shortstop. The umpire -declared him out. Two out. The game now depended -on the last man at bat. Some people in -the stands rose and left. Paul stepped up to the -plate. Ted poised, then sent the ball whistling -through the air. Paul let it pass and the umpire -called out, “Strike one!” Again Ted sent a scorching -one across the plate and again the umpire -called it a strike. Hit or miss, Paul had to do -something. He held the bat lightly but gripped it -as the ball came sailing through the air. He struck -at it—and missed. The game was over. The score -was 3-2 in favor of the Slavin team.</p> - -<p>The losers gathered in a circle and cheered the -victors. The winning team gathered around Ted -and cheered the losers. The spectators cheered -both teams. It was a dramatic and exciting game, -well worth winning—and losing.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">What Happened to Wallace</span></p> - -<p>Ted Slavin came over and shook hands with -Paul. Smiling, he said, “Too bad we had to beat -you, but someone had to win, Paul.”</p> - -<p>“You deserve it; you played a fine game.”</p> - -<p>“I can say the same for you. Ken pitched a -marvelously good game. But what puzzles me is -what happened to Wallace?”</p> - -<p>Paul cast his eyes down. “That’s something -that is puzzling us too, Ted.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” Ted looked concerned. -“Did anything happen to him?”</p> - -<p>“I hope not but we don’t know.”</p> - -<p>“Gee, that’s too bad. Is there anything I can -do to help?”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head. “I don’t think so. But if -there is, I’ll call on you.”</p> - -<p>“Be sure you do. If there is anything the boys -and I can do, Paul, and you don’t let us know, I’ll -be terribly angry.”</p> - -<p>“Thanks. It’s mighty nice of you.”</p> - -<p>“That’s perfectly okey. And don’t forget we -have a swimming match scheduled for a week -from today.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Sure, I know.”</p> - -<p>The boys shook hands and parted. Paul walked -over to the bench where his team-mates were. The -boys surrounded him, looking for guidance. William -posed the question that bothered them all. -“What are we going to do about Wallace, Paul?”</p> - -<p>“I really don’t know. There’s nothing we can -do right now, I guess.”</p> - -<p>Jack spoke up. “I suggest that we all go home, -wash up and have supper. In the meanwhile we’ll -relax and be able to think clearly. Let’s all try and -imagine what <i>may</i> have happened to him. At seven -o’clock we’ll all meet again and try to formulate -some plan of action.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but what am I going to tell my mother -if she asks me about Wallace?”</p> - -<p>Everyone was silent, not knowing what to say. -They were all pretty well downcast. Jack again -spoke up, saying, “Tell her he’s staying for supper -at my home.” A pause. Silence. Every mind -with the same thought. He added. “It’s not the -truth but you’re justified. I’m sure he’ll turn up -very soon.”</p> - -<p>The boys stirred in their tracks. There was -nothing more to say and they all walked off the -field.</p> - -<p>But what had happened to Wallace? Let us go -over the day’s events and find out.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span></p> - -<p>Wallace completed his flying lesson at about -nine-thirty. He mounted his bicycle and quickly -left the airport, eager to return to town to be with -the boys who depended upon him to pitch in the -game. He peddled along steadily. Just as he was -about to enter the outskirts of the town, he heard -a hissing sound. Jumping off his wheel, he discovered -that his rear tire was fast going flat. -There was nothing to do but walk and push his -bike along. Less than a quarter of a mile further -on, he came to Jim’s filling station and he decided -that he might as well patch his tire right then -and there. He found Jim busy greasing a car. -“Hello, there,” he called out, “how’re the young -aviators getting along?”</p> - -<p>“Fine, Jim. Do you mind if I use your shop to -patch a hole in my tire?”</p> - -<p>“Not at all. Help yourself.”</p> - -<p>“Thanks, Jim.”</p> - -<p>Wallace walked into the shop. He knew where -to find the materials and tools he needed. Losing -no time, he set himself to his job. It didn’t take -him long. Then in about ten minutes, as he was -coming out of the shop, he stopped dead in his -tracks. He was just inside the doorway and he -saw Jim gassing a Ford roadster. But it was the -man at the wheel that caused him to freeze in his -tracks. It was the stranger—the man who had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span> -tried to convince them to move camp up in the -mountains. Wallace for the moment forgot all -about the baseball game and thought only of how -he could follow the man. He quickly stored the -bicycle away in a corner where it wouldn’t be -noticed, then he entered the office through the -shop and emerged by the opposite door which -placed him in a strategic position behind the wall. -Wallace heard the grind of the gears as the -driver started off. As the car passed him, he -sprang forth and jumped onto the bumper in back -of the car, holding tightly to the spare tire.</p> - -<p>Wallace wondered where the driver was heading, -when suddenly the car made a right turn and -Wallace realized that this was the road to the -mountain. For some seconds he was worried as -well as mystified. If the driver was going up to the -mountain, there was no telling when he would return -and Wallace became afraid that he might -miss the game. On the other hand, his curiosity -was aroused, for he knew that the road ran for -about five miles to the foot of the mountain and -then it became a foot path. How then could he -go all the way up in the car? The only alternative -was to wait and see.</p> - -<p>Wallace hung on for dear life. At approximately -a quarter of a mile before the end of the -road, there was a farm house. As far as he knew,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span> -no one lived there. Yet a driveway, which appeared -to be in constant use, led off the road and -was kept closed by a double-door gate. The car -turned off the road into this driveway without -stopping and the automobile pushed the doors -apart. The doors of the gate were on swinging -hinges, and swung back again into place as soon as -the automobile passed. In the meanwhile the car -proceeded to the back of the house. Wallace feared -that he might be discovered, yet there was nothing -he could think of doing, should he be noticed. -To his relief, however, the car kept moving beyond -the house, passed between two large elm -trees and then came out on a one lane dirt road. -Looking back, Wallace saw that the dirt road was -entirely hidden by trees and could not be seen -from the main road. He marveled at the deception -and cleverness of the gang of arms smugglers—for -by now he was convinced that they -were arms smugglers—and wondered whether it -was worth it for them to go such lengths of deception. -But the fact that they did, showed that -they must have considered it worth the trouble -and expense.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile, the car rode along, the -wheels sinking into holes and bouncing over rocks. -More than one time Wallace was nearly thrown, -but he managed to hold on. On either side of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span> -dirt road were the woods. The road turned and -twisted in many directions but always headed -toward where he was sure the cave was situated. -Judging by the speed and the time, the car had -gone about ten miles beyond the main road. The -driver stopped suddenly, leaving the car in the -middle of the road. In the next instant the -stranger was out of the car and at once entered -the woods. His heart palpitating, Wallace hid behind -the car and waited. He was anxious not to -lose his man but he was still more anxious not to -be caught. Who knows what they might do to him -if they ever laid hands on him! Arms smugglers -were obliged by necessity to be tough, hard men -and would have no mercy on anyone who might -give them away. Wallace shuddered as these -thoughts flew through his mind. Yet he was undaunted -and would not turn back.</p> - -<p>When several minutes had elapsed, and he -thought it was time, Wallace crept out from behind -the car and darted into the woods, following -the trail of the stranger. He had no difficulty -following him. Several times he even caught a -glimpse of the man’s form. Finally the trail led -him to the edge of the woods—to the mysterious -airport. Hesitating for several seconds and trying -to think fast what to do next, he watched the man -walk diagonally across the clearing, heading directly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span> -for the spot where he and Jack had overheard -the stranger and the chief. Wallace decided -that he had only one alternative: to make his way -along the edge of the woods and get there in time -enough not to lose his prey. Wallace sprinted, -running lightly and noiselessly. At the same time -he tried to keep the stranger in sight. It wasn’t -easy because his vision was usually obstructed by -the trees and low hanging branches. Also, he had -to watch carefully where he was running. Suddenly -the sound as of a pistol shot echoed through the -stillness of the woods. Wallace dived and hid behind -a clump of bushes. Finally he realized that -it was only the sound of a twig which broke as he -stepped on it.</p> - -<p>Breathless, Wallace waited for the echo to -subside and for the stillness of the woods again. -At last when he thought it was safe to creep out -of his hiding, he crawled over to the edge of the -clearing. He looked, but the stranger had already -disappeared. Terribly disappointed, Wallace lay -there watching, waiting. Finally he decided to -approach the spot where the stranger had most -likely entered the woods. Trying to move along -noiselessly, Wallace came to the very spot where -he and Jack had lain hiding. He found the rifle -just where they dropped it. Moving on a little -further, he came upon a footprint that pointed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span> -directly at a clump of foliage. He examined it -very carefully. Putting his arm out, he tried to -move a small bush but found that it was attached -to what seemed a board. His heart beat wildly -and he became numb with excitement. Looking -further he found several boards attached together -into a sort of door, to which were attached many -pieces of foliage that entirely hid it. Moving his -fingers to its very edge, he could tell that the door -swung away from the entrance of the cave against -which it rested. He felt like jumping into the air -and screaming, “Eureka, I’ve found it!”</p> - -<p>Controlling himself, he hastily moved away -and picked a position about five feet away from -the entrance of the cave. From where he lay on -his stomach, hidden by a clump of bushes, he -could see anyone who might enter or leave the -cave; he could also overhear anything that might -be said, even if the speakers conversed in whispers. -Taking further stock of himself, he concluded -that there was no way of his getting back -to town in time for the game. He had a fifteen -mile walk which would take him about five hours. -Besides, since he was already here and had come -upon the cave, he wanted to wait around a while -to see what might happen. Surely the stranger was -inside, as he most certainly did not make the trip -for nothing. Something was bound to happen.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span> -Wallace therefore made himself as comfortable -as he could and waited.</p> - -<p>After what seemed to be hours of dead quiet, -he suddenly became conscious of an airplane overhead. -He dropped to the ground again and hid -behind the bushes. Looking up, he saw a small -monoplane circling overhead. Some moments later -it glided to a landing at the mysterious airport. A -man climbed out of the cockpit and walked across -the clearing toward the cave. Wallace now turned -to watch the entrance of the cave. As he looked -the foliage swung back and revealed an entrance -about four feet high and three feet wide. The -stranger, bent over, emerged from the cave, waiting -for the pilot to appear. Coming into view, the -stranger greeted, “Hello, Chief!”</p> - -<p>“Hello, Bud!” The other returned.</p> - -<p>The pilot was the same “Chief” that Wallace -and Jack had seen before. He made a motion to -enter the cave but Bud stopped him, saying. “Let’s -stay out here, Chief. It’s awful hot there.”</p> - -<p>The chief nodded, “Okey,” he answered. “I -ain’t gonna stay but a couple of minutes.” And -they squatted at the entrance.</p> - -<p>“What’s the dope?”</p> - -<p>“Not much. Just wanted to tell you to clear -everything out of here and lay low for a while.”</p> - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span></p> - -<p>“What’s the matter? The law catching up with -us?”</p> - -<p>“Naw, they’ll never get us. It’s at the other -end. They still didn’t dispose of the last shipment. -So there ain’t nothing for us to do for a while.”</p> - -<p>“Hm. Well, it’ll be like a vacation.”</p> - -<p>“Yeah. Make the most of it.”</p> - -<p>For a short while there was silence. Finally -Bud asked, “When do you figure we’ll make another -shipment?”</p> - -<p>“In about ten days or two weeks.”</p> - -<p>“Guess I’ll run over to the city for about a -week and kill some time enjoying myself.”</p> - -<p>“Suit yourself,” answered the chief languidly.</p> - -<p>Wallace trembled with excitement. He could -barely control himself. The chief rose and muttered, -“Guess I’ll be going now.”</p> - -<p>Bud also rose and said, “Guess I’ll go too.”</p> - -<p>“Got everything cleaned out of there?”</p> - -<p>“Clean as a whistle.”</p> - -<p>“Okey.”</p> - -<p>Bud pushed the door, with its attached foliage -against the mouth of the cave and walked off. -Wallace became frantic. He had to get to the car -before he left or else he would have to walk. He -had to run by way of the woods while Bud crossed -the clearing. Just as soon as he thought it was safe, -he sprinted away. He hoped that Bud would stop<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span> -to talk with the chief for a while, which would -give him the necessary time to make it. He ran -swiftly and noiselessly because if he made any -sound and was detected, it would be too bad. -Wallace came upon the car just about half a minute -before Bud. He hid behind the tree and -hitched onto the car. They returned via the same -route. Just as they hit the main road, Wallace -jumped off. He figured it was much safer if he -hiked the five miles into town.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XIII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">The Cave</span></p> - -<p>William, wearing a long face, hesitated as he -mounted the steps to the porch of his home. A -thousand questions filled his mind which he was -afraid his mother might ask, and he searched for -possible answers. Slumping into a chair, he tried -to think how to meet any situation that might -arise. At the same time he was worried about his -brother and wondered what might have happened -to him. He didn’t hear his mother come out on the -porch. Her voice startled him as she asked, -“What are you sitting out here for, William?”</p> - -<p>He shrugged his shoulders. “Just like that, -mother. Resting up.”</p> - -<p>“Did you win the game?”</p> - -<p>“No. No, mother, we lost.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sorry to hear that.” She looked at him and -saw how miserable he felt imagining that it was -because of the lost game. She tried to cheer him -up by saying, “Don’t feel so badly, son. It’s not -so terrible to lose a game.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, mother.”</p> - -<p>“Where is Wallace?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span></p> - -<p>The question came suddenly and hit him like a -bombshell. He expected it, yet he was caught off -guard. Hesitating, trying to think of the exact -words he was going to utter he finally said, “He -went with Jack; said he’d stay there for supper.”</p> - -<p>“Very well.” She smiled down at him. “You’d -better go and wash up.”</p> - -<p>He rose and entered the house. He took a -shower and changed his clothes and fussed, trying -very hard to delay his coming down to the dining -room. When he heard his mother call him for -the second time, he left his room and descended -the stairs. Entering the dining room his eyes almost -popped out of his head to see his twin -brother and Jack at the table. His father noticed -the look of consternation on his face and asked, -“Anything wrong, son? You look pale.”</p> - -<p>“No, Dad. I feel fine and dandy.” Trying to -keep his voice level as possible, he asked, “I -thought you were staying at Jack’s for supper?”</p> - -<p>Wallace had a mouthful. “Changed our minds,” -he mumbled.</p> - -<p>William was overjoyed. Passing behind his -brother’s chair, Wallace got poked in the head. It -was a signal of affection rather than of anger. Sitting -down at the table, William was all smiles and -suddenly he remembered that he was terribly -hungry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span></p> - -<p>When the boys met, Wallace was attacked with -a million questions, but at first he wouldn’t answer -a single one. When the time came, he told his -story. A lot of discussion ensued. One thing was -agreed upon by all, however. They had to go -and investigate the cave while they had the chance. -Tomorrow was Sunday. So they would leave in -the afternoon, camp out for the night and return -the following day. After deciding upon the plan, -Nuthin’ raised another question. “Don’t you think -it’s about time we informed the police or government -agents?” he asked.</p> - -<p>Paul answered quickly and precisely. “No. Absolutely -no.”</p> - -<p>“W-w-why not?” queried Bluff.</p> - -<p>“For a thousand reasons,” replied Paul. “But -one is sufficient. If we tell the police, they’ll most -likely put some guards there and the secret will -leak out, then that gang will get wise and beat it.”</p> - -<p>That seemed to satisfy most of them but -Nuthin’ was insistent. “But what can we do by -ourselves?” he demanded.</p> - -<p>“We’ll just have to wait and see.”</p> - -<p>They met at the outskirts of the town, coming -there in twos and threes; they didn’t want anyone -to see them and ask them embarrassing questions. -They carried with them only enough provisions to -last them until the following day. Hiking briskly,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span> -with a minimum of rest stops, the group arrived -at their destination at about five o’clock. Holding -a conference, it was decided that only Wallace and -Jack would enter the cave, while the other boys -hid themselves at various distances, and kept a -sharp lookout. Before the group parted, Paul -warned the two, “Now don’t stay there too long. -We’ll give you forty minutes. If you’re not out by -then, we will come after you.”</p> - -<p>The two nodded in agreement. Waiting for -the others to take their places of hiding, they -finally heard Paul’s whistle, the signal for them -to proceed. Wallace and Jack crept forward. At -the entrance, Wallace paused to point out to his -friend the remarkable work of deception. Then, -shaking with excitement, he pulled the door ajar -and peeked in. It was dark inside and he saw -nothing. Pulling the door a bit wider, the two -boys crept in, and used their flashlights.</p> - -<p>Paul and the other boys watched Jack and Wallace -enter the cave and saw the door close behind -them. Time dragged on their hands. They lay in -hiding places and watched the sun move steadily -in its westward course. In a couple of hours it -would be dark and they had yet to set up camp. -But the boys didn’t think of it. Their minds were -in the cave and they wondered what Jack and -Wallace were seeing and finding. Every minute<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span> -seemed to them an age. They trembled with excitement. -Paul saw William signal that he wanted -to come over, which he did. “Wish they would -come out all ready so we can go in and see what’s -inside,” William whispered.</p> - -<p>“Give them their allotted time,” Paul answered.</p> - -<p>Side by side, they lay there and itched with -impatience. Tired of watching the entrance to the -cave, they let their eyes wander elsewhere. William -took out his watch and counted off each minute. -As the forty minutes were drawing to a close, -they again glued their eyes to the entrance of the -cave. William whispered, “They’re not out yet. -You think they’re all right?”</p> - -<p>“Of course they’re all right. Give them time to -come out. They still have five minutes.”</p> - -<p>But when the five minutes were up, the two -boys still had not emerged yet. Paul waited. Five -minutes later he called the boys together to discuss -the situation. It was decided that they would -wait fifteen minutes more and if Jack and Wallace -were not out by then, Paul and Bluff were to go -in after them, the others were to remain outside.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile, let us see what happened to -Jack and Wallace. Having crept into the cave on -their hands and knees, Jack used his flashlight, -throwing the beam of light straight ahead. The -cave was about forty feet deep and beginning at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span> -the entrance it gradually widened until it attained -a maximum width of about ten feet. The two boys -crept forward until they came to about the middle -of the cave. Playing their flashlight all around -them, they found the place truly empty—absolutely -bare of anything. The two boys looked at -each other dumbfounded. Jack laughed good naturedly. -“Can you imagine anything like it? If we -knew nothing about that gang, we couldn’t suspect -a thing by coming into the cave.”</p> - -<p>“You’re right,” answered Wallace. “But I have -a suspicion that this is not the whole of the cave.”</p> - -<p>Jack snapped his finger enthusiastically. “Those -are just my sentiments,” he cried. “It’s evident -that they use this place for a store room and a -hideout. Now if this was all there was to the cave -and they stored their stuff right here, then they -would be discovered by the first person who happened -to come upon them. On the other hand, the -fact that they have operated successfully and were -not caught shows that there must be another place -leading out from here where they can quickly -hide.”</p> - -<p>“I agree with you. And I have been thinking -how we can start trying to find it.”</p> - -<p>“And what’s your plan?”</p> - -<p>Wallace rested on his haunches. “Notice how -simple and smooth the walls seem to be?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span></p> - -<p>“That’s right.”</p> - -<p>“Well, another part of this cave would have -to lead off somewhere through that wall. And my -hunch is that it’s near where we are now, on both -sides and to the end of the cave.”</p> - -<p>“Very good. Then you start on that wall, I’ll -start on this one, and we’ll examine carefully -every spot. We’ll work so that we meet at the far -end of the cave.”</p> - -<p>Wallace agreed and they set to work. With -their hands, they went over every inch of the -wall. They had been working like that for perhaps -ten minutes when Jack suddenly screamed, -“Wallace! I’ve got it! Here it is!”</p> - -<p>Wallace jumped across to his friend’s side. A -thick door, about two feet wide and four feet -high, had swung out and remained open. Both -were so excited with their discovery that neither -one thought of determining exactly how it worked. -Jack didn’t know what it was that swung the door -open. It just happened. Wallace walked through -the door first, followed by Jack. So enthused were -they that neither one paused long enough to make -sure of their exit. As they stepped into this newly -discovered additional cave, Wallace used his flashlight. -The beam flew back and forth, all around -the place. The ceiling here was about three feet -higher than in the outside cave. And all around<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span> -the walls were stored large cases, boxes, utensils -of many sorts and such things. Wallace gasped, -“Look at all that stuff!”</p> - -<p>Jack grasped his friend by the elbow. “Yeh,” -he muttered. “Let’s take a look.”</p> - -<p>They approached the large cases first. Jack -carried his small hatchet with him. Wallace whispered, -“Open up one of these cases first, and do -it so we can nail it up again and make it look as -if no one touched it.”</p> - -<p>“Right.”</p> - -<p>Jack set to work. In the meanwhile, Wallace -roamed about, describing things to Jack as he -came across them—cooking utensils, bedding, several -iron cots, some clothing, two leather jackets, -two holsters and automatics. Jack had pried open -one board. He called, “Wallace, come here!”</p> - -<p>They looked into the box. It was full of rifles. -Their eyes met in astonishment; even though this -was what they had been expecting. Jack gasped, -“Well, that’s that.”</p> - -<p>Wallace said, “Now close it again. Do it so -there won’t be any suspicion that it was opened.”</p> - -<p>When the job was completed, Wallace looked -at his watch. “Hey!” he cried. “We have been -away forty-five minutes already. Let’s get out.”</p> - -<p>They looked around for the door but they -couldn’t see it. It had swung to without their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span> -being aware of it. Both boys rushed over to where -they thought the door would be; they pounded -and pushed against the wall, but in vain. Wallace -exclaimed, “Can you imagine a thing like that! -We were so excited we forgot we had to come out -again and took no precaution.”</p> - -<p>Jack agreed. “Yes, it’s our fault. But let’s not -get excited. We’ll get out.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose so. But the boys out there will -become worried if we don’t show up.”</p> - -<p>“Then they’ll come after us.”</p> - -<p>“But suppose they don’t find the door?”</p> - -<p>“We found it, so why shouldn’t they?”</p> - -<p>“It was an accident the way we found it. And -it is possible that they may not.”</p> - -<p>“Well, let’s not cross our bridges before we -get there. Let’s do the best we can and look -carefully.”</p> - -<p>The boys spent fully a half hour pounding -their fists against the wall, clawing with their -fingers. But all in vain. They sat down on the -hard ground to rest a bit and take counsel together. -But just then Jack felt a slight puff of -cool air and he turned his face to see the door -swinging out. He jumped up and grasped it. -Simultaneously Paul and Jack cried out. Wallace -exclaimed, “Hold it! Let’s see how it works.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span></p> - -<p>Only a few minutes was necessary to discover -that the door worked on an axis and the slightest -push anywhere along the rim of the door, set it -swinging. But to make sure, two of the boys remained -on the other end, the door was swung to, -then Jack swung it open again from the inside.</p> - -<p>Jack remained at the door and held it open. -Wallace showed Paul and Bluff around. They -guessed that all the large cases—there were six of -them—contained rifles, while the smaller boxes -contained cartridges. In about five minutes, they -were all prepared to leave again. Jack said, “Wait -a minute, fellows. Take a deep breath, then I’ll -ask you something.”</p> - -<p>The boys breathed in. “All right. Now what?” -asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“How does the air appear to be, fresh or -stale?”</p> - -<p>Wallace sniffed the air again and answered, -“Fresh,” to which the others agreed.</p> - -<p>“Now,” said Jack, “when we first entered here, -do you recall whether the air was stale?”</p> - -<p>Wallace scratched his head. “I really don’t remember,” -he answered.</p> - -<p>“That proves that the air was not stale but -fresh.”</p> - -<p>“How do you figure it out.”</p> - -<p>“Because if the air had been stale, it would<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span> -have hit you right away and you would remember -it.”</p> - -<p>“What are you trying to prove?” demanded -Paul.</p> - -<p>Jack exclaimed. “Standing here I felt a very -slight draft. That’s clue number one. Secondly, if -the air was fresh when we first entered here, then -it proves that air is coming in from somewhere.”</p> - -<p>“Gee,” exclaimed Paul, “that’s very good -reasoning.”</p> - -<p>“Yes. But there’s more to it. I’m convinced -that there is an exit leading to the outside from -this inner room. The reason for it is obvious. The -gang had to have an avenue of escape if they were -ever cornered.”</p> - -<p>“That’s very logical,” added Wallace. “Let’s -look for it.”</p> - -<p>“Before we do that,” interposed Paul, “I suggest -that one of us go out and tell the boys not -to worry and be patient. Two of us should conduct -the search while one stands guard at this -door.”</p> - -<p>They agreed and it was decided that Bluff was -to return to their companions, Wallace was to -stand guard at the door and Jack and Paul were -to conduct the search. Bluff left for the outside. -“Now,” said Paul, “let’s find the exit.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span></p> - -<p>Using their flashlights, they scanned the walls -and found no clues. So the two boys got busy -looking behind the piled cases and boxes. In a -few minutes, Paul shouted that he had discovered -it. Hidden by a sort of net, the mouth of the -tunnel was just large enough for one individual to -creep along on his belly. Paul crept in, followed -by Jack. Five minutes later, Jack re-appeared and -called to Wallace to follow. The tunnel was about -thirty feet long, the other end hidden by a lot of -shrubbery. Looking around, the three boys discovered -that, the camping site which Bud (the stranger) -urged them to leave, was right there in -front of them, on the other side of the stream.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XIV</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Flying Solo</span></p> - -<p>Major McCarthy was quite sure of his pupils. -He was certain of their ability to land, to take -off, to fly, to know what to do in case of an emergency. -He had taught them to be not merely -flyers, but all around pilots. For that reason he -had insisted that they spend many hours learning -the intricate parts and mechanics of a motor. His -plans went further. He wanted them to learn more -of the technical affair that an airplane is. When -the time came, he would teach them as much as -he knew about navigation, how to fly blind, and -many other things that had to do with flying. But -all that was a sort of post-graduate course. For -the present, they had earned their wings—and -how!</p> - -<p>He had absolute confidence in his young aviators. -And William was his star pupil. Technically, -not one of his pupils had as yet gone up -solo. However, each one of them had gone up at -least once, taken off, flew, performed a couple of -simple stunts, and landed again with McCarthy -in the rear seat, who didn’t say a word or move<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span> -a muscle; on that one flight he was merely a passenger. -Therefore his confidence in the boys was -based not merely upon his affection for them or -his opinion of their ability, but upon the fact that -they had proven their ability. For that reason he -made elaborate arrangements for their solo flight. -It was to be on Wednesday, at about five in the -evening, when the weather is usually not very -bumpy and quite mild. Secretly he had invited the -parents of the boys, the Mayor, a few other -notables, and let it be known that the public was -welcome. As for the boys, they were not merely -going to fly solo, but to do other things. He had -arranged everything. This was to be their graduation -exercises.</p> - -<p>When the time came, more people turned out -than were expected. A special section of ground -was roped off for the several hundred spectators. -All the boys’ parents were there; even Dr. Morrison -had managed to get away from his office. -Some few of the spectators were jittery and -anxious. McCarthy was as calm and serene as -ever, smiling and joking. A few of the boys were -at first a bit nervous but they soon got over it. -They realized that they were merely going up in -the same way as when their instructor went with -them. This time, however, they were going alone—solo. -And since they were confident of their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span> -flying ability and of McCarthy’s teaching, they -felt that they had nothing to worry about.</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy summoned the boys together -and they lined up in front of him. They were -wearing their Scout uniforms and flying helmets -and goggles. They were all very happy. The -Major addressed them. “Boys,” he began, “this -is your graduation day. Today you are going to -make your first solo flight—that is, you’re going -to take up a plane and land her again all by -yourselves. Having completed your solo flight successfully, -you’ll be presented with your wings; the -Mayor will make the presentation. You’re also -going to get a letter from me stating your successful -completion of the course.” Pause. He looked -from one to the other of the boys. “Are you -ready?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” they answered in unison.</p> - -<p>“Very well then. Each one of you will go up -in the Avro, perform any one simple stunt you -choose, bank her several times, then land again. -After each one of you has done that, I’ll have -you go up in the air again, but about that, later. -William, you make the solo flight first.”</p> - -<p>Major McCarthy had a definite purpose for -designating William to go up first. William was -the best of all his pupils, and the others, seeing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span> -him perform well, would be heartened and do as -well.</p> - -<p>The spectators cheered heartily when they saw -William walking toward the Avro which had -been wheeled out of its hangar and was being -warmed up by a mechanic. William climbed in and -the chocks were jerked away. He opened the -throttle and the mechanic leaped forward along -the ground. Shutting off the power by means of -the thumb switch, the plane slowed down. He -turned the nose into the wind. The next moment -he was off, skimming over the field, then the plane -rose lightly into the air like a bird. Easily and -smoothly, the machine climbed fast. Down below, -the spectators craned their necks to see. William -climbed until he was about two thousand feet -above ground. He banked and flew directly over -the airport. After circling it twice, he straightened -out, then opened wide the throttle. The machine -bounded forward and the nose sprang upwards. -As it rose, the forward speed decreased in spite -of the fact that the engine continued to run at the -maximum revolutions. The machine pointed vertically -upwards and for about a moment it appeared -to hang onto the rapidly revolving blades -of the propeller. The spectators below watched -the airplane with their mouths open. Some of -them, who had never witnessed such a stunt, were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span> -positive that the machine would come crashing -down tail first. But suddenly the nose fell over to -one side, the tail shot up and the next moment -the plane was shooting sharply downward. Two -minutes later William was on the ground, and -climbing out of the cockpit. The spectators -cheered him. His friends shook him by the hand, -slapped him on the back and told him it was a fine -job. Major McCarthy smiled and called out, “All -right, Paul, you’re next.”</p> - -<p>Paul went through the same performance, and -then the rest of the boys. Not one of them faltered. -The spectators were delighted, and the -parents were proud. As for Major McCarthy, he -said nothing and revealed no emotion. To him, it -seemed as though the whole affair was merely the -successful completion of his teaching job. Inside, -however, he felt very much pleased and proud. -It was a pleasure to have such an able group -of boys as pupils.</p> - -<p>The Major had some other things in store for -the boys. He was going to have them do some -more flying. He had them lined up in front of him -and addressed them. “That was well done, fellows,” -he said, “but I expect even more from -you. I’m going to have you do more flying. You’re -all going up into the air again—and all together.” -The boys opened their eyes wide and looked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span> -surprised. They wondered what the Major was -up to. He smiled and continued, “You’re going up -in pairs—Paul and William, Jack and Bobolink, -Wallace and Bluff. While I’m talking to you, the -mechanics are wheeling out two more machines, -another Avro and a Bristol. William and Paul -will fly the Bristol because William has already -flown the machine. The others will fly the Avros. -One of you is going to take the machine up and his -partner will land it. You’ll change controls after -every stunt. As to what you’re going to do in the -air, follow William. Are you ready?”</p> - -<p>“Yes!” They answered in unison.</p> - -<p>“Alright, then. William and Paul will take off -first, Jack and Bobolink next, and Wallace and -Bluff last. Go to it.”</p> - -<p>The Major had discussed his plans with William -and had instructed the boy as to every move. -The entire flight had been planned in advance and -William knew it by heart.</p> - -<p>The Bristol was somewhat larger and heavier -than the Avro. William got into the front cockpit, -Paul in the rear one. William was to take off, -and he warmed up the engine. A minute later -the chocks were jerked away. Turning into the -wind, he skimmed the ground for a distance, then -the machine rose gracefully and continued to -climb. A minute later, Jack and Bobolink took off,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span> -and finally Wallace and Bluff. They were about -two thousand feet in the air. William gave the -signal and the three machines lined up in formation—the -two Avros on either side and a little to -the rear of the Bristol. They circled the airport -twice. Again William signalled and the three -planes lined in a row; they made believe it was a -race. The earth seemed to shake with the drone -of the motors. After that, they fell into line one -behind the other. William signalled and each -pilot was ready. The first machine did an Immelmann -turn, followed by the second and third -planes. Soon they were in the same formation as -they had started but flying in the opposite direction. -The Bristol now went into a “half-roll.” By -pulling the stick back and kicking down the rudder, -the machine turned over completely on her -back with her nose pointing down. The pilot -shoved the nose further down, flying at a steeper -angle towards the ground; the pressure of the -air against the wings forced the nose up again, -and as the pilot kept pulling the nose of the -machine up, it leveled out and continued to fly -in the opposite direction. Both Avros followed -the Bristol.</p> - -<p>William next signalled for a “barrel roll.” To -those on the ground, it seemed as though the -machine, with a kind of cork-screw movement,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span> -had wriggled on her back and then wriggled back -again. What actually happened was that the machine -went through the same tactics as before in -the “half-roll,” with the exception that instead -of ending up in a dive, the plane continued to turn -after being upside down and ended up on a level -keel, flying in the same direction as before.</p> - -<p>The next stunt the boys did was a “loop the -loop.” The nose of the Bristol went up and the -next moment was flying upside down, followed -by a swift dive earthwards.</p> - -<p>When all three planes completed the stunt they -fell into formation. William signalled for number -three—Wallace and Bluff—to land. Jack and -Bobolink landed next. The Bristol with William -and Paul became the only machine in the air. -They were directly over the airport. William -communicated with his friend to take over the -controls. A minute later William slipped over the -side of the plane and went hurling toward the -ground. The spectators let out a scream of dismay. -Ten seconds later, William pulled the rip -cord of his parachute and went sailing majestically -downward to the ground.</p> - -<p>Again the boys were lined up, with all the -spectators at their backs. The Mayor made a little -speech and then presented each boy with his -wings. He turned to the major and asked him to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span> -say a few words. “Very few,” replied McCarthy. -“All I will say, boys, is—I’m proud of you.”</p> - -<p>The young aviators were cheered. Then the -boys cheered McCarthy. The Mayor held up his -hand for quiet and then said, “And I want to add, -major, that we, the people of Stanhope, are also -proud of these boys and we are also proud of -you.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XV</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">A Complicated Surprise</span></p> - -<p>After all the ceremonies were completed at the -airport, the boys and their parents returned to -town and were entertained at dinner by Dr. and -Mrs. Morrison. All the trimmings were included, -ending up with ice cream and cookies. Nuthin’ -leaned back in his chair and patted his belly. “If -I’d go up in a plane now,” he remarked jocularly, -“The ship would sink like a rock, I feel so heavy.”</p> - -<p>The boys laughed heartily. Bobolink said, -“That’s nothing. If I got into a plane now, it -wouldn’t lift off the ground.”</p> - -<p>Some more laughter and a few more clever -remarks. Then Ken asked, “Well, what’s on our -program now?”</p> - -<p>William replied, “Now that we are real pilots, -we are going to do some real flying.”</p> - -<p>“Not for a few days,” interposed Paul. “We -have a swimming match for this coming Saturday -and we have to practice up a bit.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” spoke up Jack, “and this time we are -going to give that Slavin bunch a good beating.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span></p> - -<p>“You say that as though you intended to do -them physical battle,” remarked Wallace, with a -twinkle in his eye.</p> - -<p>“Oh, no,” Jack hurried to make himself perfectly -understood. “We are going to do it fairly -and squarely. The Slavin group is a nice bunch -and I don’t hold anything against them.”</p> - -<p>“Except that they won the ball game,” said -Wallace.</p> - -<p>“They deserved it,” added William. “They -played a mighty fine game, and Ted has never -pitched as well as last Saturday.”</p> - -<p>“W-w-what a-about Ken?” demanded Bluff. -“He p-p-pitched m-m-marv-v-velously.”</p> - -<p>“You said it,” agreed Paul. “I’ve never seen -Ken pitch better ball than last Saturday.”</p> - -<p>Ken said, “If it wasn’t for the boys backing me -up as well as they did, it would have been just -too bad.”</p> - -<p>“Well, why do you think we were out in the -field?” asked Bobolink. “Just for ornamentation?”</p> - -<p>“Let’s cut the discussion,” announced Paul. “I -for one feel tired, and I imagine that all of us are -just a bit winded. So let’s break it up, go home -and meet tomorrow morning for swimming -practice.”</p> - -<p>“Agreed!” cried William.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span></p> - -<p>Everybody else seemed to feel that way. As a -matter of fact, for the past half hour or so, the -boys had begun to squirm in their seats and -showed signs of nervousness and anxiety. So it -was quite a relief for all of them to rise from the -table and go their way. Ostensibly, each one was -going home.</p> - -<p>About half an hour later, Paul was walking -down Main Street. He was all spruced up—wearing -his new suit, a bright tie, his shoes shined to -a gloss and his hair combed neatly. At Rogers -Street he turned to the right. He walked along -snappily and whistled a cheerful tune.</p> - -<p>At the middle of the block, he met Paul face -to face. Surprise showed on both their faces and -their eyes almost popped at seeing each other. -Quickly, each boy put his right hand behind his -back. Finally, after a very embarrassing silence, -one of the boys asked, “What are you doing -here, Jack? I thought you had gone home.”</p> - -<p>“What about you, Paul? I thought you were -tired and were going to bed early?”</p> - -<p>Silence. The boys squirmed and wriggled. One -of them turned and looked at the house they were -in front of. The other boy did likewise. Finally -Jack asked, “What are you hiding there behind -your back?”</p> - -<p>Paul fidgeted. “Nothing. What about you?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Nothing.”</p> - -<p>Again silence and the boys looked around with -embarrassment. “You still didn’t tell me what -you’re doing here,” remarked Jack.</p> - -<p>“Just taking a walk,” replied Paul. “And you?”</p> - -<p>“Also taking a walk.” He looked up at the sky -and at the horizon. “Beautiful evening, isn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Paul. “Where did you say you -were walking to?”</p> - -<p>“Right here. And you?”</p> - -<p>“The same.”</p> - -<p>The two boys looked at each other, their eyes -met and slowly a grin spread over their faces. -Finally they laughed and slapped each other on -the back. Then Jack said, “Well, let’s go in.”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head. “No, wait a minute.” He -noticed someone approaching. “Let’s hide behind -the corner of the house.”</p> - -<p>Jack and Paul retreated. Half a minute later, -a boy came along and without any hesitation, -started to cross the lawn to the house. The two -boys jumped out of their hiding place. “Where -do you think you’re going?” demanded Paul.</p> - -<p>William jumped and went pale. Seeing, however, -who his assailants were, he gritted his teeth -and barked, “Say, what do you think you’re doing, -scaring people?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span></p> - -<p>The two boys smiled. Jack said, “Now don’t -get too fresh or we’ll pummel you. Where are you -going?”</p> - -<p>William made believe he was still angry. “Follow -me and you’ll find out.”</p> - -<p>“And what’s that little package you have -there?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“Wouldn’t you like to know, though?” was the -retort.</p> - -<p>“A nickel to a penny it’s a box of candy,” said -Jack.</p> - -<p>But William was not to be bluffed. “Seems to -me,” he remarked dryly, “that you fellows are -not carrying flowers in <i>your</i> packages.”</p> - -<p>He had guessed right, and the three of them -joined in laughing heartily. But just then another -boy came up to them. He had approached quietly -and had been a witness to the previous scene. -“Well, well,” exclaimed Wallace, “are you fellows -holding a meeting here tonight or are you -just congregating here to be a nuisance? Answer -yes or no and don’t be flippant about it either.”</p> - -<p>The three boys stared at the new arrival. Jack -cried in irritation, “This has gone about far -enough. Arline told me that she was inviting only -me tonight. What are you guys doing here?”</p> - -<p>Wallace held up his package majestically. -“Now, Jack, don’t get excited.” He poked a finger<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span> -at his friend. “She told me the same thing,” he -assured the doubter.</p> - -<p>“Same here,” echoed Paul.</p> - -<p>“And me, too,” added William.</p> - -<p>“And who else?” demanded Jack.</p> - -<p>The boys shrugged their shoulders and shook -their heads. But they were not to be mystified -much longer. Just then, Bobolink marched up. -He saw the boys but it didn’t ruffle him in the -least. He nodded to them and said, “Hello, fellows. -Sorry I can’t stop to chew the rag awhile, -but I have an important engagement.”</p> - -<p>“Is that so?” exclaimed William. Grabbing -Bobolink by the arm, he held on to him and informed -the last arrival, “So have we all. Just -stick around.”</p> - -<p>Bobolink shrugged his shoulders. “Well,” he -said, “if I must, I must.”</p> - -<p>In due time, Bluff and Nuthin’ arrived and -joined the crowd. Only Ken was missing. They -decided to wait for him because they had no doubt -he would also turn up. However, a few of the boys -became a little impatient and they decided to ring -the bell. Several seconds elapsed and then the -door opened and beautiful Arline Blair came -marching out to the boys on Ken’s arm. The boys -were startled, then they began to hurl all sorts of -flippant and good-natured epithets at him. Two of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span> -the boys even started to pummel him in fun. -Suddenly a command rang out “Fall in!”</p> - -<p>The boys fell into formation. Paul approached -Arline, saluted her and said, “Miss Blair, Fox -Patrol bids you good evening.”</p> - -<p>The young lady made a bow. “Good evening, -boys,” she replied sweetly.</p> - -<p>“And the boys furthermore ask leave to -present you with tokens of their affection.”</p> - -<p>Paul gave her his box of chocolates. Then each, -on down the line, presented her with his gift. -When all that was done, Paul sang out his commands. -“Attention! Forward, march!”</p> - -<p>As the boys marched forward to go into the -house, Paul took Arline by the arm and led her -away in the opposite direction. When the boys -realized it, they broke formation and ran after -him. “Hey, you, come here,” cried William.</p> - -<p>Arline tilted back her head and laughed merrily. -“I’ve never had so much fun in all my life,” -she said.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” complained Jack, “but where’s our -fun?”</p> - -<p>“We are coming to that,” she told him. “I -wanted to surprise you all.”</p> - -<p>“You certainly did,” William ventured to say.</p> - -<p>“And,” continued the young lady, “if you’ll<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span> -come in, you’ll find everything prepared for a -most enjoyable party.”</p> - -<p>“Then what are we waiting for?” asked -Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>“For no reason that I know of,” replied Arline. -“Let’s go in. The girls—”</p> - -<p>“The girls!” exclaimed each boy separately.</p> - -<p>“You didn’t think that I was going to entertain -all you boys by myself, did you?”</p> - -<p>“No, but—”</p> - -<p>“So I invited my friends to help me. Let’s go -in, now.”</p> - -<p>They all entered and in spite of the complications -of the half hour before, they had a most -enjoyable evening.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XVI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Swimming Contest</span></p> - -<p>For the following two days, the boys practiced -swimming assiduously. They spent most of their -hours at the lake and perfected their strokes, -their form, diving, turning, etc. They were in tip -top shape and were confident of the results. Saturday -morning all the boys turned out to help -fix up a float, repair the diving board, lay out -lanes and make everything ready for the contest -at one-thirty.</p> - -<p>Three people consented to act as judges. Swimming -coach Thompson and Assistant swimming -coach Grey of Stanhope High School and a man -named White, who was at one time a national -swimming champion.</p> - -<p>The events that had been agreed upon were the -hundred yard dash in which Paul and Nuthin’ -were to participate; the two-twenty yard dash in -which Ken and Bluff had been entered; the hundred -and sixty yard relay, with William, Wallace, -Bobolink and Jack as the team; and finally a fancy -diving match, with Bobolink as his group’s -representative.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span></p> - -<p>A large crowd turned out to watch the spectacle. -The members of the competing teams mixed -together and poked fun at each other, quibbled -over many nothings and thus forgot all their anxiety -about the forthcoming contest. The judges -were ready and everything was set when suddenly -an airplane dropped out of the sky. People -pointed, waved and shouted. Attached to the rear -end of the plane was a floating banner. Jack -nudged Wallace and asked, “Who do you think -is in the plane? Can you guess?”</p> - -<p>“A turkey to a doughnut it’s Major McCarthy.”</p> - -<p>Several of the boys standing nearby overheard -and agreed. Jack said, “That’s most likely who it -is. Can you read what’s on the banner?”</p> - -<p>“Not yet. Wait till he comes down a little -lower.”</p> - -<p>The plane descended to an altitude of about -five hundred feet. Everybody began to shout the -words on the banner—“GOOD LUCK.” Ted, -standing with Paul, asked, “Wonder whom he -is wishing good luck?”</p> - -<p>“Both teams, of course,” answered Paul.</p> - -<p>“He’s a very fine chap—the major is.”</p> - -<p>“You said it,” agreed Paul. “There are not -many like him.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span></p> - -<p>After circling around overhead for a short -while, the pilot waved and zoomed up into the -sky. Several moments later the plane was performing -a “barrel roll,” followed by a “loop the -loop.” The spectators waved, cheered and -screamed for more stunts. So the plane stunted -some more; it dived down heading straight for -the water, skimmed the surface of the lake and -zoomed away up into the sky again and -disappeared.</p> - -<p>At last everything was ready for the contest to -begin. The judges called for the first event, the -hundred yard dash. Paul and Nuthin’ stepped -forward. Ted Slavin’s group was to be represented -by Ted and two other boys, Joe and Mac. Nuthin’ -was placed in lane one, Mac in lane two, Ted in -lane three, Paul, lane four and Joe, lane five. -Coach Thompson looked the boys over, then -called out, “You’re all ready?”</p> - -<p>The boys nodded and said they were. Thompson -raised his gun. “Ready!” he called.</p> - -<p>The boys crouched, each in his lane. “Get set!”</p> - -<p>There was silence everywhere. The boys -brought back their arms ready to dive. But half -a second before the pistol went off, Mac, anticipating -the signal, dived. The boys relaxed and -waited for Mac to come out of the water and take -the start over.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Ready!” called Thompson. Pause. “Get set!” -Half a second later the gun went off and five -young men, their arms stretched out in front of -them, flung themselves through space, cut into the -water and—they were off. Ted, tall and lanky, was -out front, an inch or two in the lead. Their legs -kicked rhythmically, their arms moved gracefully -and with precision. They skimmed the water like -fish.</p> - -<p>The length of the pool was twenty yards and -each man had to swim the pool five times. At the -first turn, Ted and Nuthin’ were neck and neck. -Both boys were encouraged and urged on by their -comrades and friends. Paul was only an inch or -two behind, followed very closely by Mac and Joe. -That position was maintained throughout the second -lap. In the third lap Paul and Mac started -creeping up steadily on the leaders while Nuthin,’ -shot out into the lead, with Ted only an inch behind. -At the turn, a deep sigh went up from the -spectators—Nuthin’ missed his hold and lost -enough time in the turn to place him behind with -Joe. It seemed that the race was now to be decided -between Ted and Paul. Ted, however, seemed to -manage quite well in keeping his lead and Paul -didn’t seem as though he were gaining any. Nuthin’, -though, was in the meanwhile, gaining with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span> -every stroke. At the turn he was neck and neck -with Paul.</p> - -<p>On shore, some people had set up a chant—“Nuthin’! -Nuthin’! come on Nuthin’!” They kept -up the chant until the very end of the race. And -Nuthin’ seemed to be responding very well to their -call. He was edging up closer and closer. He was -straining every muscle in his body. His arms and -feet were like a well oiled, well regulated machine. -Within five yards to the goal Nuthin’ was neck -and neck with Ted. The latter strained very hard -to reach out further. Two yards from the edge of -the pool and Nuthin’ had already crept into the -lead. The judges were bending over, watching -very closely for the first touch. The spectators -held their breaths and watched. In an instant the -race was over and the judges were rising to their -feet. Somebody shouted, “Ted! Ted, the winner!”</p> - -<p>Both judges shook their heads and pointed to -Nuthin’. William, at the other end of the pool, -screamed, “Nuthin’! Hooray for Nuthin’!”</p> - -<p>Somebody nudged him and remarked, “Stop -shouting for nothing; shout for something.”</p> - -<p>William laughed and roared. “Nuthin’ is something -and how!”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ lay stretched out, with Ted at his side. -Breathing hard, Ted said, “That was a swell race. -Never thought you were as good as that, boy.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul, squatting nearby, remarked, “Creeping -up on us the way he did and winning the dash—he’s -certainly good.”</p> - -<p>“You said it,” agreed Ted.</p> - -<p>The two hundred and twenty yard dash was an -all-around disappointment. Not that it didn’t have -its thrills. On the contrary, it had too many thrills, -surprises and shocks, so that the contestants participated -in something that was more than a swimming -contest and the spectators lost interest in the -event itself. When the judges called for the participants -to step forth, Ken and Bluff came out as -representatives for their group. For the Ted -Slavin team, two boys stepped forth, one by the -name of Walt and the other Cy. The edge of the -wooden dock was wet and therefore slippery. As -the boys lined in their respective lanes, Walt somehow -lost his balance and slipped; when he had -picked himself up, he began to hop around painfully. -He had twisted his ankle, and that forced -him out of the race. His team had no other man -to take his place and that left only three contestants -in the race.</p> - -<p>Coach Thompson finally called, “Get ready!” -Pause, “Get set!” The shot went off and the boys -dived. For three laps everything went along well. -The boys glided through the water gracefully. Cy -was setting the pace, with Ken following several<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span> -inches behind and Bluff bringing up the rear. On -their fourth lap, at about the center of the lane, -Bluff suddenly went down like a rock. People began -to scream and shout. Ken, becoming aware of -the commotion on shore, stopped to hear what -people were screaming to him. In the meanwhile, -Nuthin’ and Ted who were sitting at the edge of -the float and watching the race, both jumped into -the lake. Nuthin’ dived first and half a minute -later came up with Bluff. Assisted by Ted, the two -boys pulled Bluff in. He had suddenly gotten -cramps.</p> - -<p>The race continued with only two contestants -now; Cy was in the lead with Ken fully five yards -behind. Ken tried to creep up on his competitor, -but as he increased his pace, so did Cy. The boys -kept up the grind back and forth, back and forth -across the pool. At the end of the seventh lap, -Ken had managed to regain about half the distance -he had lost. And he continued to creep up by -inches. As the boys were ending their tenth lap -and were approaching for a turn, a little boy of -about six or seven, who had somehow managed to -get to the edge of the pool, leaned over a little -too far and tumbled in. The child fell directly in -front of Ken and before many people had realized -what happened the swimmer had fished the boy -out, handed him over to outstretched arms and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span> -continued with the race. But by now, Ken had -fallen so far behind that even by his last sprint, -he could do no better than end up a full seven -yards behind Cy. The race was ended and few -people were aware of it.</p> - -<p>The next event was the diving, with Bobolink -and Ted as the contestants. Both were fine divers -and their form was almost perfect. Each one was -obliged to perform the swan dive, the jackknife -and a third dive of the contestant’s own choosing. -After both boys had performed and had delighted -the spectators, the judges conferred but were unable -to come to a decision. The two boys were -told to perform any one fancy dive they chose. -Again both contestants performed so equally that -the judges called the contest a draw.</p> - -<p>It was the relay, however, that again raised the -spectators’ enthusiasm to high pitch and set them -jumping and howling madly; it had everyone on -his toes following the contest closely.</p> - -<p>William was the lead off man for his team. -Coach Thompson called, “On your mark!” The -two boys crouched. “Get set!” They brought their -arms back. The gun went off and William and his -competitor flung themselves through space, their -arms stretched out. They cut into the water and -set off in a fast sprint. Each contestant had two -laps to go. They glided through the water, their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span> -arms and feet moving rhythmically. Both boys -turned simultaneously and were neck and neck. -People shouted and screamed themselves hoarse; -their comrades shouted advice and encouragement. -Gradually, William moved into the lead. -As he touched, he gave Wallace, who followed -him, a lead of about three inches.</p> - -<p>The next pair were off. Wallace kept his small -margin of a lead with his competitor sturdily refusing -to concede another inch. Wallace, however, -made a poor turn, and placed both boys nose to -nose. It even looked as though the other fellow -would gain the lead any second but Wallace -fought it out and both boys touched simultaneously. -The third pair dived and each contestant -fought hard for the lead but neither Bobolink nor -his competitor would yield. Stroke for stroke, they -glided through the water gracefully and neither -one would yield an inch. At the turn, it appeared -for a second that Bobolink gained an inch or two -on his competitor, but the next moment they were -seen gliding along side by side, nose to nose. The -spectators were frantic with excitement and they -encouraged, urged and cajoued, each his favorite, -to hurry up and get into the lead. The two contestants, -however, touched simultaneously.</p> - -<p>Jack was the last man. By the way he dived, -flinging his body through space with a certain impatient<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span> -fury, it seemed that he was going to fly -across the pool. His competitor, however, was right -there at his side and obstinate in his refusal to be -shaken. Jack plowed through the water at breakneck -speed. People wondered how the other hung -on and didn’t yield an inch. The spectators were -going wild with enthusiasm; some of them became -hysterical. A babble of voices urged both boys to -get ahead, take the lead. But neither one seemed -able to shake the other fellow. At the turn, however, -Jack who was very flexible and fast, manoeuvered -the touch and push off so quickly that he got -away with a lead of several inches. The other fellow -saw himself losing out and sprinted after Jack -fast and furious. But the latter would not yield -and steadily he kept his lead, making the final -touch a full five seconds ahead of his competitor.</p> - -<p>People jumped into the air, fell on each other’s -necks and screamed with delight. Ready arms -stretched out to help the two boys out of the -water. Smiling, happy, Jack turned to his rival -and the two shook hands. The Slavin group -formed a circle and cheered Jack and then everybody -else they could think of. Paul, Jack and the -other boys also formed a circle and returned cheer -for cheer.</p> - -<p>The contest was over and a number of people -went away. The spectacle, however, was by no<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span> -means over. It had been arranged to include several -items on the schedule as pure fun-provoking -spectacles. The first such event was performed -on the diving board. Bobolink dressed up in a pair -of balloon pants, and a bonnet on his head; Ted, -on the other hand, put on a bathing suit that was -twice his size, his fingers hiding in his sleeves and -the bottoms flopping around his legs, with a life -preserver around his midsection.</p> - -<p>Bobolink appeared first on the board. Shaky -and nervous, he walked out to the edge of the -board. Suddenly slipping, he bounced on his back, -went up into the air and came down on his stomach; -he tried to grasp the board, but in vain; up -he went again and came down on his head and -then catapulted into the water, swimming through -the air. As he went under water, his bonnet went -floating on the surface of the lake. Coming up -again, he retrieved his bonnet and waited for -Ted to perform.</p> - -<p>Ted took a running slide across the board and -as he came to the edge, he heeled over, trying not -to slide off; clawing the air, he balanced back and -forth, back and forth, appearing as though this -moment he was going into the water head first -and the next moment—no. Finally he did slip off -and as he fell through space he managed to grasp -a hold on the board. Like a see-saw, the board<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span> -went up and down, with Ted trying to clamber -onto the board again. He managed to put his legs -around the board and his fingers slipped and there -he was hanging head down. After performing all -sorts of gymnastics with his hands, he fell into the -water head first. And to the great enjoyment of -the spectators, Ted didn’t go fully underwater -but got stuck in the water, head, shoulders and -as far as his midsection immersed, while his feet -stuck up, kicking vigorously. Everybody laughed -at the sight until tears ran down their faces. Bobolink -swam over and after spinning Ted around -several times, helped him to turn over. Righted -again, only half of him was under water. Bobolink -pushed him below the surface several times -and the fellow bobbed up like a spring. It was -all the result of the life preserver around his -midsection.</p> - -<p>Two canoes were placed in the water and each -contained a tilting pole. The two contestants, -Paul and Cy, were told to swim out and each occupy -a canoe, which the boys did easily enough. -However, they were not supplied with paddles -and in order to approach within striking distance -of each other, they were obliged to paddle with -their hands. Separated by a distance of about three -or four feet, the boys stood up in their canoes and -poised their poles. But in the meanwhile, Paul’s<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span> -canoe had drifted away and Cy called out, “I say, -don’t run away. Come back and defend your -honor.”</p> - -<p>“Just you wait a minute,” replied Paul. And he -immediately squatted and with his hands paddled -up nearer to his foe.</p> - -<p>The spectators cheered and laughed with glee. -They were having as much fun as the contestants -themselves who now crossed poles as a sign that -the battle was on. They thrust at each other but -only jabbed the air. Their canoes drifting apart, -both had to sit down and do some paddling again. -Someone on shore shouted, “Get together there, -will you? Do something!”</p> - -<p>Others echoed the cry and urged the contestants -on to do something. Just as soon as they were -close enough, both boys jumped up and grabbed -their poles. Cy thrust out and Paul dodged it and -poked back; but Cy caught it on his pole and -pushed it away. Again the poles crossed. Cy’s -canoe was drifting away, and he leaned forward -a trifle, reaching out to strike his opponent; -instead, Paul pushed his pole into Cy’s shoulder and -the latter plunged into the water. Paul stood up his -pole and thrust out his chest as a sign of victory. -The spectators ashore applauded and cheered him. -But just then Cy bobbed out of the water and tipped -Paul’s canoe, throwing him into the water, which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span> -caused the spectators a great deal of amusement.</p> - -<p>The boys were getting dressed in the boat-house. -They were jabbering away a mile a minute. -Ted stood up on a bench and called out, “Everybody -attention, please!”</p> - -<p>“Pull him off!” someone shouted.</p> - -<p>“Don’t let him talk!” another added.</p> - -<p>“Hear! Hear!” someone else shouted.</p> - -<p>When all had finally quieted down, Ted began, -“A friend of mine—”</p> - -<p>He was interrupted by several voices. One -cried, “Who’s she?”</p> - -<p>“What’s her name?”</p> - -<p>“How do you know she’s a friend of yours?”</p> - -<p>“Quiet! Quiet!”</p> - -<p>Ted continued. “As I was saying, a friend of -mine has arranged a dance as a successful completion -of today’s events.”</p> - -<p>“Yea!” one of the boys cried.</p> - -<p>“Hooray for your friend!” another shouted.</p> - -<p>“And for Ted!” was added by another boy.</p> - -<p>“Hooray for all of us!” cried Cy.</p> - -<p>Quiet was restored and Ted finished his statement, -declaring, “The dance will be held at eight -o’clock, the place—the High School gym, and you -are all not only invited but urged to come.”</p> - -<p>He was applauded, cheered, and thanked for -the information. All the boys promised to come.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XVII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Man Chained</span></p> - -<p>The boys were in conference. Nuthin’ said, “I -still maintain, fellows, that we ought to call in -the police. After all, what can we do? Suppose -that gang uses guns against us, then we’re lost.”</p> - -<p>Paul answered, “As far as their using guns -against us, we will have to risk that. But then, -whatever plan we adopt to capture that gang, we’ll -use our brains and make it so they won’t have a -chance to use their guns. As for calling the police, -if we do that, it is very likely that the whole gang -will get away. Imagine what the police method -would be. They would remove all the stuff from -the cave and then wait around for the thieves to -come and be caught. But they won’t come because -it’s bound to leak out and be given a lot of -publicity.”</p> - -<p>“And another thing,” chimed in William, “look -at all the fun we’ll be missing.”</p> - -<p>“But very dangerous fun,” retorted Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>“Your imagination is carrying you away,” interposed -Ken.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span></p> - -<p>Nuthin’ shrugged his shoulders and withdrew -his objections.</p> - -<p>Wallace spoke up. “Let’s get down to business,” -he said, “and develop some plan.”</p> - -<p>“Suppose someone suggests something and then -we will all chip in,” remarked Ken.</p> - -<p>The boys nodded and Wallace was the first -to offer his opinion. “According to our information, -which is scanty, they are supposed to return -within ten days or two weeks from a week ago -Saturday. Now as far as we are concerned, we -have to be there on the spot. That means that we -must prepare to camp there for about a week, -and we have to leave tomorrow.”</p> - -<p>“Is that agreeable to everyone or does anyone -have any objections or want to add something?” -asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“Only this,” spoke up Bobolink, “and that’s -to keep a constant watch at the cave.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll come to that when we work out the details,” -interrupted Jack. “For the present, I’m -sure that we’re all agreed to the proposal advanced -by Wallace.”</p> - -<p>For the next three hours the boys sat in a -group and designed a plan. Every detail was taken -care of and everyone was sure that it would work -out well.</p> - -<p>Very early the following morning, all the eight<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span> -boys, with full packs on their backs and wearing -their Boy Scout uniforms, marched out of Stanhope -and took the road to the mountain. Wallace -pointed out to them the abandoned farm house, -behind which was the road leading to the mysterious -airport. Jack’s immediate suggestion was that -they enter and search it. All the boys eagerly assented -and lots were drawn for the two who -would enter the house, two who would search the -yard and barn while the others were to deploy and -be on the watch. Paul and Wallace won the chance -to enter the house, while Ken and Jack were to -explore the yard and barn.</p> - -<p>The boys withdrew from the road and put all -their packs together, with Bluff to watch over -them. William was stationed at one point to carefully -watch the main road; he himself was to keep -in hiding and not to be seen. Bobolink was directed -to watch the back of the house and Nuthin’ was -told to walk back on the road about a quarter of a -mile and to watch for any suspicious characters -and keep a general lookout.</p> - -<p>Paul and Wallace approached the house -silently, carefully, examining the exterior of the -house with each step. Circling the house, they -found that several of the windows were broken -and nailed with boards. As a whole, the house was -not in bad condition and was habitable. Several<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span> -signs led them to believe that the house had been -used on and off recently. Paul pointed to a number -of footprints that did not appear to be very old; -Wallace spied a banana peel which could not have -been more than about ten days or two weeks old. -At the back of the house the boys came across -pieces that appeared to have been chopped in the -recent past. Turning to his friend, Wallace remarked, -“Looks like they used this place all -right.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” agreed Paul. “And I think that we’ll -most likely find a lot of interesting things inside.”</p> - -<p>The boys approached the front door and Paul -tried the knob. It wouldn’t open. The boys tugged -and pushed but the door held fast. “What are we -going to do,” asked Paul, “break in the door?”</p> - -<p>“No. Let’s pry away the boards from one of the -windows and gain entrance that way.”</p> - -<p>Paul agreed. At one of the side windows Wallace -used his hatchet and pried away three boards -giving them enough room to climb through. Wallace -was the first to tumble in and Paul quickly -followed. With the help of their searchlights, -they examined the room. It was very dusty, with -cobwebs and several broken chairs strewn about -the floor; otherwise the room was completely -empty. Paul whispered, “Well, there’s nothing -much here, so let’s move on.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span></p> - -<p>The floor squeaked as they tiptoed to the door. -There was no knob and the door stuck tightly. -Wallace used his hatchet and pried it open. The -boys stepped into a large foyer. To one side were -the stairs leading to the flight above, and across -the hall were two doors. They approached the -nearest door and endeavored to push it open; it -stuck fast. Pulling and tugging, the knob broke -loose. Rather than break in, Paul suggested that -they try the second door first. The boys entered -into a kitchen. On one side was a coal stove and -an oil burner; against the window was a table with -several dirty dishes; a couple of chairs stood by. -While Paul examined the closets, Wallace struck -a match and tried the oil burner. It burned and -that revealed that it had been in recent use. In -the closet, Paul found odds and ends of crockery, -rags and several pieces of old clothing.</p> - -<p>From the kitchen, a swinging door led into the -next room—the room the boys could not enter -from without. There they saw two open cots with -blankets and pillows. A third cot, folded, stood -near by. In the middle of the room were a large, -round table and four chairs. On the table lay several -used candles, a couple of small liquor glasses -stood nearby and an empty whiskey bottle. There -were some rags and pieces of clothing strewn -about. The boys wheeled around on their heels<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span> -slowly, examining the room closely. Paul spied an -overcoat lying in a heap in a corner. He tiptoed -slowly across the room and picked it up; very -dusty, still it looked like a good coat. He -put his hand into the pocket and his fingers -touched a cold and hard object. It was an automatic. -He whispered across the room to his -friend. Paul snapped open the magazine and -found it loaded. Pushing back the safety cap, he -put the gun into his pocket. Again he picked up -the coat and in the second pocket found a box of -cartridges. Whispering across the room, the boys -decided to appropriate the automatic and cartridges. -Walking silently over to join his friend -in front of the fireplace, Paul passed a hand over -his brow and whispered anxiously, “We’re in the -gang’s hangout all right. And I hate to think what -would happen to us if we were caught.”</p> - -<p>“It would be just too bad,” answered Wallace. -“But it’s too late to withdraw now.”</p> - -<p>“Yes. But I’m beginning to think that Nuthin’ -was right. We should have called in the police.”</p> - -<p>“Too late,” repeated Wallace. “We’ll have to -make the best of it.”</p> - -<p>Coming out into the hall, the boys mounted the -stairs, Paul leading and Wallace following. At -the head of the stairs they stopped to look around. -There were two doors to their left. No attic. Paul<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span> -tried the first door. It held fast. Pushing and tugging -didn’t seem to help. Wallace whispered, -“Let’s try the next door.”</p> - -<p>The next door swung open at the mere touch -of Paul’s hand. Entering, they found the room -very dusty but entirely empty. There was a single -closet; opening it, that too was found to be empty. -They returned to the hall. Wallace whispered, -“You think we ought to break in there?”—meaning -the first door they tried but found locked or -nailed.</p> - -<p>Paul shrugged his shoulders. “I don’t know. -What do you think? Is it worth the trouble?”</p> - -<p>“You really can’t tell. From the looks of things, -it seems as though they don’t use this floor.”</p> - -<p>“Then why should the door be locked?”</p> - -<p>“I can’t say. Let’s break in, so we won’t have -any regrets.”</p> - -<p>Wallace set to with his hatchet. Paul cautioned -him to make less noise. But it was necessary to -do a lot of chopping before the door would open. -Wallace swung the door open and remained at the -threshhold. Wallace gasped and Paul quickly -reached into his pocket for the gun. They stepped -into the room. Sprawled over on the floor was a -man chained to a chair. Quickly glancing about to -see if anyone else was in the room, they then hurried -to pick up man and chair. Upright, the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span> -man’s head hung down and had every appearance -of being dead. Paul put his ear to the man’s heart, -listened closely for several seconds and then whispered, -“Still alive.”</p> - -<p>“Wonder who he is?” asked Wallace.</p> - -<p>“Let’s first set him free.”</p> - -<p>The man was chained hands and feet and then -the chain ran several times around his body and -the chair and both ends of the chain were held -fast by a lock. Trying to break the lock was found -to be futile. So Paul attacked one of the links with -the hatchet. After removing the chains, they -stretched the man out on the floor. Paul made a -quick search through his coat pockets. From the -right one the boy brought out a badge. Wallace -craned his neck to see. It was a government agent -badge.</p> - -<p>“Do you think he is a real government agent?” -whispered Wallace.</p> - -<p>“Must be.”</p> - -<p>“What’ll we do?”</p> - -<p>“Take him out of here. Quickly. He needs air -and medical treatment.”</p> - -<p>Wallace grabbed the man’s legs and Paul took -him under the arms. Thus they carried him downstairs. -At the window, Paul said, “We’ll lay him -down here for a while. You go and call a couple -of the boys.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span></p> - -<p>He jumped through the window. Hesitating -for a moment undecided which way to turn and -whom to call, he put his fingers between his lips -and sent out a low, shrill whistle. Dropping behind -a clump of bushes, he lay there waiting, -watching. In about a minute he noticed Ken and -Jack appear from somewhere in the rear of the -farm yard. They stayed close together and -sneaked along from tree to tree. From the expression -on their faces Wallace could tell that -they were in a quandary as to where the whistle -came from. He exposed himself and waved to -them. They came on the run. “What’s the matter?” -demanded Jack.</p> - -<p>“Anything wrong?”—that from Ken.</p> - -<p>Wallace waved away their questions and instructed -them to wait under the window. He clambered -in. The man now had his eyes open and -made an effort to move his lips. Paul and Wallace -picked him up and handed him out through the -window. Jack and Ken gasped. Paul cautioned -them. “Be careful. Hold on.”</p> - -<p>Outside, Paul instructed Wallace to nail up the -window again, while the three of them would take -the man to the other side of the road, to where -Bluff and their knapsacks were. That accomplished, -Bluff was sent out to call in the other -boys.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span></p> - -<p>They stretched out a blanket on the grass and -with another blanket for a pillow, they made the -man comfortable. Paul moistened his lips with -water and let him swallow a couple of mouthsful. -After which the man fell into a doze.</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ added, “He certainly needs medical -attention.”</p> - -<p>Jack shook his head. “I don’t think there is -anything wrong with him organically,” he said. -“He must have gone without food for a long time -and that weakened him. Also the fact that he was -tied to that chair.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps he wouldn’t want us to get a doctor -because a doctor would have to notify the police. -And he may not want that.”</p> - -<p>Paul spoke up. He said, “One of us should run -back to the nearest grocery to buy a bottle of -fresh milk, several cans of fruit juice and some -fresh fruit and vegetables.”</p> - -<p>“I w-will g-go,” offered Bluff.</p> - -<p>Paul cautioned him. “Make believe that you’re -hiking by yourself and don’t answer any -questions.”</p> - -<p>Bluff nodded and was off. The boys sat down in -a circle and Paul said, “Now we’ll hear what the -result of your exploration has been, Jack and -Ken. Which one of you is going to do the -talking?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span></p> - -<p>“There’s really nothing to tell,” spoke up -Jack. “We found nothing suspicious nor unusual.”</p> - -<p>“Was the barn just plain empty?” questioned -William.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Ken, “except for a few sticks -and stones.”</p> - -<p>“How about the yard?” asked Bobolink.</p> - -<p>“We searched thoroughly but we didn’t come -across a thing.”</p> - -<p>Pause. Silence. Finally Jack said, “Suppose you -now tell us all the other things you found in the -house.”</p> - -<p>Between them, Paul and Wallace related their -entire experiences, not omitting any detail. He -took out and showed the automatic and the box -of cartridges. By the time the narrative was completed, -Bluff had returned. Warming up a glass -of milk, Paul fed it to the stricken man, a little at -a time. Revived, he smiled and opened his lips to -speak but Paul cautioned him not to exert any effort -and just to rest. He lay down again and fell asleep. -About two hours later he awoke and Paul fed him -a cup of pineapple juice and a soft boiled egg. -The man seemed to regain his strength rapidly. -He was now fully able to speak but he uttered -only a few words. “Thank you,” he said. “I will -now rest a little longer.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span></p> - -<p>Toward afternoon, the agent recovered sufficiently -to sit up and declaim his hunger. But on -the recommendation of Paul, to which he agreed, -he was given only warm milk and again a soft -boiled egg on toast. As he ate, the boys gathered -around and watched him. When he had finished his -meal, he sat quietly for a short while, passing his -hand over his several days growth of beard and -laughing in his throat. Finally he spoke, his voice -throaty and rusty. He asked, “Do you fellows -mind telling me how you came to be in that -house?”</p> - -<p>The boys shut their mouths and kept quiet. The -embarrassing silence lasted for about a minute. At -last Paul replied, “Don’t you think, sir, that it is -really your task to explain to us how you came to -be in the condition in which we found you? We -are Boy Scouts and by our treatment of you, it is -evident that we are friends and mean you no -harm.”</p> - -<p>The man stroked his chin and hesitated. He let -his sharp eyes roam from one silent boy to another, -judging them, evaluating their characters. -Wallace held out the badge they had found on -him and asked, “Is this yours, sir?”</p> - -<p>He glanced at it, nodded, took it and dropped -it in his pocket. “Thank you,” he muttered. He -still seemed to hesitate. Finally he spoke, low and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span> -throaty. “My name is Tom Woods and I want to -thank you boys for saving my life. Another day -and I would have passed out.”</p> - -<p>“How long have you been a prisoner there?” -questioned Jack.</p> - -<p>“What day is this?”</p> - -<p>“Monday.”</p> - -<p>He thought for a moment. “Since Saturday -morning,” he replied.</p> - -<p>“Do you know if the gang is coming back for -you?” Ken asked.</p> - -<p>The agent shrugged his shoulders. “I really -don’t know. But I imagine that they were going -to let me rot there until doomsday.” He again -let his eyes roam from one face to another. “I was -in luck to have you boys find me. Once more, I -thank you. You saved my life and I hope that -someday I shall be able to repay the debt.”</p> - -<p>Wallace leaned over and whispered something -to Paul who nodded. For several seconds the boys -waited for the man to speak, but he kept his -mouth tightly shut. Wallace whispered, “Mr. -Woods, did you know that they are scheduled to -make a shipment one of these days?”</p> - -<p>Though the question had been in a low whisper, -the agent had caught every syllable; at the word -“shipment” he winced, but so imperceptibly that -only three of the boys had noticed it. He smiled<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span> -wanly. He confessed. “I am a government agent. -It appears that you boys have information—valuable -information—which I desire.” He paused -and stroked his chin. “It’s only fair then, I guess, -that I tell you how I came to be chained to that -chair in the farm house—a most inconvenient -situation.” And he laughed in his throat. “I have -been on this case for several months. I suppose -you know that we are dealing with a gang of arms -smugglers?” He put the statement in the form of -a question and he noticed that several of the boys -nodded, which was the clue he wanted.</p> - -<p>“Well,” he continued, speaking low, almost in -a whisper, “There really isn’t much to tell. I happened -to come upon their hangout—an apartment -in the city. Keeping a steady watch for several -days, I learned their movements. One night, I -watched them leave their apartment one by one -and I decided to go up and investigate. I got in -all right, but two of their comrades whom I had -never seen leave or enter the building, were there -to greet me. After that, things happened so fast -I still find it difficult to recall all the details. At -any rate, the next thing I knew, I was lying on -the floor of a car traveling at a good rate of -speed. I made believe that I was still unconscious -and listened to their talk, but they said nothing -to give away their secrets. Eventually they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span> -brought me to this farm house and chained me to -the chair. The rest you know already.”</p> - -<p>The boys stared at him in astonishment and -silence prevailed for a short while. Finally he -said, “Now it’s your turn to tell me all you -know. I’m under the impression that you boys -have a great deal of valuable information.”</p> - -<p>The fellows looked at one another and kept -quiet. They left it to Paul to do all the talking -and tell as little or as much as he felt would be -advisable. Paul, however, saw no reason for withholding -any details of the information and he told -all. As he progressed in his narrative, Tom -Woods gasped with surprise several times. He -listened attentively, wrinkling his brow and his -jaw set as he did so. When the story was at last -completely told, he confessed his amazement. For -a short while he kept perfectly silent and concentrating -on some plan he had in mind. He asked, -“What time is it now?”</p> - -<p>“Almost three o’clock,” answered William.</p> - -<p>“How far away is this camping ground you -were heading for?”</p> - -<p>“Close to ten miles,” he was told.</p> - -<p>The government agent shook his head. He suggested, -“The first thing we ought to do right now -is to find a camping spot. I don’t think I’m strong -enough yet to walk ten miles. Tomorrow, maybe,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span> -but not today. However, would you boys object -if we found some spot about a mile or two from -here and pitched camp?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think so,” replied Paul and turned to -the boys for affirmation.</p> - -<p>“Then we’ll do that,” Woods said, “and then -we will devise a complete plan of action. You boys -know so much and are so familiar with the surroundings -that I shall have to include you in all -my plans to capture the gang.”</p> - -<p>The boys immediately set off. Tom Woods accompanied -by Wallace followed at a slower pace. -They found a good spot and pitched camp. After -supper, the boys gathered around the camp fire -and together with the agent devised a plan of -action for the next few days.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XVIII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">The Trap</span></p> - -<p>The following morning the boys rose early. -They had had a refreshing and restful sleep and -they were now ready and eager to carry out their -plan. William supervised the preparation of -breakfast and each one of them had a hearty and -satisfactory meal. Tom Woods, too, had by now -sufficiently recovered to have a full meal. He -even declaimed that he now felt as well as ever. -But the shadows under his eyes and the paleness -of his skin told a silent story of horrible torture.</p> - -<p>The agent rose to his feet and stretched himself. -He called Paul over and asked, “Do you -mind lending that automatic of yours? And also -the cartridges. I may have to use them.”</p> - -<p>Paul surrendered the pistol and ammunition. -Several minutes later, Wallace called out, “I’m -ready, Mr. Woods, if you are.”</p> - -<p>“I’m also ready, so let’s go.”</p> - -<p>Wallace shouldered his knapsack and waving -goodbye to the other boys who were busy breaking -camp, he and the agent set off. As for the -rest of the group, just as soon as everything was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span> -ready, they set off for their destination—their old -camp ground, which they reached at about noon. -After a fifteen minute rest, lunch was prepared. -Paul then declared a thirty minute rest period, -adding, “We have a lot of hard work ahead of -us which must be accomplished before nightfall. -So relax, then we will get to work.”</p> - -<p>Ken was left behind to keep guard at camp and -put it into order. The other boys set off, with the -cave their destination. When they got there, Bobolink -and Nuthin’ were stationed at strategic -points to keep a careful watch. Paul, Jack and -William hid in the shrubbery. Paul picked up -several light stones and threw them at the door -of the cave. Some moments passed. The boys, -anxious and determined, breathed hard. Jack -crept forward on his hands and knees and moving -so that the door would act as a shield, he -slowly and quietly opened the door wide. There -was no one in the front compartment of the cave -and the door was closed. Jack crept back into -hiding and now Paul and William rose to their -feet and stole quietly away. The two boys crossed -the stream and came upon the shrubbery-hidden -opening that led to the back of the cave. Paul -crept in; William kept guard. In a short while -Paul came out. “How does it look inside?” William -asked.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span></p> - -<p>“The place is just full of wooden cases and -boxes. They must have been here very recently -and we missed them.”</p> - -<p>“That’s nothing. Since they have their baggage -here yet, they will come back. If not today, then -tomorrow or the next day. In the meanwhile, I’m -going back to give Jack the word. Is that all -right?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. If you two get through with your job -first, come and give me a hand.”</p> - -<p>“Very well.”</p> - -<p>William disappeared and Paul set to work. -Jack was waiting for William to return and just -as soon as he did, the two boys got busy in front -of and around the cave. They worked arduously -and quickly. Finally the boys were done and without -hesitating or wasting a minute, they set out to -help Paul whom they met on the way. “You have -everything finished?” the latter asked.</p> - -<p>The boys nodded. “And you?” queried William.</p> - -<p>“All done.”</p> - -<p>“Good.”</p> - -<p>The boys returned to their camp. It was already -dark when William appeared. “Well, did -anything happen?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing,” he replied. “And here?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span></p> - -<p>Early the following morning, Jack left camp. -He walked at a steady rapid pace and in about -three hours he arrived at the farm house. Wallace -had told him that Tom Woods would meet him -there. He searched for some sign of the agent -and finding none, he entered the yard and crept -stealthily along, aiming for a position which -would keep him in hiding while he had a good -view of the road and most of the yard. He gained -his goal and stretched himself out on the ground, -prepared to wait until the agent showed up. Suddenly -he felt the presence of someone close to -him. He bounded up from the earth, but Tom -Woods grabbed him and pulled him down again. -The man laughed. “It’s all right, boy,” he -whispered.</p> - -<p>“Whew! You certainly scared me, Mr. -Woods!” Jack exclaimed, heaving a sigh of relief.</p> - -<p>“Just a little foolish playfulness on my part,” -the agent stated. “What’s the news from camp?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing happened. The boys did everything -they were supposed to and everything is ready -to greet the gang.”</p> - -<p>“That’s good. I have a faint suspicion that we -won’t have to wait for them long either.”</p> - -<p>“You think they’ll come today?”</p> - -<p>“Most likely. Though I wouldn’t swear to it. -Nothing is certain, you know.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span></p> - -<p>They lay there side by side and conversed in -very low whispers. Woods questioned the boy -about his home, his activities, his friends and all -sorts of little details about his life. In return he -told many anecdotes of his experiences. He possessed -a very fine sense of humor and he twisted -every story he told into a humorous narrative. -He had Jack giggling most of the time.</p> - -<p>It turned out that Tom Woods was wrong and -nothing happened that day. Towards nightfall, he -instructed Jack to return to camp, tell the boys to -be ever on the watch and have Wallace come -down the following morning. It was quite dark -when he reached camp and he was so tired that -after a sandwich he turned in for the night.</p> - -<p>Wallace rose with the dawn and wasted no time -getting set for his hike down the mountain. When -he arrived at the farm house, Tom Woods played -the same trick on him as he did on Jack. Side by -side, the two lay in hiding and waited. “What did -the boys do yesterday?” asked the agent.</p> - -<p>“They kept watch all day long but nothing -happened.”</p> - -<p>“It will today,” asserted Woods.</p> - -<p>All day long they lay in hiding and waited. It -appeared as though Tom Woods was wrong -again. But that did not despair him. He continued -telling his humorous anecdotes and kept himself<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span> -and his companion cheerful. The sun swung across -the horizon. Noon came and passed. The hours -dragged along. Towards five o’clock, the government -agent suddenly broke off in the middle of a -sentence; he became very alert. Wallace felt a -cold chill run down his spine. Woods hurriedly -whispered, “Don’t get excited. Stay under cover -until I tell you otherwise.”</p> - -<p>A car swung slowly in from the road into the -yard. Behind the farm house, it stopped. Wallace -whispered to his companion, “The one at the -wheel—Bud, the stranger.”</p> - -<p>Woods nodded. He held the automatic ready. -As the car stopped, Bud jumped out and called -back over his shoulder, “Just want to take a look -around. It’ll take me only a minute.”</p> - -<p>The agent crept away. Silently he tiptoed from -behind the car. Coming close, he hissed. “One -move or sound and you’re dead. Put up your -hands.”</p> - -<p>The gangster raised his hands above his head -and moved to step out of the car. As he did so, -he made a quick, wild move for his pocket. -Woods swung, hitting the gangster an awful wallop -on the chin with the butt end of his gun. -The gangster let out a yell as he went down in -a heap. The agent quickly crawled behind the car. -Bud came running from around the corner of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span> -house and hid himself behind a tree. He waited. -Woods also crouched and waited, but became impatient -and fired across the top of the car. No -answer.</p> - -<p>Wallace was still lying in the same position and -eagerly watched the proceedings. He was anxious -and excited. He wondered what he could do to -help but he realized that for the present the best -he could do was to keep out of the way and let -the two fight it out. One of them, he thought, -would surely never leave that yard alive. He only -hoped that everything would come out for the -best.</p> - -<p>Bud stretched himself out on the ground and -began to shoot wildly, combing the ground. A -pause came as the gangster took time out to reload -his gun. Tom Woods took the opportunity to -make a dash of several yards and throw himself -behind a pile of logs which he had set up for the -occasion. He shifted his position for two reasons: -one was that the car did not offer a good enough -barricade and secondly to draw the firing away -from the direction where Wallace was hiding.</p> - -<p>A fraction of a second after he threw himself -behind the barricade, a bullet buried itself in one -of the logs. The agent answered it by sending a -bullet that just skimmed the bark of the tree. -Tom Woods waited. He was in a better position<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span> -than his enemy. Safe behind his barricade, he -also had an open view of the yard and gate and -he could not be taken unawares by anyone coming -from that direction. Of course, he might be surprised -by someone coming from the mountain, -but that was unlikely because he could, without -endangering himself, frequently turn his head, -and scan the outlying woods and farmland. On -the other hand, Bud was in a precarious position. -He had only one alternative and that was to flee. -But to leave his safe position behind the tree was -to invite a bullet from Tom Woods’ gun, which -might be fatal. So he also settled down to watchful -waiting. Now while the agent was in no hurry -and had plenty of time, the gangster was anxious -and in a hurry to get to the cave. Without doubt, -the government agent had the advantage.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile, Wallace wondered what he -could do to help end the situation quickly in favor -of his friend. After Tom Woods took up his new -position, he felt that Bud’s attention would be -entirely taken up by the agent and that he was -free to move away from his spot. Crawling on -his belly, he moved slowly and gradually. Finally -he came to a position that placed him to the rear -and to left of the gangster. He picked out a good-sized -stone and, rising on his knees, took careful<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span> -aim and hurled the missile. Then he fell quickly -under cover.</p> - -<p>The stone missed its objective and bounced off -the tree. However, it attracted Bud’s attention. -The gangster turned quickly and fired twice in -the direction from which he thought the stone -came. In doing that, however, he exposed his arm -up to his elbow. The next instant he let out a -most horrible scream. The agent had sent a bullet -through the gangster’s wrist. The pain was real -but the intensity of the yell was a foil. The gangster -bounded forward to recover his weapon -which had fallen out of his hand. The next moment -he uttered a deep cry and toppled over. A -bullet from Woods’ gun had pierced his throat.</p> - -<p>Suddenly everything was silent again. There -was a long pause. Tom Woods lay behind his -barricade and waited, while Wallace, in his hiding -place, also did not move. When he thought it was -all right, the agent came out from behind his -shelter and called for Wallace to come forward -but to be careful. First they attended the gangster -who was knocked out by Tom Woods. The -stricken man, at the first touch, moaned. The -agent put his hand to the man’s jaw and the -gangster bounded up as if he had been struck by -an electric shock. Wallace whispered, “You must -have cracked his jaw when you hit him.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Guess so. Give me a hand and we’ll carry him -to the barn.”</p> - -<p>Bud, lifeless now, was also carried to the barn. -Removing the clothes of the two gangsters, the -agent and Wallace donned them. Wallace looked -a little ridiculous in his outfit but his companion -fixed him up so that he looked all right. Finally, -they tied up the wounded man so that he couldn’t -escape, and tied a handkerchief over his mouth -so that he could not cry out. The two came out -of the barn. The agent held one of the automatics -used by the gangsters and said, “Here, you had -better take it boy. It may come in handy later.”</p> - -<p>Wallace hesitated but finally he took it and put -it into his pocket. They walked over to the car. -All the windows were shattered and one tire was -flat. Wallace said, “A couple of holes in the gas -tank.”</p> - -<p>Woods looked and then remarked, “We can -plug the holes up; they are not at the bottom of -the tank which is something to be thankful for. -And we will have enough gas in there to make the -ten miles.”</p> - -<p>The two of them set to work. Under the front -seat they found tools with which to remove the -flat tire and put on the spare. Getting into the -car, the agent started it up and they were off. -Wallace showed him the road and Woods hurried<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span> -to get to the cave. After a while, he laughed and -asked, “Well, how did you enjoy the little shooting -match?”</p> - -<p>“I can’t say that I particularly enjoyed it. It’s -too bad that Bud was killed.”</p> - -<p>“I guess you’re right, boy. I don’t enjoy killing -anyone either. But sometimes it just can’t be -helped.”</p> - -<p>“I guess that’s true, Mr. Woods. But it is too -bad that it ever has to be done.”</p> - -<p>“Well, when we get a better social system in -which men and women will have no reason to -be dishonest then there won’t be any shooting of -anyone, I guess.”</p> - -<p>Wallace had nothing to say, so he kept quiet. -After a while, the government agent said, “When -you come to think of it, you had more to do -with the death of that gangster than I did.”</p> - -<p>“How do you mean?” questioned Wallace -anxiously.</p> - -<p>“You threw the stone and forced him to expose -himself.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but you did the shooting.”</p> - -<p>“Of course, but—well, never mind. Let’s talk -of something else.”</p> - -<p>They rode along, the agent telling a cheerful -anecdote while Wallace listened.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XIX</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">At The Cave Again</span></p> - -<p>By the time all the boys had washed and -dressed, William had breakfast ready. Most of -them were tense and impatient, but on the whole, -they felt good. Leaving Jack behind to keep guard -at the camp and clean up the dishes in the meanwhile, -the boys set out for the cave. At their destination, -the boys separated, each going to his station -where he lay in hiding and watched. As the -hours passed slowly and wearily, most of the boys -became a little cranky and impatient. Paul decided -to go from boy to boy, talk to him for a -while and try to calm him.</p> - -<p>At noon, Bluff was sent back to camp and Jack -returned with sandwiches he had prepared and -canteens of ice cold water from the stream. Paul -went to each boy in turn and passed out the sandwiches -and a drink of water. And again it became -a matter of watchful and patient waiting. Jack, -lying close to Paul, asked, “You think they’ll come -today?”</p> - -<p>“It’s hard to tell. But they are about due.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Mr. Woods thinks that they will surely appear -today.” Pause. Deadly silence except for the -breeze fluttering through the branches and leaves. -“You know,” Jack added, “this is getting on my -nerves already. I’d like to see it come off and be -through with it.”</p> - -<p>“Patience, Jack,” his friend continued, “you -can’t hurry a situation like this.”</p> - -<p>Paul moved away and went to keep someone -else company for a while.</p> - -<p>At about six o’clock, Jack, who was watching -the road, was suddenly brought out of his lethargic -position. Sprawling on the ground, he thought -he heard the sound of a motor. Putting his ear to -the earth, he listened for some moments to the -rumbling sounds that came to his ear. The car -was several hundred yards away yet when he -spied it. Quickly and noiselessly, he picked himself -up and sprinted away. He came upon Paul -and told him the news. Not hesitating in the least, -Paul told him where to take up his position and -what to do. Then Paul ran on and passed the -word for all of them to be on the alert.</p> - -<p>Paul returned and took his place beside Jack. As -they waited, every second seemed to stretch out -into an hour. Those who were in the car—whoever -they were—were apparently in no hurry. -Finally, after what seemed an endless wait, Paul<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span> -nudged Jack and pointed out two moving figures. -Holding their breaths, they watched and waited. -The boys were quite positive that the moving -figures would head for the clearing and cross it. -Then they were greeted by a surprise—a shocking -surprise—that awaited them. But they were -disappointed. Jack whispered, “They’re heading -this way.”</p> - -<p>“Yes. You think they have any suspicion of -what’s awaiting them?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think it matters. Our plan takes care -of anything that might be different than we -expect.”</p> - -<p>The boys kept quiet. Two figures passed within -five feet of them. Jack began to fidget as the figures -were passing. Paul had a hard time controlling -him, keeping him from talking. As the two -men passed, Jack whispered, “There’s something -familiar about the fellow in the lead; something -about his walk.”</p> - -<p>“I was just going to say the same.”</p> - -<p>The boys held their breaths. As the two men approached -one of the traps, they stopped. Some -whispering went on between them, as though one -was explaining something to the other. A minute -later, the one who had been doing all the explaining, -put his fingers between his lips and gave a -low, shrill whistle. Jack wanted to jump up and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span> -run over. “The one who whistled is Wallace,” he -whispered as Paul held him.</p> - -<p>“Most likely is, but let’s wait and make sure.”</p> - -<p>There was a pause of a minute or so. Again -the man whistled, then they both waved handkerchiefs. -Paul and Jack then came out of hiding -as they finally recognized Tom Woods and Wallace. -Jack was sent to notify the other boys and -to instruct them to continue their watch. In the -meanwhile, the three of them withdrew to take -counsel together. The government agent said, -“You boys have it all fixed up here. A man -couldn’t get away to save his life. I think you have -done marvelously well.”</p> - -<p>Paul smiled. “We have laid our plans very -carefully,” he answered, “and we hope everything -will come off all right.”</p> - -<p>“I hope so too.”</p> - -<p>Just then an airplane fell out of the sky and -dived straight for the ground. Straightening out -at about five hundred feet up, the plane circled -the field several times. Wallace whispered, -“That’s the same plane we told you about. We -saw it land here once before. I remember it well.”</p> - -<p>Tom Woods barked, “Keep quiet now and -don’t move; we may be seen from above.”</p> - -<p>“No chance of that, sir,” answered Paul. -“From up above they can’t see a thing except the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span> -top of the trees. We had better hurry and take -our positions before they land.”</p> - -<p>With Paul in the lead, the three of them -sprinted from cover to cover and took their positions. -At the last moment the government agent -told the boys to hurry and move away somewhere -else—take some other position. If there was any -shooting, he didn’t want them to be in line of fire.</p> - -<p>The boys moved off. The plane in the meanwhile -had glided down to a landing. It was quite -a large, powerful ship with a double motor. Two -men jumped to the ground. The one in the lead -was recognized by the boys as the Chief. Very -unconcernedly, the two walked across the clearing -and headed directly for the cave. As they came -to the edge of the woods, the chief, for no reason -and without any provocation as far as it -could be determined, whipped a gun out of his -pocket and fired across the top of the cave. Tom -Woods, who thought that he was firing at one of -the boys, sent a bullet whistling past their heads. -The trap which the boys had laboriously prepared -and set was now a futile gesture. Whereas -if they had walked into the trap as set, there -would have been no bloodshed; now it seemed -inevitable.</p> - -<p>The two gangsters now dropped to the ground -and sent bullets whistling in a semi-circle. To rise<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span> -and dash back to their plane was suicide. They -would be in the open, a clear and perfect target -for Tom Woods’ bullets. On the other hand, -dropping to the ground and taking shelter where -they did, they forestalled being surrounded by -the boys. As for the government agent, there was -nothing he could do to obtain a more advantageous -position. Of course, he could have one of the -boys keep up a withering fire while he crept to -their side or their rear. But he was against risking -the life of any one of the boys.</p> - -<p>For a while only occasional shots were exchanged. -Suddenly Tom became aware that the -two gangsters had devised a means of escape, if -not for both, at least for one of them. The two -were separating, moving further apart slowly and -gradually. The agent realized that their plan was -to separate a certain distance, so that one of them -would keep him occupied while the other crept -back to the plane. It was a clever and subtle plan -and from every indication it appeared that they -would succeed. They were also most probably -aware that only one man faced them. Under that -condition, there was nothing Tom could do that -would prevent the one who got back to the plane -from returning with help. Or possibly he might -bring out of the plane a machine gun, and that -would be enough to wipe him out. He became<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span> -really worried. What could he do to prevent one -of them from reaching the plane.</p> - -<p>He determined that as long as it was possible -for him to do so, he would fire alternately at both -racketeers and occupy both of them. He also -wondered what the boys were doing. “But,” he -thought to himself, “I had better keep from thinking -of anything else and concentrate my attention -on those two gangsters. I’m positive the boys will -be able to take care of themselves.”</p> - -<p>Tom noticed that slowly and gradually the -gangster on his right was moving backwards, and -each time he fired at the moving form, he was -answered by the second man, the one on his left. -The spasmodic shooting kept up for almost half -an hour. Suddenly there was heard the roar of -the airplane motor; in an instant, the machine was -turning into the wind and taxiing for a take-off. -Both Tom Woods as well as the gangsters were -so surprised that they almost forgot each other. -As the plane was still taxiing across the field, one -of the racketeers sent a couple of ineffective bullets -after the machine; but the shots did no harm. -The plane rose off the ground easily. Tom rationalized -to himself, “Whoever it was that escaped -with the plane, couldn’t be a friend of theirs, or -he wouldn’t have fired at it.”</p> - -<p>Tom’s ammunition was running low and he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span> -could answer only one shot to his enemy’s three -or four. Five or ten minutes after the plane had -gotten away, he was again astounded to realize -that someone was firing at the gangsters from -their rear. “Must be Wallace,” he thought to -himself.</p> - -<p>And so it was. Paul and he had withdrawn at -the behest of Tom Woods. Eagerly they watched -the battle. Several times Wallace wanted to use -the gun the government agent had given him but -Paul held him back. They, too, soon became aware -of the manoeuver of the two gangsters to permit -one of them to return to the plane. Cautioning -Wallace on how to behave himself and what to -do, Paul crept away and was soon out of sight. -A short while later Wallace heard the roar of the -motor and he heaved a sigh of relief as he watched -the plane take off. He was positive that one of his -comrades was escaping with the plane, though he -couldn’t imagine who. As for himself, now was -the time to act, he thought; the two were trapped. -Moving closer to the edge of the woods and picking -out a sound shelter and one that placed him -well to the rear of the gangsters, he aimed carefully -and fired his first shot.</p> - -<p>Now to return to Tom Woods, the government -agent. Realizing that someone was attacking from -the rear, perhaps it was Wallace or maybe Paul,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span> -he tried to trick the gangsters into surrendering, -“You better throw down your guns and surrender, -you two,” he called out. “That was the signal -that my men have arrived. You can’t get away -now.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll give you hell first,” cried the chief.</p> - -<p>“Very well, then,” returned the agent. “I’ll -count three. If you don’t surrender, I’ll give my -men the signal to blast you to hell. One!”</p> - -<p>The smugglers answered with a volley of shots. -“Two!” cried Tom.</p> - -<p>The gangsters withheld their fire. They waited. -“Three!” The word echoed through the stillness -of the woods.</p> - -<p>“Go to hell!” answered the chief. “How the -devil did you ever break your chains and escape, -you flatfoot?”</p> - -<p>“Wouldn’t you like to know?” countered Tom.</p> - -<p>“Yes, tell me.”</p> - -<p>“When I have you in jail. Then I’ll pay you a -visit and tell you all about it.”</p> - -<p>“I should have cut your throat instead of -merely chaining you.”</p> - -<p>“Why didn’t you? Soft-hearted or something?”</p> - -<p>The chief answered with his gun. Tom raised -his voice and cried, loud enough to be heard a -mile away, “All right! Shoot to kill.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span></p> - -<p>He had two guns and he shot from both of -them as quickly as he could pull the trigger. Wallace, -who heard him, took the cue and also emptied -his revolver. The effect was that the two -smugglers seemed to be attacked on all sides.</p> - -<p>Silence ensued, suddenly broken by a shot coming -from a third direction. A piercing cry cut -short the echo of the bullet. The chief bounded -up from the ground and then fell back again, -dead. Tom wondered who it was that had shot. -He took advantage of it, however, and called -out, “Hey, Smoky, do you want to give up or do -you want to join your chief?”</p> - -<p>There was a pause. Smoky answered, “I want -to give up. Tell your men not to fire.”</p> - -<p>Tom cried out, “Hold your fire!” To the gangster, -he said, “Now, drop your gun and stand up.” -The smuggler complied. “Raise your hands above -your head. Now turn around. You make one -move and you’ll go home in a box.”</p> - -<p>Smoky complied willingly. The government -agent dashed from one cover to another, his gun -ready for action should the smuggler change his -mind. Finally, stepping forward softly, he came -up behind the gangster. Taking a short piece of -rope that he carried in his pocket, the agent tied -the smuggler’s hands behind his back. Just then -Wallace stepped forth out of the woods, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span> -handed Tom several yards of sturdy rope which -the agent used to tie the smuggler’s hands and -feet. That done, he turned to the boy and said, -“I think it’s all right now to get the boys -together.”</p> - -<p>Wallace nodded. He whistled three times and -the boys crept like shadows through the woods. -They met in front of the cave. The government -agent looked at the boys, their expressions still -set and determined and their eyes full of wonder -and anxiety. He laughed. “Everything is all right -now, boys. You may relax.” He turned to Paul -and asked, “Where did you get that rifle?”</p> - -<p>Paul scrutinized his weapon. “Inside the cave,” -he answered. “Bullets too.”</p> - -<p>“And you were the one that shot the chief?”</p> - -<p>Paul looked away embarrassed. “I was terribly -surprised to see him topple over. Because I didn’t -even aim at him.”</p> - -<p>The boys and the government agent joined in -laughing heartily. “So!” Tom muttered, twisting -the words into a humorous expression, “You -don’t aim but you hit the bull’s eye just the same!”</p> - -<p>Their laughter was interrupted by the roar of -an airplane overhead. They watched the machine -lose altitude gradually and continually circle -around and around. When it was at about a thousand<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span> -feet, Wallace exclaimed, “It’s the same -machine.”</p> - -<p>“Who escaped with the plane, by the way?” -asked Tom Woods.</p> - -<p>The boys looked at each other. “Who is missing?” -asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“William.”</p> - -<p>“Jack.”</p> - -<p>“Anyone else?”</p> - -<p>“Bluff, but he’s at camp.”</p> - -<p>“Then it must have been William and Jack who -are in the plane,” Paul stated.</p> - -<p>“Then you had better wave to them. Signal -them to land,” said the agent.</p> - -<p>They all ran to the clearing and waved. As -the huge machine showed that it was going to -land, all of them retreated, so that the plane -might have a perfectly clear space in order to -land. Tom remarked, “I didn’t know you had -aviators among your group.”</p> - -<p>Wallace informed him, “Six of us are pilots.”</p> - -<p>“And you never told me!” The agent said that -he was angry that they had kept the information -from him. “In the meanwhile,” he called out, “you -boys take shelter. It doesn’t pay to take chances -and we really don’t know who is in the plane.”</p> - -<p>The boys took up hiding positions and watched -the machine descend to a perfect landing.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XX</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Battle In The Sky</span></p> - -<p>While those on the ground were so occupied -with the fight they did not notice a battle going -on above their heads; a battle between two planes.</p> - -<p>When the plane landed with the smugglers, -Jack was with Paul and Wallace. As soon as the -first shot was fired, his first thought was that the -crooks might use the plane to escape in. So he -whispered to his two companions that he would -return to his former station and watch the road; -possibly, others of the gang might drive up and it -would be best to spy them before they had a -chance of becoming acquainted with the situation. -Paul thought it was an excellent idea and he permitted -Jack to carry out his plan.</p> - -<p>As Jack moved noiselessly away, Wallace -wanted to enter the conflict and Paul restrained -him. Then Paul went away and left Wallace by -himself. The latter immediately moved into position -and was going to fire when his attention was -attracted by a creeping shadow at the farther end -of the field. By the form and outline of the moving<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span> -figure, he guessed it was Jack. And for that -reason, he withheld his fire—so that the attention -of the smugglers might not be attracted to the -figure moving toward the machine.</p> - -<p>Jack was a short distance away from the plane -when he became aware that someone else—almost -at a right angle to him—was also creeping toward -the machine. He flattened out in the grass to -wait and see who the other creeping figure was. -For a short while he lay there hugging the earth, -not daring to move or lift his head even slightly -to see who the creeping figure might be. After -about five minutes, a pebble fell near him and -Jack flattened out still more. In a minute another -pebble fell near him, followed by a hissing sound. -He lifted his head very slightly and out of the -corner of his eye saw the other person wave a finger -at him. He decided that it must be one of the -boys and he continued dragging himself across -the earth toward the plane.</p> - -<p>Jack and William crept up to the under-carriage -of the plane almost simultaneously. William whispered, -“Inside.”</p> - -<p>Without any further hesitation, William -swung himself up and into the plane. Jack waited. -A hissing sound came to his ears and he knew it -was the signal for him to follow. Up he went and -into the plane. Both boys heaved a sigh of relief.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span> -William got into the pilot’s seat. “Now to take -her up into the air,” he muttered.</p> - -<p>“You think you can fly her? She’s a pretty -large ship, you know.”</p> - -<p>“I can try. In the meanwhile, you go in the back -and look around.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded and proceeded to obey. William -studied the dashboard as well as all the other gadgets -everywhere around him. Though he had -never flown this type of ship, he was sure he knew -how. Major McCarthy had explained it to him in -detail and he now knew exactly what to do. He -only hoped that the motor wouldn’t falter or need -warming up, because that would necessitate the -loss of precious time. But he didn’t think so because -the motor was still warm from its previous -trip. He was right. Everything went off beautifully. -Every single gadget responded to his -slightest touch. The motor roared, the ship turned -into the wind and giving the ship a sufficient run, -it took off like a great bird winging into the sky.</p> - -<p>William was thrilled and exhilarated. He felt -the power flowing into him through his finger tips -which rested lightly on the joystick. Jack came -forward “How is she flying?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Beautifully. What did you find back there?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing much. Some boxes, a couple of small<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span> -wooden cases, two revolvers in one of the lockers, -and also two boxes of cartridges.”</p> - -<p>“You had better bring the revolvers and cartridges -here. Most likely we’ll have no opportunity -of using them but we might as well be -prepared.”</p> - -<p>“I thought so too,” answered Jack. “I have -them right here.”</p> - -<p>“Good.”</p> - -<p>They were climbing. When they reached an altitude -of about four thousand feet, William -guided the machine away so that his companions -and all the others below would not see the plane -and would think that he had flown away. He flew -in an extended circle and kept circling around and -around. Jack asked, “What are we going to do -now?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know myself. What do you suggest?”</p> - -<p>“How about flying to the airport and getting -Major McCarthy and maybe the police?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know whether that would be of any -help.” responded William. “By the time we come -back, their help would be of no use. On the other -hand, if we stick around here and watch how the -situation below unfolds itself, we may be of some -help. They may need our revolvers and ammunition -and we might drop them. Or they might need -us for something else.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span></p> - -<p>“That’s true. But then again, if we should -land, perhaps those smugglers will get the ship -again and make their escape.”</p> - -<p>“I can fix that very easily,” explained William. -“I’ll cut the ignition.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right. Never thought of it.”</p> - -<p>The boys continued their circling flight. Some -five minutes elapsed when William caught sight -of another plane making its appearance on the -eastern horizon. Coming nearer, they saw that -the machine was heading directly towards them. -“You think he’s coming at us?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“Let’s wait and see.”</p> - -<p>The plane was soon upon them. The boys recognized -it as a Bristol, a small craft but possessing -a powerful motor, modeled after army pursuit planes. -The Bristol flanked the boys on their -right side and flew along. The pilot was making -signs to William which the latter could not -understand; besides he was too intent on piloting -his plane to pay any attention to him. He called -to his companion, “Can you make out what he -wants, Jack?”</p> - -<p>Jack was already at the window and watching -the other craft. “No,” he answered. “He holds -his fist up and moves it in a circular motion and -then points down. I can’t understand what that -means. Can you?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Perhaps he wants to land and is asking us -about a safe place to land.”</p> - -<p>“I doubt it,” answered Jack. “He doesn’t seem -to be in any trouble. And coming from the direction -he did, he must have passed the Stanhope -airport.” There was a pause while Jack continued -to watch. “I think he’s using his wireless,” he -called out. “See if you can pick him up.”</p> - -<p>William inserted a plug and turned a disc on the -dashboard. Half a minute later, William nosed -his plane into a dive and was off. But the Bristol -was right on its tail. “That guy is a confederate -of those smugglers,” hissed William. “He was -asking if the stuff was on board and we were -ready.”</p> - -<p>“Ready for what?”</p> - -<p>“He didn’t say. Just asked if we were ready.”</p> - -<p>The next moment they heard a sharp sound and -knew that the pilot of the Bristol had fired at -them, the bullet burying itself in some part of the -fuselage or wings. William brought the nose up -and began to climb. Simultaneously he cried, -“Load the revolvers, Jack, and see if you can fire -back.”</p> - -<p>William wondered what he could do to get the -pursuing plane off his trail. He banked and dived -again and came up climbing. Jack broke a window, -stuck his hand out and fired point blank at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span> -the nose of the Bristol. He pulled the trigger -fast and emptied his revolver. A bullet must have -struck close to the pilot, for the next instant the -Bristol dived.</p> - -<p>The Bristol was a much faster plane, easier -to manoeuver than the craft the boys were in. -“What are you going to do now?” queried Jack -anxiously.</p> - -<p>“I’m going up into the clouds and try to shake -him.”</p> - -<p>But the next instant Jack cried out, “He’s coming -right up and it looks as though he intends to -hit you amidships.”</p> - -<p>“Fire when he comes close enough, and when I -hear you fire the first shot I’ll bank right and -dive.”</p> - -<p>Jack pulled the trigger and William performed -a half arc and dived; the Bristol zoomed past so -close that Jack held his breath. William levelled -out and began to climb again, hoping this time to -reach the clouds. But again the Bristol was upon -them and sending bullets into the fuselage and -wings. William, however, kept on climbing and -Jack frustrated the other fellow’s getting on their -tail by firing point blank at the nose of the Bristol. -For a moment the enemy craft disappeared -and then William discovered it overhead. They -heard the muffled thud of bullets sinking into<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span> -their craft but doing no harm. The next instant -William cried, “He’s flying away.”</p> - -<p>“You think he has given up?”</p> - -<p>“Maybe he—” William left off in the middle -of the sentence and gasped as he watched the -Bristol execute an Immelmann turn. He intended -to fly straight into the craft, firing as he did so -and hoping to hit the gas tank, and dive just in -time to avoid a crash. William was aware of the -manoeuver. “You better lay low, Jack,” he cried.</p> - -<p>The two machines flew against each other. Just -as soon as the enemy fired the first shot he banked -and pulled the nose of the ship up. He still had -to climb a thousand feet to get among the clouds. -He decided to risk it even if the Bristol got on -his tail. “The other pilot certainly must be a clever -one,” he thought. Besides, the Bristol was a lighter -and faster craft and with the other fellow’s obvious -experience, he couldn’t help being out-manoeuvered. -His safety depended upon getting into -the clouds and shaking the enemy. “Jack,” cried -William, “is he following?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” was the reply, “but he doesn’t seem to -be decided what to do next. He has stopped -firing.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps he has run out of ammunition.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps. But he also seems to be aware of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span> -your effort to get among the clouds. He is following -closely though.”</p> - -<p>William glanced and saw that he was rapidly -approaching an altitude of eight thousand feet. -Seeing a cloud which appeared like a mountain of -cotton wool in front of him, he headed for it. -Billow upon billow of clouds rose for thousands -of feet above them. In a minute the machine -plunged into the cloud mass and they saw nothing -but white all around them. They flew into the -mouth of a deep cloud valley. Directly below them -they saw the snowy floor rolling away. On either -side were white walls that rose upwards to the -blue ceiling of the sky. In a few moments, the -machine plunged nose first into another mountainous -cloud. William executed a left bank.</p> - -<p>“What are you doing?” questioned Jack.</p> - -<p>“Doubling back on my track.”</p> - -<p>“What for? He may be out there waiting for -you.”</p> - -<p>“Let him. If he is I’ll dive for the clouds again. -If he is not there and we have lost him, then all -the better. We want to be as close to the cave as -possible.”</p> - -<p>William timed himself. After seven or eight -minutes of flying he called out, “I’m getting out -of the clouds.”</p> - -<p>And the next instant they dived. Out in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span> -open again, both boys looked everywhere for -the enemy plane but there wasn’t a speck in sight. -Both boys heaved a sigh of relief and smiled at -each other. “You did it this time,” asserted Jack.</p> - -<p>“There’s the clearing,” announced William and -pointed.</p> - -<p>“That’s right. Are you going to land now?”</p> - -<p>“I’ll first circle the field a couple of times.”</p> - -<p>He proceeded to do so. Some moments later, -William cried, “Look they are waving.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, it’s the boys. I can recognize Paul, Wallace, -Mr. Woods. They all seem to be there.”</p> - -<p>“I’m going to land,” announced William.</p> - -<p>“All right.”</p> - -<p>William fixed his attention on the field and prepared. -Jack remarked, “Wonder why they are -hiding?”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps because they are not sure we are the -ones flying this ship.”</p> - -<p>“Very probable.”</p> - -<p>William made a perfect landing and Jack and -he jumped out of the plane waving their handkerchiefs. -The boys ran out of their hiding places -and cheered the two young aviators. Tom Woods -looked on benignly and laughed. Funny, but he -had gotten to like these boys a great deal; it’ll -be tough, he mused, to leave them when the whole -mess was finally cleared up.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Night Encounter</span></p> - -<p>The boys and Tom Woods squatted on the -ground in a circle. They were pretty well satisfied -with their day’s accomplishments. There were -a few things yet left to be done. Paul, addressing -the government agent, said, “I guess it’s up -to you now to decide what’s to be done next.”</p> - -<p>Tom fingered his bearded chin, smiled, and replied, -“Well I don’t know about that. It seems -to me that you fellows have done more to capture -and annihilate this gang of smugglers than I -have.” He paused and mused for a moment. “I -want to tell you boys,” he added, “that I’m mighty -pleased with you. I’ve never come across a more -lively, energetic and smart bunch of boys than -you are.”</p> - -<p>There was an embarrassing silence. Wallace -spoke up and remarked, “It’s very nice of you to -say that, but I don’t think we are any different -than other boys. We are about the average, and -the average boy, if you give him a chance, is a -pretty lively chap and a nice person to have -around.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I’m glad to hear you say that,” said Mr. -Woods. “Though, of course, I don’t know -whether you’re right or not. I hope you are. -However, this has nothing to do with the matter -at hand. Paul, what do you think we ought to do -now. It’s getting dark and we have to work fast.”</p> - -<p>Paul hesitated. “I suppose all those wooden -cases and boxes in the cave have to be removed?” -he asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes, of course. That’s very important.”</p> - -<p>“In that case, we couldn’t do it tonight. In half -an hour, it’ll be pitch dark, and it would take -more time than that to load the stuff on the plane. -Once it gets dark, you can’t take the plane off the -ground.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what’s your suggestion?”</p> - -<p>“That we camp here overnight, keep careful -watch and do everything in the morning.”</p> - -<p>“How about that fellow in the Bristol? You -think he may come back here for any reason?”</p> - -<p>Most of the boys were undecided and Tom -Woods did not express his opinion but waited for -the others to say something first. William said, -“I don’t think he will come back. He must realize -that something happened to his companions and -that he will be awaited with open arms, so to -speak, if he returns.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span></p> - -<p>Tom asked, “Any more suggestions?” Pause. -Silence. “I want you to express your opinions because -it’s very important. Although I have already -decided on what to do, you may bring to my -attention something I had forgotten to consider.”</p> - -<p>Paul said, “Suppose you tell us your plan and -if any one of us thinks that it should be altered -we will speak up.”</p> - -<p>“That’s well said. My plan is to take my prisoner -and the dead man in the car and go down -to the farm house. There I will pick up the other -prisoner, who is hurt and requires medical attention, -and the other dead gangster, and have the -town police care for them. All of that shouldn’t -take me more than about an hour and a half to -two hours. Then I’ll return, spend the night here -with you and tomorrow morning we will finish -our job.”</p> - -<p>Ken said, “You can’t go alone. You will have -two prisoners and—”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t expect to,” interrupted Tom. “I was -considering taking one of you boys along.”</p> - -<p>“The plan sounds all right,” spoke up Paul.</p> - -<p>“You think you could hold the fort until I return?” -the government agent asked.</p> - -<p>Several of the boys grinned and nodded. Tom -laughed and muttered, “It’s foolish to ask, I -guess, but—”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span></p> - -<p>It was decided that they would pitch camp for -the night a short distance above the cave. Ken -went with Tom Woods, Bobolink was left behind -to keep a watch at the cave while the others returned -to camp to get their knapsacks and things. -Just as soon as they returned, which was in a -little over an hour, William got busy preparing -supper for the boys, while the others went about -attending to other things. Around the campfire, -Nuthin’ said, “Now that this thing is over, what -are we going to do next?”</p> - -<p>“P-p-plenty of things,” answered Bluff.</p> - -<p>“And this thing is not over yet,” added -Wallace.</p> - -<p>“You expect that guy to return?” queried -Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>“You can’t tell,” spoke up Paul. “He may or -he may not. Most likely he won’t. But then we -have quite a bit of work for tomorrow.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think we will be able to load all those -cases and boxes onto the plane?” asked Bobolink.</p> - -<p>They all turned their heads in the direction of -the plane but it was too dark for them to see it. -Wallace assured them all with the assertion, “Of -course it will.”</p> - -<p>“It will be a mighty heavy load,” responded -Bobolink. “Who will fly it?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Who do you think?” demanded Nuthin’. -“There is only one fellow who is going to do it.”</p> - -<p>They were all aware whom he meant, yet they -were eager to hear the name mentioned. The -question was on the lips of each one of them, but -only Bobolink asked, “Who?”</p> - -<p>“William, of course,” replied Nuthin’ with -finality.</p> - -<p>Soon Ken and Tom Woods returned. The boys -hailed them and wanted to know how everything -went. Ken burst out, “You should have seen Chief -of Police Bates—I mean his face; it turned all -colors as Mr. Woods told him who he was and -what it was all about. And his eyes—they almost -popped out of his head.”</p> - -<p>“I can imagine,” interposed Jack.</p> - -<p>“He wanted to send his whole police force to -watch the cave over night,” added Ken.</p> - -<p>The boys laughed quietly. The government -agent sat down in front of the fire and stroked -his beard as he laughed to himself. Ken continued, -“Well, Mr Woods assured him that we didn’t -need any police protection—”</p> - -<p>“Ha, ha, ha,” laughed the boys. “Police protection! -Ha, ha, ha,” laughed the youngsters and -slapped each other on the back.</p> - -<p>“—and,” continued Ken, “Tha we would take -care of everything.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Absolutely!” exclaimed one of the boys.</p> - -<p>“We most certainly will”—that from someone -else.</p> - -<p>Eventually the boys quieted down and they -sprawled around the campfire and talked aimlessly. -The conversation turned to the airplane and -William was asked, “How does she fly?”</p> - -<p>“Swell. Beautifully,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>“If we only had a ship like that!” dreamed -Bobolink.</p> - -<p>Paul lay on his back and stared at the blue -sky and the stars. “If!” he muttered. “If! It’s -like asking for the moon. That plane is worth at -least anywhere between twenty and twenty-five -thousand dollars. More I think.”</p> - -<p>“Twenty-five thousand dollars!” exclaimed Bobolink. -“Paul, you don’t know what you’re talking -about.”</p> - -<p>“Why. You think it’s worth much more?”</p> - -<p>“More? There isn’t so much money in the -world.”</p> - -<p>The boys laughed heartily; even Tom Woods -enjoyed the humor of it. The agent remarked -casually, “Why, Bobolink, twenty-five thousand -dollars isn’t such an awful lot of money.”</p> - -<p>“It’s plenty. Too much,” was the retort.</p> - -<p>Again the boys laughed. The government agent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span> -said off-hand, “So you boys would like to have a -plane like that, eh?”</p> - -<p>The boys stopped laughing and all of them sat -up and strained their ears. “What was that you -said?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>Tom Woods smiled, “I merely asked whether -you boys would like to own a plane like that?”</p> - -<p>Some of the boys grinned at the very thought -of possessing such a machine. William said, “We -certainly would. It’s a beauty.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” muttered the agent, “maybe I can fix -that.”</p> - -<p>Several of the boys cried out simultaneously, -“How? How can you do it?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know myself,” replied the agent nonchalantly -and rubbing his chin. “I didn’t say I -could or that I would. I simply said maybe.”</p> - -<p>“Oh!” sighed several of the boys.</p> - -<p>They felt the wind taken out of their sails and -their possessing such a machine remained a dream.</p> - -<p>They lingered around the fire a while longer. -Somebody remarked that it was time to turn in -for the night. Addressing the agent, Paul asked, -“Mr. Woods, do you think we ought to keep -guard all through the night?”</p> - -<p>“What do you think?”</p> - -<p>“My opinion is that we should. We can designate<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span> -now who is to be on the first, second, third -shift and so on and change guard every hour.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think it’s really necessary. I am pretty -certain that that pilot won’t return or any other -member of the gang. But—” he mused, “Of -course,” he added, “we could do it just to be on -the safe side.”</p> - -<p>“I think we should,” spoke up Jack.</p> - -<p>“How about it, fellows? Are you all agreed -that we keep watch?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, of course,” agreed Bobolink.</p> - -<p>“S-s-sure,” stuttered Bluff.</p> - -<p>“Certainly,”—that from Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>“Who will take the first watch?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“I will,” cried Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>“The second?”</p> - -<p>“I,”—that from Bluff.</p> - -<p>And so on. As it finally turned out the boys -were to go on guard as follows: Nuthin’, Bluff, -William, Wallace, Paul, Ken, Bobolink and Jack.</p> - -<p>“You left me out,” interrupted the government -agent.</p> - -<p>“You ought to rest, Mr. Woods,” explained -Jack.</p> - -<p>“Well,” drawled the agent, “I guess I should. -But don’t any of you start shooting if I should -come upon you to pay you a visit any time during -the night.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span></p> - -<p>Nuthin’ went on guard and the boys turned in -for the night. They were all rather tired and it -didn’t take them long to fall asleep. Bluff muttered -sleepily as he was awakened to go on -watch next. As soon as he walked off, Tom Woods -crept out from under his blankets, with the help -of some rocks and such things he formed the outline -of a person asleep and himself slinked out of -camp so quietly that no one was any the wiser.</p> - -<p>Everything went along nicely and quietly until -it came to Paul’s watch. He sat on a stone and -listened carefully to every sound, watching intently -for any moving shadows. Suddenly the dull -echo of a pistol shot shattered the stillness of the -night. He jumped to his feet and grasped firmer -hold of the automatic in his hand. For several -seconds he debated what to do. He realized it -would be foolhardy to do anything himself. The -wisest course was to awaken the camp. He -sprinted to camp but Ken and William were already -up and pulling on their trousers. “What’s -up?” demanded Ken.</p> - -<p>“What was that shot?” William asked -anxiously.</p> - -<p>“Don’t know,” Paul replied hurriedly. -“Awaken everybody.”</p> - -<p>Ken cried, “Wake up Mr. Woods.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul ran to do so but, naturally, he did not -find the agent.</p> - -<p>The discovery so shocked him that for a moment -he couldn’t speak. Finally he regained his -voice and shouted, “Mr. Woods isn’t here!”</p> - -<p>By now all the boys were awakened and they -came running up. They saw the stones and sticks -that the agent had used to shape a form resembling -a person. “Say,” cried Wallace, “what do -you think this is about?”</p> - -<p>“What do you think he is up to?” questioned -Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>“You don’t suspect him of doing anything -wrong?” William wanted to know.</p> - -<p>Paul interrupted the argument and called for -silence. “Never mind quibbling, fellows,” he said. -“Let’s see what we can do. We have to do -something.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s all spread out and make a thorough -search,” asserted Bobolink.</p> - -<p>“That’s no good,” countered Jack. “Whoever -fired that shot might fire at any one of us in the -dark.”</p> - -<p>“Wait a minute, fellows,” called Paul. “Let’s -first build a fire so that the camp will be illuminated. -Everybody, however, keep in the background -so that no one will be fired at. As for me, -I have an automatic. I’ll take Jack with me and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[236]</a></span> -we will go down to the cave and investigate. Wallace, -you have the only other revolver, haven’t -you?” The latter nodded. “In that case you remain -here and shoot any stranger who steps into -the circle of the campfire. Everybody else stay -out of sight.”</p> - -<p>He wheeled around on his heel and was on the -point of proceeding when he stopped dead in his -tracks and stared at Tom Woods and another -man who was bound and gagged. The agent had -the light of his flashlight shining upon himself -and his companion. All of the boys were shocked -into silence and rooted in their tracks. The government -agent was quietly smiling. Breaking the -silence, he said, “You need not bother, fellows.” -Pause. “I am sorry I had to put one over on you.” -Again a short pause. “I have a visitor here; I -hope you don’t mind.”</p> - -<p>“B-b-but,” someone stuttered, and it was not -Bluff.</p> - -<p>“Never mind. I’ll explain everything. I heard -Paul suggest building a fire; I think it is a good -idea.”</p> - -<p>In a short while, the boys had built a roaring, -blazing campfire. There was no sleep any more -so all the boys formed a semi-circle before the spitting, -burning logs. Tom Woods tied up his prisoner -hand and foot and removed the handkerchief<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[237]</a></span> -from his mouth. “Hungry?” the agent asked -his prisoner.</p> - -<p>The man shook his head and growled. Tom sat -there placidly, his revolver in his lap. The boys -waited but the latter did not offer to speak. Finally -Paul ventured to say, “Do you, er, mind explaining -the mystery?”</p> - -<p>The man grinned. “What do you want me to -tell you?”</p> - -<p>“You might start at the very beginning and -save us asking you a lot of questions,” Jack said.</p> - -<p>“Well,” he began, speaking low and lazily, “I -really had no idea that he would show up. And -by the way, this is the pilot.”</p> - -<p>William and Jack nodded. They had suspected -it, but were not quite sure.</p> - -<p>“As I was saying,” continued the government -agent, “I really had no suspicion that he would -return. But I figured that if he did take it into -his head to do so, what would be his object? He -certainly would not take it upon himself to rescue -his friends. That would be foolish and stupid. But -if he still insisted on coming, he would have a good -reason for doing so. For example, he might want -to get something, something valuable. Then where -would he go?”</p> - -<p>He paused and waited for someone to answer. -Jack did, saying, “To the cave.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[238]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Quite right,” responded the agent. “Therefore, -not wanting to take any chances, I decided -to guard the cave all night long. But I also didn’t -want to scare you boys in case one of you should -discover that I was gone. So I used the stones and -sticks to give the impression that I was still here -and fast asleep.”</p> - -<p>“But why didn’t you tell us?” demanded -Wallace.</p> - -<p>“I didn’t want you boys to be uneasy.”</p> - -<p>He waited for more questions but none were -asked. Jack said, “Do you mind continuing?”</p> - -<p>“There isn’t much left. He came and I nabbed -him.”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ wagged his head. “But why should he -come?” he asked. “Seems to me that only a fool -would do that, under the circumstances.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that’s right,” added Bobolink.</p> - -<p>The agent smiled. “He’s really no fool and he -had a very good reason for coming.”</p> - -<p>“What?” Several of the boys shot that question -simultaneously.</p> - -<p>“A big bunch of money. Maybe ten, fifteen or -twenty thousand dollars. Perhaps more. I haven’t -counted it yet.”</p> - -<p>“Where is it?”</p> - -<p>“In the cave. I guess it is perfectly safe until -morning.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[239]</a></span></p> - -<p>There was silence, some of the boys, especially -Bobolink, trying to imagine how much money -twenty thousand dollars was. Jack asked, “But -how do you know he came to get the money?”</p> - -<p>“That’s simple. I watched him until he found -what he was looking for and then I showed myself -and told him who I was. And he very courteously -and promptly surrendered.”</p> - -<p>“What about the shot?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“That was his fault,” and the agent nodded in -the prisoner’s direction. “He accidentally discharged -his gun.”</p> - -<p>For some while the boys sat there humbly, -silently thinking over Tom Woods’ story. Paul -rose, stretched himself and yawned. “Some -night!” he drawled. “I’m going back for some -more sleep.”</p> - -<p>All the other boys did likewise, except Bobolink -whose watch it was. And after him, Jack.</p> - -<p>In the morning, Tom Woods took his prisoner -to town and returned in about an hour, carrying -under his arm a small package. When asked what -was in the package, he merely said that it contained -several sticks of dynamite. But when -pressed to tell what he was going to use it for, -he laughed and replied, “Wait and see.”</p> - -<p>Instead of loading all the cases of guns and -boxes of ammunition onto the plane, the government<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[240]</a></span> -agent had a truck come from town to transport -the load. It took the truck driver and the -boys several hours to cart all the cases and boxes -from the cave to the truck. When it was at last -done, the agent called the boys together and said, -“Now you’ll see the purpose of the dynamite.”</p> - -<p>He strung together the several pieces of dynamite, -attached a fuse to it and buried the bundle -of explosives at the mouth of the cave; then he -laid out the fuse for about twenty feet and lit it. -As he did so he and the boys retreated some distance. -“Why are you doing that?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“To shut up the mouth of the cave.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but what for?”</p> - -<p>“To prevent anyone from using it again as -those smugglers did.”</p> - -<p>“But the rear exit of the cave will be available,” -asserted Wallace.</p> - -<p>“You boys stuffed it up, didn’t you?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but somebody is liable to find it.”</p> - -<p>“They’ll have a hard time finding it.”</p> - -<p>Jack asked, “It would be all right if we used -the cave occasionally—that is, using the rear exit, -and closing it up when we left, would that be all -right?”</p> - -<p>Tom Woods smiled. “As a matter of fact,” he -drawled, “I had that in mind when I decided to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[241]</a></span> -close up the front entrance to the cave. Otherwise -I would blow up the whole thing.”</p> - -<p>Just then there was an explosion and the front -part of the cave fell in. The boys sighed and -walked to the plane. They all climbed in and William -took the pilot’s seat. The agent relaxed in his -seat and said casually, “Now show me what a -good pilot you are, William.”</p> - -<p>The motor roared. William taxied the plane -across and then lifted it off the ground. Tom -Woods leaned back in his seat and closed his eyes; -a deep sigh escaped from between his lips and he -relaxed utterly, all the tenseness and anxiety of -these last days leaving him.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[242]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXII</h2> - -<p class="pch">“<span class="smcap">The Cave</span>”</p> - -<p>William circled the airport. Paul looked out of -the window and cried. “Say, look at that crowd of -people below!”</p> - -<p>The boys looked down and uttered exclamations -of surprise. “I wonder what it’s all about?” -exclaimed Wallace.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps it’s a committee to welcome us,” asserted -the government agent, opening his eyes as -he spoke.</p> - -<p>“To welcome us!” Bobolink cried. “What -for?”</p> - -<p>Ken shouted to the pilot, “Just keep on flying, -William. Never mind landing. We don’t want any -welcoming committee.”</p> - -<p>William guided the plane down to a perfect -landing. Just as soon as the machine came to a -stop, the crowd came running toward it. The boys -were swallowed up by the mass of people. There -were reporters, newspaper photographers and -other cranks who asked them a thousand questions -and tore at their clothes and hair. But the boys<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[243]</a></span> -did not mind all that. They were afraid for the -safety of the plane. Although it was not theirs -yet, it was a valuable machine and it would be a -shame if it were harmed in any way.</p> - -<p>However, Major McCarthy and two of his mechanics -pushed their way through the crowd. -Without stopping to greet them, he called upon -the boys to help clear a path to wheel the plane -into one of the hangars. “It is much safer than -leaving it out here,” he added.</p> - -<p>The boys fell to and the machine was stored -away. Then they had a hard time getting through -to the office. Most of the boys were angry rather -than pleased by the reception. “I wish I knew -what this is all about,” demanded Ken.</p> - -<p>The Major smiled. “Perhaps you are not -aware of it,” he informed them, “but you are -heroes.”</p> - -<p>“Heroes!” exclaimed Bobolink. “What kind of -heroes?”</p> - -<p>McCarthy shrugged his shoulders, “I couldn’t -tell you what kind. Just plain heroes, I guess.”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ waved the suggestion of heroism -away. He had a word for it. “Phooey!” he muttered -under his breath.</p> - -<p>“But how did the news get out, that is something -I should be interested to know.”—that from -Paul.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[244]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I guess the police couldn’t keep it from prying -reporters,” mumbled the government agent.</p> - -<p>“Let’s forget it and go home,” remarked Jack.</p> - -<p>“That’s a swell idea,” added William. “And -just as soon as I get home—”</p> - -<p>Ken interrupted, “You are going to do what?”</p> - -<p>“Practice the piano,” suggested Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>“He will change his tie,” counter-suggested -Paul.</p> - -<p>“—I’m going to take a bath,” concluded -William.</p> - -<p>The boys laughed and Tom Woods joined in. -“What are you going to do now, fellows?” he -asked.</p> - -<p>“Go home,” answered Jack.</p> - -<p>“I mean, what are your plans?”</p> - -<p>“We don’t have any,” Paul informed him.</p> - -<p>Using two cars, the Major’s and one belonging -to a mechanic, Tom Woods and the boys were -taken to town. At police headquarters, Tom got -out. “So long, boys,” he called. “I’ll be seeing you -soon.”</p> - -<p>The boys waved. The agent walked off and -they continued their way home.</p> - -<p>At the home of each of the boys, a similar -scene was enacted that day. Coming home, Paul -found his mother waiting for him. As soon as he -stepped over the threshhold, she fell on his neck<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[245]</a></span> -and kissed and hugged him. Putting his arms -around her, he found that she was trembling. Not -knowing the reason for it, he was puzzled. He -said, “Mother, is there anything wrong? You are -trembling all over.”</p> - -<p>“There is nothing wrong with me. It’s you. -Are you all right? Not hurt or wounded or anything?” -she questioned anxiously.</p> - -<p>“Why, no! Of course not. I’m perfectly all -right.” And to prove it he began to go through -a series of stretching and bending exercises.</p> - -<p>His mother looked sternly at him. “The idea -of the thing!” she exclaimed. “You said you were -going camping and all the time you knew that you -and your friends were going there to catch a gang -of smugglers. You might have gotten hurt. You -might even have been killed.”</p> - -<p>“But, mother,” protested Paul, “nobody was -killed or hurt. All the boys are perfectly all right -and in the best of health.”</p> - -<p>“Well, it’s a good thing. But, big as you are, if -you ever do that again, I’m going to have your -father give you a good thrashing.”</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison, who had just entered, laughed. -“My dear,” he said, “if it ever comes to that, I’m -afraid I would get the worst of it. He is taller -than I by a head and weighs about twenty-five -pounds more.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[246]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I would never do that, dad,” protested Paul.</p> - -<p>“I know you wouldn’t. But if you ever took it -into your head to—Well, I hope you never do.” -And again he laughed.</p> - -<p>For the following several days, the boys were -made miserable by the public acclaim that was -showered upon them. They could not appear on -the street; that was out of the question. To set -foot outside the house meant to be immediately -surrounded by an ever increasing crowd, with -every individual wanting to shake the boy’s hand, -slap him on the back, pinch him, and ask a thousand -questions. But staying in the house was almost -as bad. The capture of the smugglers had -aroused national interest and many out of town -reporters suddenly appeared and they went to the -home of each boy to get a story; accompanying -the reporter was a photographer to take pictures. -The boys were tired of answering questions but -they couldn’t very well refuse—it seemed that -getting the story meant so much to the reporter. -Then, also the homes of the boys had overnight -become exceedingly popular and all day long -there was a continual coming and going of -visitors.</p> - -<p>On the third day, a car appeared in front of -Paul’s home and Major McCarthy jumped out. -“Come on, Paul,” he said, “let’s go.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[247]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Where to?”</p> - -<p>“The airport.”</p> - -<p>“What for?” Paul was curious.</p> - -<p>“You’ll find out when we get there,” the Major -answered with a twinkle in his eye.</p> - -<p>At Jack’s home Paul ran inside to call his chum. -“Come on Jack, the Major is outside and we are -going to—”</p> - -<p>Jack was at the moment in the living room -answering the questions of a neighbor. “Never -mind,” he said, interrupting, “don’t tell me where -we are going, just so long as we go somewhere.”</p> - -<p>So they went from home to home, picking up -the boys who piled into two cars, the Major’s car -and Mr. Carberry’s car with Wallace at the wheel. -The boys riding with the Major prodded him for -some information as to why they were going to -the airport, but he only smiled and shook his head -“Wait until you get there,” he answered them.</p> - -<p>At the airport, the boys were a buzzing group -of children as they followed the Major to the -office. As they stepped inside, they found Tom -Woods leaning back in a chair and quietly smoking -a cigarette. He laughed and greeted them, -“Hello, fellows,” he called out.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Mr. Woods.”</p> - -<p>“How are you, Mr. Woods?”</p> - -<p>“What are you doing here?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[248]</a></span></p> - -<p>Turning to the Major, the boys asked, “Well, -now what? What’s the surprise?”</p> - -<p>McCarthy smiled. Pointing a finger at the government -agent, he said, “It’s his surprise, fellows. -You tell them, Tom.”</p> - -<p>Woods lifted himself out of his seat. “Very -well, then,” he drawled. “Let’s go down to the -hangars.”</p> - -<p>The boys eagerly followed the Major and Tom -Woods. At the hangars, Bobolink cried, “Look, -fellows. The smuggler’s plane—she is still here.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied the agent, “She is still and -what’s more, she is remaining here.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“Well, the ship now belongs to you boys.”</p> - -<p>The statement knocked the breath out of them. -Suddenly they all exploded simultaneously and -shouted questions. “What do you mean she is -ours?”</p> - -<p>“How?”</p> - -<p>“Why?”</p> - -<p>“How come? Tell us.”</p> - -<p>Tom Woods smiled. “Just what I said, fellows. -She is yours and don’t ask questions.”</p> - -<p>“Hooray! Hooray for Mr. Woods!” cried -Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>And the boys cheered him lustily and vigorously.</p> - -<p>Caustically, the agent remarked, “I hope that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[249]</a></span> -some day you will be kind enough to give me a -ride in her.”</p> - -<p>“We will,” they answered and laughed heartily.</p> - -<p>Wallace, however, was a bit puzzled. “But, -Major,” he asked, “What about the plane you -were supposed to buy for us.”</p> - -<p>“I almost did,” was the reply. “But when Tom -told me, I cancelled the deal. Now you can use -the money to run this plane.”</p> - -<p>“Hooray!” they cheered.</p> - -<p>The boys were happy. They walked around the -machine and caressed it. “We ought to give it -a name,” suggested Jack.</p> - -<p>“How about calling it ‘Stanhope’?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“No, that name is not a very good one,” objected -Ken. “You have the Stanhope Drug Store, -the Stanhope Vegetable Market, the—”</p> - -<p>“How about calling it ‘The Cave’?” Jack had -spoken and all the boys looked. “You get my -meaning?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Of course.”</p> - -<p>“Certainly. That’s just the name for it.”</p> - -<p>“It is settled,” said Nuthin’. “We will call it -‘The Cave’. Are there any objections?”</p> - -<p>There were none. They were all eager to take -off, and ten minutes later “The Cave” was taxiing -across the field, rising from the ground like -a beautiful bird.</p></div> - -</div> - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Banner Boy Scouts in the Air, by -George A. Warren - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS IN THE AIR *** - -***** This file should be named 52394-h.htm or 52394-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/2/3/9/52394/ - -Produced by Giovanni Fini, Roger Frank and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/52394-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/52394-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d3201a1..0000000 --- a/old/52394-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52394-h/images/logo.jpg b/old/52394-h/images/logo.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d942ddd..0000000 --- a/old/52394-h/images/logo.jpg +++ /dev/null |
